Tektronix VM700T Programmer's Manual

Add to my manuals
277 Pages

advertisement

Tektronix VM700T Programmer's Manual | Manualzz
Programmer Manual
VM700T Video Measurement Set
RS-232 Interface
070-9650-02
Programmer Manual
VM700T Video Measurement Set
RS-232 Interface
070-9650-02
Copyright Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved. Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its suppliers and
are protected by United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the
Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the
Commercial Computer Software – Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication supercedes
that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 1000, Wilsonville, OR 97070–1000
TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.
Table of Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ix
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–1
Related Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the PC and the VM700T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–1
1–2
Getting Started
VM700T Remote Commands
VM700T Remote Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–1
Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Control and Playback Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
appset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
appstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cancelcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cknob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
controlbreak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
disptext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
execute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
filesin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
getclock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
getresults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
hardkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
hardpress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
hardrelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
res . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
resoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
reson . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
restoreconfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rgoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
rgon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
setclock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–1
2–3
2–3
2–3
2–4
2–4
2–4
2–5
2–5
2–6
2–6
2–7
2–9
2–9
2–9
2–10
2–10
2–12
2–13
2–13
2–14
2–14
2–15
2–15
2–16
2–17
2–17
2–17
2–18
2–22
2–22
2–23
2–23
2–23
2–24
2–24
2–24
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
i
Table of Contents
show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
softkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
softpress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
softrelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
spool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
touchpress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
touchrelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
? and ?! Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Button Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Major-Mode Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measure-Mode Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soft Key and Function Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Line Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 1S Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–25
2–25
2–26
2–26
2–26
2–27
2–27
2–27
2–28
2–28
2–30
2–30
2–30
2–30
2–31
2–32
2–35
Status and Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–1
Command Input Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feedback Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–1
3–2
Simple Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–1
Starting a Terminal Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Executing Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting Measurement Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading/Setting Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restoring Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting the System Clock Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the System Clock Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ending a Terminal Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transferring Files (SLIP Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Putting the VM 700T into SLIP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting ftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using ftp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–3
4–4
4–4
4–7
4–7
4–8
4–8
4–9
4–10
4–10
4–11
4–12
4–12
4–12
4–12
4–12
4–13
4–14
Computer-Based Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–17
Programming Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communicating with the VM 700T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal versus Computer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VM700T Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Structure of a VM 700T Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–18
4–18
4–19
4–19
4–19
4–20
Status and Events
Examples
ii
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Table of Contents
Sample Program: SHELL.BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preliminaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Program Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function GetPrompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function PutCmd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function ReadError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function ReadString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sub VMError . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–21
4–21
4–21
4–22
4–22
4–22
4–29
4–30
4–30
4–30
4–31
Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation and Modem Control . . . . . . . . . .
4–33
Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation Without Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation With Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Consecutive Errors Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Control Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The ? and ?! Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A “Generic” Modem Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–33
4–33
4–33
4–34
4–35
4–35
4–36
4–36
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–39
The Function Keys Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Learn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Comments to a Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Annotating a Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speeding Up or Slowing Down a Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Playback from the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Playback from Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Function Playback on Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subdirectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Subdirectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traversing the Directory Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Functions and Subdirectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Renaming Functions and Subdirectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Function Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–39
4–40
4–41
4–42
4–43
4–43
4–44
4–44
4–44
4–45
4–46
4–46
4–46
4–47
4–47
4–48
4–48
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A–1
“A” Group: Audio Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“B” Group: Audio Limit Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“C” Group: Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“D” Group: Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“E” Group: Component Configuration (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“F” Group: Component Configuration (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“G” Group: Remote Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“H” Group: Echo/Rounding Configuration (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“I” Group: Echo/Rounding Configuration (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“J” Group: Teletext Configuration (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A–1
A–4
A–16
A–19
A–22
A–32
A–42
A–47
A–48
A–49
Appendices
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
iii
Table of Contents
“K” Group: Teletext Configuration (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“L” Group: Measurement Locations (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“M” Group: Measurement Locations (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“N” Group: Video Wander Configuration (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“O” Group: Video Wander Configuration (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“P” Group: Auto Mode Limits (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“R” Group: Auto Mode Limits (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“S” Group: Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“T” Group: Measure Mode Limits (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“U” Group: Measure Mode Limits (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“V” Group: Video Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“W” Group: Audio Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“X” Group: Camera Testing (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“Y” Group: Camera Testing (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 1S Get/Set Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A–55
A–64
A–66
A–68
A–69
A–70
A–73
A–76
A–82
A–86
A–90
A–92
A–93
A–96
A–99
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–1
NTSC/PAL Results Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 1G (Echo/Rounding) Results Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 1S (Serial Digital) Results Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 20 (Teletext) Results Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 21 (Camera Testing) Results Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 22 (Video Wander) Results File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 30 (Component) Results Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options 40 and 41 (Audio) Results Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–3
B–13
B–13
B–19
B–20
B–25
B–25
B–30
Index
iv
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Figure 1–1: VM700T rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–1: Function Keys menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–2: VM700T on-screen keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–3: Learn Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–4: Function editing menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–5: Function Keys directory hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure A–1: Source Selection Digital configuration file relationship
to remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure A–2: Digital Source Files configuration file relationship
to remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure A–3: Eye Limits configuration file relationship
to remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure A–4: Wander Limits configuration file relationship
to remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure A–5: Format Setup configuration file relationship
to remote commands, part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure A–6: Format Setup configuration file relationship
to remote commands, part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure A–7: Digital Audio Setup configuration file relationship
to remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
1–2
4–39
4–40
4–41
4–42
4–47
A–99
A–103
A–105
A–108
A–112
A–113
A–118
v
Table of Contents
List of Tables
Table 1–1: Signals used by VM700T RS-232C ports . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–2: VM700T 9-pin to PC 9-pin null modem cable . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–3: VM700T 9-pin to PC 25-pin null modem cable . . . . . . . .
Table 1–4: VM700T 9-pin to modem 9-pin cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–5: VM700T 9-pin to modem 25-pin cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–1: VM700T commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–2: Applications available in functions and
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–3: Front panel button names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–4: Encoding scheme for res command results . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–5: Select Line soft key names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–6: Option 1S soft key names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–7: Option 1S Format Monitor measurement cell names . . .
Table 3–1: Command input errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3–2: Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4–1: Sample program listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–1: “A” keywords: Audio Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–2: “B” keywords: Audio Limit Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–3: “C” keywords: Configuration File (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–4: “D” keywords: Configuration File (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–5: “E” keywords: Component Configuration (NTSC) . . . .
Table A–6: “F” keywords: Component Configuration (PAL) . . . . . .
Table A–7: “G” keywords: Remote Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–8: Option 1S “G” keywords: Remote Configuration . . . . . .
Table A–9: “H” keywords: Echo/Rounding Configuration (NTSC) .
Table A–10: “I” keywords: Echo/Rounding Configuration (PAL) . .
Table A–11: “J” keywords: Teletext Configuration (NTSC) . . . . . . .
Table A–12: “K” keywords: Teletext Configuration (PAL) . . . . . . . .
Table A–13: “L” keywords: Measurement Locations (PAL) . . . . . . .
Table A–14: “M” keywords: Measurement Locations (NTSC) . . . . .
Table A–15: “N” keywords: Video Wander Limits (NTSC) . . . . . . . .
Table A–16: “O” keywords: Video Wander Limits (PAL) . . . . . . . . .
Table A–17: “P” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–18: “R” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–19: “S” keywords: Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–20: “T” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (PAL) . . . . . . . . .
Table A–21: “U” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (NTSC) . . . . . . .
vi
1–3
1–4
1–4
1–4
1–5
2–1
2–8
2–12
2–20
2–34
2–35
2–35
3–1
3–2
4–22
A–1
A–5
A–16
A–19
A–22
A–32
A–42
A–43
A–47
A–48
A–49
A–55
A–64
A–66
A–68
A–69
A–70
A–73
A–76
A–83
A–86
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Table of Contents
Table A–22: “V” keywords: Video Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–23: “W” keywords: Audio Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–24: “X” keywords: Camera Testing (NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–25: “Y” keywords: Camera Testing (PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–26: “d” keywords: Source Selection Digital
configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–27: “m” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Digital Source Files
configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–28: “o” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Eye Limits
configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–29: “p” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Wander Limits
configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–30: “n” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup
configuration file, part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–31: “n” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup
configuration file, part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A–32: “a” keywords: Digital Audio Setup configuration file .
Table A–33: Option 1S “G” keywords: Remote configuration . . . . .
Table A–34: Analog “G” keywords: Remote configuration . . . . . . . .
Table B–1: NTSC/PAL measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table B–2: Echo/Rounding (Option 1G) measurements . . . . . . . . . .
Table B–3: Serial Digital (Option 1S) measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table B–4: Teletext (Option 20) measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table B–5: Camera Testing (Option 21) measurements . . . . . . . . . . .
Table B–6: Video Wander (Option 22) measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table B–7: Component (Option 30) measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table B–8: Audio (Option 40 and 41) measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–90
A–92
A–93
A–96
A–100
A–103
A–105
A–108
A–109
A–114
A–118
A–120
A–120
B–1
B–1
B–2
B–2
B–2
B–2
B–2
B–2
vii
Table of Contents
viii
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Preface
This manual describes the VM700T Video Measurement Set programming
capabilities for the RS–232C interface. The manual is organized as follows:
Getting Started provides a brief introduction to the remote control features of the
VM700T, lists some related software that may prove useful for the remote
control task, and tells you how to connect a PC and the VM700T Video
Measurement Set to allow them to talk to each other.
VM700T Commands first provides a table summarizing the remote control
commands. Then each command is discussed in detail giving the syntax form of
the command, the descriptive form of the command, and an explanation of what
the command does. One or more examples of how the command is used is also
provided in this part of the discussion.
Status Events lists the error and warning messages produced by function
playback and remote operation.
Examples tells you how to write programs to control the VM700T without
human intervention. A sample program that reads a file of VM700T commands,
executes them, and logs both commands and data to a file is included. (A
computer, not just a terminal, is required to perform the operations described in
this section.) Included in this section is a discussion of using a modem to
monitor the operation of the VM700T, and a discussion of how to create and
playback functions.
Appendix A: GET/SET Keywords, lists and describes the keywords that can be
used with the VM700 family get and set commands.
Appendix B: Getting Measurement Results, shows the format of the results files
produced by each VM700T measurement.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
ix
Preface
x
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Getting Started
Getting Started
With its various modes and measurements available in a single instrument, the
VM700T Video Measurement Set is a great tool for enhancing measurement
productivity. Learning to use the VM700T programming capability can make it
even more productive.
For instance, by defining a function on the VM700T, you can make it execute
repetitive sequences of commands, either from the front panel or under computer
control.
By connecting the VM700T to a terminal, an IBM PC, or a PC-compatible
computer, you can perform any operation available from the front panel, and
more. Additional capabilities include logging the commands sent to and the data
returned by the VM700T, and branching to different parts of a program based
upon earlier results.
Related Programs
Tektronix sells the following programs for use with the VM700T (all require an
IBM PC or compatible computer):
VMT: The VMT program facilitates communication between PC-compatible
computers and VM700/VM700A/VM700T Video Measurement Sets. It
features a menu-driven interface for common operations, as well as extra
commands to add decision making and conditional branching capabilities.
VMBKUP: This program package actually consists of three programs,
VMFTP, VMTERM, and VMBACKIT, that transfer files between the
VM700T and an IBM PC or compatible. VMFTP transfers one file at a time,
using the familiar FTP protocol. VMTERM is a terminal emulator program
that you can use to control the VM700A/VM700T remotely. VMBACKIT
transfers several files at a time, and is useful primarily for backing up file
sets from the VM700A/VM700T onto a PC.
VMREMGR: The VMREMGR program displays VM700A/VM700T
graphics on a VGA screen. Note: The VM700T also has a direct VGA output
to provide this feature.
See your Tektronix representative for information about any of these programs.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
1–1
Getting Started
Connecting the PC and the VM700T
This section discusses the wiring necessary to connect the VM700T to a
computer, terminal, or modem. Successful communication also requires correct
settings for Communications Setup file parameters. Setting the Communications
Setup file parameters is discussed in Simple Remote Control beginning on
page 4–1.
The rear panel of the VM700T features three video loop-through inputs, one
external sync loop-through, two RS-232C DTE ports (Port 0 and Port 1), a
parallel printer port, and a remote-control (contact-closure) connector, labeled
“Alarm” (Figure 1–1). The Option 48 instruments also have a GPIB connector.
Operation of the GPIB interface for remote control is discussed in the Option 48
GPIB Interface Programmer Manual.
Fan exhaust
VGA
output
Parallel
printer port
Port 0
Alarm Port 1
connector RS-232 ports
Figure 1–1: VM700T rear panel
RS-232C Connections. The two RS-232C DTE ports of the VM700T (Port 0 and
Port 1) are used to output graphics and reports to a printer, as well as for remote
operation via a modem or direct serial connection. Both connectors are located
on the CPU I/O board and are accessible on the rear panel. Both are 9-pin male
“D” connectors.
Table 1–1 lists the input and output signals used by the RS-232C ports.
1–2
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Getting Started
Table 1–1: Signals used by VM700T RS-232C ports
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pin
Signal
Notes
1
DCD (Data Carrier
Detect)
Required for modem connections only. This signal typically
comes from a modem and indicates that a phone connection is
made.
2
RD (Receive Data)
The VM700T receives data on this pin.
3
TD (Transmit Data)
The VM700T transmits data on this pin.
4
DTR (Data Terminal Required for modem connections only. This pin is always high
Ready)
when the VM 700T is turned on. When DTR is asserted, the
modem knows it is connected to a “live” PC/terminal.
5
SG (Signal Ground)
7
RTS (Request to
Send data to the
VM700T)
With hardware flow control (CTS/RTS selected), normally RTS
connects to the CTS line of a terminal, and the line is active
when the VM 700T is ready to receive data. When the receive
buffers of the VM 700T are nearing capacity, RTS goes inactive,
indicating to the sending device to stop transmitting data.
With software flow control set to XON/XOFF or with None
selected, RTS is always active.
8
CTS (Clear to
Send)
With Flow Control (CTS/RTS selected), the VM 700T is enabled
to transmit data by a high level on pin 8, and is disabled by a
low level. It is normally connected to the RTS line of a terminal.
With Flow Control (None or XON/XOFF selected), the VM 700T
transmits data regardless of the CTS level.
The pin numbers given for the Terminal (DTE) are the most common locations
for the corresponding signals. Note that there is considerable deviation from this
“common” configuration and that not all devices use control lines in the manner
described under this topic. Refer to the instruction manual of the equipment you
are connecting to the VM700T to determine exactly how it should be connected.
Note also that both ends of the DTE to DTE cable are typically female connectors. The DTE to DCE cable is female on the VM700T (DTE) end, and typically
male on the modem (DCE) end.
Table 1–2 shows the pin configuration for a cable connecting the 9-pin connector
of the VM700T to a 9-pin connector on a PC or terminal.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
1–3
Getting Started
Table 1–2: VM700T 9-pin to PC 9-pin null modem cable
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
VM700T cable end (9-pin female)
PC cable end (9-pin female)
3 – Transmit Data (TD)
2 – Receive Data (RD)
2 – Receive Data (RD)
3 – Transmit Data (TD)
5 – Signal Ground (SG)
5 – Signal Ground (SG)
8 – Clear to Send (CTS)
7 – Request to Send (RTS)
7 – Request to Send (RTS)
8 – Clear to Send (CTS)
Table 1–3 shows the pin configuration for a cable connecting the 9-pin male
connector of the VM700T to a 25-pin connector on a PC or terminal.
Table 1–3: VM700T 9-pin to PC 25-pin null modem cable
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
VM700T cable end (9-pin female)
PC cable end (25-pin female)
2 (RD)
2 – Transmit Data (TD)
3 (TD)
3 – Receive Data (RD)
5 (SG)
7 – Signal Ground (SG)
7 (RTS)
5 – Clear to Send (CTS)
8 (CTS)
4 – Request to Send (RTS)
Table 1–4 shows the pin configuration for a cable connecting the 9-pin connector
of the VM700T to a 9-pin connector on a modem.
Table 1–4: VM700T 9-pin to modem 9-pin cable
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1–4
VM700T cable end (9-pin female)
Modem cable end (9-pin male)
1 (DCD)
1 – Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
2 (RD)
2 – Transmit Data (TD)
3 (TD)
3 – Receive Data (RD)
4 (DTR)
4 – Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
5 (SG)
5 – Signal Ground (SG)
7 (RTS)
7 – Request to Send (RTS)
8 (CTS)
8 – Clear to Send (CTS)
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Getting Started
Table 1–5 show the pin configuration for a cable connecting the 9-pin connector
of the VM700T to a 25-pin connector on a modem.
Table 1–5: VM700T 9-pin to modem 25-pin cable
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
VM700T cable end (9-pin female)
Modem cable end (25-pin male)
Shield (ground)
1 – Frame Ground (FG)
3 (TD)
2 – Transmit Data (TD)
2 (RD)
3 – Receive Data (RD)
7 (RTS)
4 – Request to Send (RTS)
8 (CTS)
5 – Clear to Send (CTS)
5 (GND)
7 – Signal Ground (SG)
1 (DCD)
8 – Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
4 (DTR)
20 – Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
1–5
Getting Started
1–6
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
VM700T Remote Commands
This section describes the VM700T commands for use in functions and remote
operation. For each command, the following information is included:
the syntax form for the command
the descriptive form for the command
the scope of the command, (that is, whether the command can be used in
function playback, remote operation, or both)
the VM700T software version the command runs on
an explanation of what the command does
one or more examples of how the command is used
Command Summary
Table 2–1 summarizes the VM700T commands and their uses.
Table 2–1: VM700T commands
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Command
Scope
Purpose
appset
Function playback
Records state information about an application. Not user-editable.
appstart
Function playback
Starts an application’s execution within a
function. Not user-editable.
cancelcopy
Remote operation
Clears print spooler.
cknob
Function playback
Turns control knob continuously, a specified
number of clicks over a specified amount of
time.
computer
Remote operation
Sets VM 700T to be controlled by a computer.
control
Both
Sends characters out control port.
controlbreak
Both
Sends break sequence out control port.
delay
Function playback
Pauses function execution for a user-specified
time.
disptext
Function playback
Displays text messages, pauses function
execution.
execute
Both
Executes a VM 700T application.
exit
Remote operation
Terminates remote operation, closes PC
connection
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–1
VM700T Remote Commands
Table 2–1: VM700T commands (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2–2
Command
Scope
Purpose
filesin
Remote operation
Returns names of all files in a directory.
get
Remote operation
Returns configuration values specified by
keyword.
getclock
Remote operation
Returns date and time from VM 700T system
clock.
getresults
Both
Writes a results file for current application.
hardkey
Both
Presses and releases a front-panel button.
hardpress
Both
Presses, but does not release, a front-panel
button.
hardrelease
Both
Releases a front-panel button.
knob
Both
Rurns the control knob.
loop
Function playback
Re-starts current function from beginning
playback
Both
Executes a function.
print
Both
Sends formatted file to print spooler.
query
Remote operation
Returns information about a VM 700T
keyword.
quit
Remote operation
Terminates remote operation, closes PC
connection.
remote
Remote operation
Initiates remote control in non-protocol mode.
rename
Both
Renames file on the VM 700T.
res
Remote operation
Sends ASCII string containing result of current
measurement out remote port.
resoff
Remote operation
Turns off previous reson command.
reson
Remote operation
Similar to res, but sends continuous stream of
measurement results out remote port.
restoreconfig
Both
Restores configuration values from VM 700T
files.
return
Function playback
Returns a function to the calling function.
set
Both
Sets configuration values specified by
keyword.
setclock
Remote operation
Sets date and time on VM 700T system clock.
show
Remote operation
Returns contents of specified file.
softkey
Both
Presses and releases a specified soft key.
softpress
Both
Presses, but does not release, a specified soft
key.
softrelease
Both
Releases a specified soft key.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
Table 2–1: VM700T commands (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Command
Scope
Purpose
spool
Both
Sends ASCII file to print spooler.
stop
Function playback
Exits from all functions currently executing.
terminal
Remote operation
Sets VM 700T to be controlled from a terminal.
touchpress
Both
Touches VM 700T screen at specified X, Y
location.
touchrelease
Both
Releases previous touchpress.
?
Function playback
Tests keyword, executes command if keyword
returns true.
?!
Function playback
Tests keyword, executes command if keyword
returns false.
Remote Control and Playback Commands
The remote control and function playback commands are presented in this
manual as follows:
Syntax Form:
argument(s)
Descriptive Form:
argument(s)
The syntax form gives the name of the command and the types of arguments it
takes, if any. The descriptive form gives the name of the command and the
meanings of the arguments it takes. The word “” is the actual command
name. Arguments and their meanings are shown in italic. Optional arguments are
enclosed with [ ]. Examples are included for most commands with arguments.
appset
Syntax Form:
string number
Descriptive Form:
variable_name value
Scope:
function playback
The command encodes the state of an application within a function. This
helps ensure that the function plays back correctly.
commands only appear in functions learned from the front panel. They
are not meant to be edited by a user. Editing an command could lead to
unpredictable results.
appstart
Syntax Form:
Descriptive Form:
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–3
VM700T Remote Commands
Scope:
function playback
Sending appstart ends a list of appset commands and starts the application.
This command is required for correct function playback. Do not delete it.
cancelcopy
Syntax Form:
cancelcopy
Descriptive Form:
cancelcopy
Scope:
remote operation
Sending cancelcopy clears the print spooler. The command is equivalent to
touching the Cancel Copy soft key after pressing the Configure button while the
VM700T contains spooled data.
cknob
Syntax Form:
cknob integer integer
Descriptive Form:
cknob number-of-clicks tenths-of-seconds
Scope:
function playback
See also:
knob
The cknob command turns the control knob a specified number of clicks over a
specified period of time. The effect of a single click depends on the current
application and the current screen scaling. A positive number of clicks turns the
knob clockwise; a negative number of clicks turns the knob counterclockwise.
Time units are specified in tenths of seconds.
Example:
VMā700T> cknob 50 30
This command turns the control knob clockwise 50 clicks over a period of three
seconds.
computer
Syntax Form:
computer
Descriptive Form:
computer
Scope:
remote operation
See also:
remote, terminal
The computer command sets the VM700T to be controlled by a computer. This
command is used only in no-protocol mode. After this command is executed,
characters are not echoed, there is no space after the prompt, and any errors or
messages are returned encoded. See Status Events, starting on page 3–1, for
information about the encoded error messages returned by the VM700T. See also
remote and terminal.
2–4
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
control
Syntax Form:
control string
Descriptive Form:
control sequence_of_characters_to_send
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
The control command sends a user-specified string out the control port. This
string can be any sequence of ASCII characters, or any of the following:
^x
$nn
\$
\^
\\
\<LF>
a control character, for example, ^G (bell) or ^M
(carriage return)
a hexadecimal number, where n is 0–9, A–F, or a–f
the ‘$” character
the ‘^’ character
the ‘\’ character
a trailing ‘\’ on a line says to ignore end-of-line
The control command is usually used to control a device attached to the
VM700T, such as a modem. Note that communication through the control
command is one-way only. There is no feed-back from the controlled device.
This means that if the controlled device is not powered on, or is not even
attached, or is sent an incorrect string, the VM700T function or program will
continue executing.
Note also that the control statement does not add characters to delimit messages.
Thus, if the device being controlled requires that messages be delimited with a
carriage return, line feed, or carriage-return/line-feed sequence, those characters
must be included in the string accompanying the control command.
Examples:
VMā700T> control ^G
This example sends a bell character out the Control Port.
VMā700T> control ATDT123Ć4567^M
This example sends the ASCII string “ATDT123-4567”, followed by carriage
return, out the Control Port.
controlbreak
Syntax Form:
controlbreak number
Descriptive Form:
controlbreak tenths-of-seconds
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
A controlbreak sends a break character out the control port for the specified
number of time units (tenths of seconds).
Example:
VMā700T> controlbreak 10
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–5
VM700T Remote Commands
This command sends a break character out the control port for one second.
NOTE. If controlbreak is executed from remote control or function playback
immediately after a control command has printed characters to the port, the
break character may be actually transmitted for a shorter time than requested.
(This happens because of the way the VM700T buffers control and controlĆ
break requests.) To ensure that the break character is sent for the full amount of
time requested, allow sufficient time for all characters printed with the control
command to finish printing before issuing the controlbreak command.
delay
Syntax Form:
delay number
Descriptive Form:
delay tenths-of-seconds
Scope:
function playback
The delay command pauses function execution for a specified amount of time,
given in tenths of seconds.
Example:
VMā700T> delay 10
This command pauses function execution for a full second.
disptext
Syntax Form:
disptext string[\newline string...]
Descriptive Form:
disptext string[\newline string...]
Scope:
function playback
The disptext command displays a user-specified message on the VM700T
front panel. When the message appears on the VM700T front panel, function
execution stops until you touch the display screen.
Up to 79 characters can appear on a line. You can create a multi-line message by
ending a line with a backslash character (“\”).
If the disptext command is contained in a function being played back from
remote control, the message appears on the remote terminal if the Remote
Control/Message Display item in the Communication Setup file is set to Remote.
In this case, function execution stops until you type a carriage return.
If the Remote Control/Message Display item in the Communication Setup file is
set to VM700 Screen, the message appears on the display screen of the VM700T
even when the function is being played back from remote control. Function
execution stops until you touch the display screen.
2–6
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
Example:
disptext Hello, world!
When this line is executed in a function, it displays the message “Hello, world!”
on the VM700T display. Function execution stops until you touch the screen.
disptext \
Roses are red,\
Violets are blue,\
Sugar is sweet,\
And so's a million dollars taxĆfree.
When this line is executed in a function, it displays four lines of doggerel on the
VM700T display. Function execution resumes when you touch the screen.
execute
Syntax Form:
execute string
Descriptive Form:
execute application-name
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
Sending the execute command starts a VM700T application. An application is
one of the executable files (with exceptions noted below) found in the Instrument
Operations, VM700 Diagnostics, or Video Measurements directories in the
Executable Files directory. Selecting an operational mode application (Waveform, Vector, Picture, or Auto) is equivalent to pressing one of the mode buttons
on the front panel; the LED lights up on the corresponding button. Selecting a
measurement or diagnostic application is equivalent to touching a soft key from
one of the Measure-mode windows.
Example:
VMā700T> execute ChromLum~GainDelay
This example starts the ChromLum Gaindelay application.
When specifying application names in functions or remote operation commands,
it is important to match the case (upper or lower) and any special characters used
in the application’s name. Table 2–2 lists the applications you can execute under
remote control and gives their exact names in functions and remote operation
commands. Refer to Naming Conventions on page 2–30 for information about
the rules for specifying application names.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–7
VM700T Remote Commands
Table 2–2: Applications available in functions and remote controla
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Instrument operations
Configure a, b
FTP
Function b
SystemInit
Vector
Waveform
Acquisition~
Diagnostic
AdcGain~
Adjustment
CalDac~
Adjustment
Measure~
Sinewave
Measure b
Picture
AnalogInput~
Diagnostic
AudioAnalog~
Diagnostic
AudioProcessor~
Diagnostic
Controller~
Diagnostic
DiagsLoop
FilterBoard~
Diagnostic
Genlock~
Diagnostic
Measure~
Squarewave
Measure~
Temperature
Bar~LineTime
Bounce
Burst~Frequency
ChromLum~
GainDelay
Chrominance~
AMPM
Chrominance~
FreqResp
(NTSC only)
Chrominance~
NonLinearity
ColorBar
DGDP
GroupDelay~
SinX_X
H_Blank
H_Timing
ICPM
Jitter
Jitter~Long_Time
K_Factor
Line~Frequency
Luminance~
NonLinearity
MultiBurst
Noise~Spectrum
SCH_Phase
TwoField
VITS~ID (NTSC only)
V_Blank
Video~Standard
Frequency~
Response
VM700T diagnostics c
Video measurements
Echo/rounding (Option 1G)
Echo
Rounding~Errors
Teletext (Option 20)
SoundInSync
Teletext
Camera Testing (Option 21)
Colorimetry
Defects
Detail
Fixed_Pattern~
Noise
Gamma
Geometry~Registration
Shading
Vertical~Smear
Bowtie
Component~
Channel_Delay
Component~ColorBar
Component~
K_Factor
Component~
LevelMeter
Component~
Multiburst
Component~Noise
Component~
NonLinearity
Component~Vector
Lightning
Component (Option 30)
2–8
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
Table 2–2: Applications available in functions and remote controla (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Audio (Option 40 and Option 41)
Audio~Analyzer
Audio~Monitor
Multitone
View_Audio~
Auto_Test
Audio~Spectrum
Calibrate~
AudioBoard
Identify~
Audio_Hardware
a
Additional applications may be included as further VM 700T options are introduced. Press the Measure key to find out
what applications are available for your VM 700T.
b
The Configure, Function, and Measure files in the Instrument~Operations directory cannot be selected via remote control.
c
Diagnostic routines can be selected via remote control, but passed test results are not returned. However, errors are
logged to the Diagnostic~Errors file which can be read via remote control.
exit
Syntax Form:
exit
Descriptive Form:
exit
Scope:
remote operation
The exit command terminates the remote session and closes the connection
between the VM700T and the computer or terminal. exit takes no arguments.
exit is equivalent to quit.
filesin
Syntax Form:
filesin string
Descriptive Form:
filesin VM700T_directory
Scope:
remote operation
The filesin command returns the names of all files in the specified directory.
Example:
VMā700T> filesin /nvram0/FunctionKeys/myfiles
myfile1
myfile2
myfile3
VMā700T>
get
Syntax Form:
get string [A|B|C]
Descriptive Form:
get keyword [A|B|C]
Scope:
remote operation
See also:
set
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–9
VM700T Remote Commands
The get command returns the configuration file value specified by keyword on
the channel specified by channel_letter. The keywords available are listed in
Appendix B.
Example:
VMā700T> get VSTA
NTSC
VMā700T> get DHSM A
Meas_Set_1
VMā700T>
The first command in the example returns the current video standard for source
A. (In this case, it’s NTSC.) The second command in the example returns the
name of the current Selected Measurements File for source A when using the
NTSC standard. (The file’s name is Meas_Set_1.)
getclock
Syntax Form:
getclock
Descriptive Form:
getclock
Scope:
remote operation
The getclock command returns the date and time from the VM700T system
clock in the form:
mon dd hh:mm:ss yyyy
where mon is the first three letters of the month, dd is the day of the month, hh is
the current hour, mm is the minute, ss is the second, and yyyy is the current year.
getclock takes no arguments.
Example:
VMā700T> getclock
Jul 28 14:54:37 1996
getresults
Syntax Form:
getresults [verbose] [string[ string]]
Descriptive Form:
getresults [verbose] [keyword[ keyword]]
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
The getresults command stores Measure or Auto mode measurement results in
default files in the Measurement~Results directory. In Measure mode, entering
getresults with no argument(s) stores the measurement results for the current
measurement. If no measurement is currently being executed, the message
Request not supported is returned. If a measurement is being executed, the
message Results in file: filename is returned. Use the show filename command
to view the results.
2–10
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
Example:
VMā700T> getresults
Results in file: ChromLum~GainDelay
Entering getresults verbose in Measure mode stores additional information
for DGDP, Groupdelay~SinX_X, Luminance~NonLinearity, and Noise~Spectrum measurements. The information is displayed as one or more rows of
unlabeled numbers, and is set off from the main file display by a line of plus
signs (++++).
For DGDP and Luminance~NonLinearity, the additional data are the readouts at
each step level in the display.
For Groupdelay~SinX_X, 82 additional measurement results are provided, at
various frequencies. The first group of results shows the energy in dB, while the
second group shows the delay in ns. Initial frequency is 138.5 kHz, with an
increment of 69.3 kHz. Frequency and increment are calculated using the
following formulas (based on a sub-carrier frequency, Fsc, of 4.43316875 MHz):
freq (Groupdelay) = 2 x Fsc /64, increment (Groupdelay) = Fsc /64
For Noise~Spectrum, 198 additional measurements are provided, at various
frequencies. The additional data represents noise energy in dB at the frequency.
Initial frequency is 34.6 kHz, with frequency increment 34.6 kHz. Frequency and
increment are calculated using the following formulas (based on a sub-carrier
frequency, Fsc, of 4.43316875 MHz):
freq (Noise~Spectrum) = Fsc /128
increment (Noise~Spectrum) = Fsc /128
In Auto mode, entering getresults with no argument(s) executes the current
selected measurement list and stores the results in the Measurement~Results
Auto file. The message “Results in file: Auto” is returned.
You can also use the getresults command in Auto mode with one or more
keyword arguments. The keywords, listed in Appendix B, in effect specify a
temporary selected measurements list that overrides the active Selected
Measurements file. The new selected measurements stay in effect until a
restoreconfig command or a set command specifying the Selected Measurements file is issued.
Example:
VMā700T> execute H_Timing
VMā700T> getresults
H_Timing
VMā700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–11
VM700T Remote Commands
This command sequence executes the H_Timing measurement, then stores the
results in file /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Measurement~Results/H_Timing.
VMā700T> execute Auto
VMā700T> getresults PBAA PBRT PSTB
Results in file: Auto
This command sequence creates a temporary selected measurements list of three
measurements: Luminance Bar Amplitude, Bar Rise Time, and Sync-to-Burst
Start.
hardkey
Syntax Form:
hardkey string
Descriptive Form:
hardkey button_name
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
See also:
hardpress, hardrelease
Using the hardkey command is equivalent to pressing and releasing a specified
front panel button. The hardkey command has the same effect as hardpress
followed by hardrelease; however, in general hardkey should be used instead
of these commands.
Example:
VMā700T> hardkey Vector
This command has the same effect as pressing the Vector button on the front
panel.
Front panel button names are listed in Table 2–3.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 2–3: Front panel button names
A
Display
Picture
Auto
Freeze
SelectLine
Average
Graticule
Vector
B
Help
Waveform
C
Menu
XY (Arrow selector)
Copy
MoveExpand
NOTE. The Configure, Function, and Measure buttons cannot be selected in
functions or remote operation.
2–12
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
When specifying button names in functions or remote operation commands, it is
important to match the name shown in Table 2–3 exactly, including upper or
lower case.
hardpress
Syntax Form:
hardpress string
Descriptive Form:
hardpress button_name
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
See also:
hardkey, hardrelease
The hardpress command is equivalent to pressing a specified front panel button
without releasing it. The button remains pressed (held in) until a hardrelease
command is received. The hardpress and hardrelease commands should be
used with buttons that need to be held while another action takes place. For all
other buttons, use hardkey. Front-panel button names are listed in Table A-3.
Note also that if a button toggles (for example, Freeze and Average) you can use
hardpress again to turn it off.
When specifying button names in functions or remote operation commands, it is
important to match the name shown in Table 2–3 exactly, including upper or
lower case.
Example:
VMā700T> hardpress Display
VMā700T> knob 50
VMā700T> hardrelease Display
This command sequence presses and holds the Display button, increases the
display intensity by turning the knob clockwise fifty clicks, then releases the
Display button.
hardrelease
Syntax Form:
hardrelease string
Descriptive Form:
hardrelease button_name
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
See also:
hardkey, hardpress
A hardrelease command indicates that the specified front panel button has
been released. Front-panel button names are listed in Table A-3. When specifying button names in functions or remote operation commands, it is important
to match the name shown in Table 2–3 exactly, including upper or lower case.
Example:
VMā700T> hardrelease Display
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–13
VM700T Remote Commands
This example releases the Display button on the front panel. See also the
example accompanying the explanation of hardpress.
knob
Syntax Form:
knob integer
Descriptive Form:
knob number_of_clicks
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
See also:
cknob
The knob command turns the control knob a specified number of clicks. The
effect of a single click depends on the current application and the current screen
scaling. A positive number of clicks turns the knob clockwise; a negative
number of clicks turns the knob counterclockwise.
Example:
VMā700T> knob -50
This command turns the knob 50 clicks counterclockwise.
loop
Syntax Form:
loop
Descriptive Form:
loop
Scope:
function playback
The loop command restarts a function from its first statement. Functions
containing a loop statement will only exit if they contain a branch that leads to a
return statement, or if the Function button is pressed on the front panel, or if
the VM700T is turned off.
Example:
execute Waveform appstart
appstart
delay 50
execute Vector appstart
appstart
delay 50
execute H_Timing appstart
appstart
delay 50
loop
This example function cycles through Waveform, Vector, and H_Timing at
five-second intervals. Function execution can be stopped by pressing the
Function button on the front panel.
2–14
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
playback
Syntax Form:
playback string
Descriptive Form:
playback function_name
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
The playback command calls and executes a function. The default path for the
function is /nvramØ/FunctionKeys. If the function is contained in a subdirectory
of /nvramØ/FunctionKeys, that subdirectory must be included in the argument of
the playback command.
Example:
VMā700T> playback my_dir/junk
This example plays back a function named “junk” in directory “my_dir”, which
is a subdirectory of /nvramØ/FunctionKeys.
print
Syntax Form:
print string
Descriptive Form:
print VM700T_file
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
See also:
spool
The print command sends a formatted file to the print spooler. The file’s format
is specified by the Format item for the Copy port in the Communications Setup
file . The default path for the file is the Measurement~Results directory, but other
files can be specified with a full pathname or a path relative to the Measurement~Results directory. Compare spool.
Example:
VMā700T> print ChromLum~Gaindelay
This example sends the file ChromLum~Gaindelay from directory Measurement~Results to the print spooler, in the format currently specified by the Format
item for the Copy port in the Communications Setup file.
VMā700T> print /rom/ConfigFiles/Measurement~Locations/
NTSC/System~Default
This example prints the default Measurement Locations file for the NTSC
standard, in the format currently specified by the Format item for the Copy port
in the Communications Setup file. (Note that the path shown only applies to
VM700T units equipped with both Option 01, NTSC, and Option 11, PAL.)
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–15
VM700T Remote Commands
query
Syntax Form:
query string
Descriptive Form:
query keyword
Scope:
remote operation
A query command returns information about the VM700T keyword used as its
argument. In computer mode, information returned includes the type and range
of permissible values for each field returned by the get command or used as an
argument by the set command. If the field specifies a numeric value, the
permissible range of numbers is returned. If the field specifies a file name or
choice of other discrete values, the values that can be used as an argument are
listed.
In terminal mode, the query command also tells you whether or not the keyword
is channel-specific (that is, if it requires a channel-letter when used in a get or
set command)
Examples:
(Terminal mode)
VMā700T> query VSCA
channel independent
field 1 is a file name. Possible names are:
System~Default
VMā700T> query LZCL
channel specific
field 1 is an integer value with range 1 to 625
VMā700T> query SP0A
channel independent
field 1 is a string. Possible strings are:
none SLIP
(Computer mode)
VMā700T> query VSCA
F1: file list:
System~Default
VMā700T> query LZCL
F1: integer 1 625
VMā700T> query SP0A
F1: string list:
None
SLIP
VMā700T>
2–16
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
quit
Syntax Form:
quit
Descriptive Form:
quit
Scope:
remote operation
See also:
exit
The quit command terminates the remote session and closes the connection
between the VM700T and the computer or terminal. The quit command takes
no arguments; quit is equivalent to exit.
remote
Syntax Form:
remote
Descriptive Form:
remote
Scope:
remote operation
See also:
computer, terminal
The remote command initiates remote control in non-protocol mode only. You
must enter remote mode before any other remote command is valid. The remote
command takes no arguments.
rename
Syntax Form:
rename string string
Descriptive Form:
rename old_filename new_filename
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
The rename command changes the name of a file in the Measurement~Results
directory. This command is particularly useful when you want to get two or more
results files from the same measurement and compare them. You can get the
results from the first measurement, rename the results file for the first measurement, then get a second results file from the same measurement. You can then
either compare the two results files visually or transfer their contents to a
computer for automated comparison.
Example:
VMā700T> rename H_Timing H_Timing_1
This command changes the file named “H_Timing” in the Measurement~Results
directory to “H_Timing_1”.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–17
VM700T Remote Commands
execute H_Timing
delay 50
getresults
rename H_Timing H_Timing_old
delay 18000
getresults
This sequence of function commands starts the H_Timing application, delays
five seconds, then records measurement results from the application. It then
changes the name of the measurement results file from “H_Timing” to
“H_Timing_old”. It then waits one half-hour, and records measurement results
from the application again. The two measurement results files, “H_Timing” and
“H_Timing_old”, can then be compared for differences.
res
Syntax Form:
res [-v] [number[ number...]]
Descriptive Form:
res [-v] [position-of-result[ position-of-result...]]
Scope:
remote operation
See also:
resoff, reson
The res command returns an encoded or human-readable ASCII string
containing the result of the measurement executing on the VM700T. The res
command can be used whenever a measurement that returns a result is executing
on the VM700T. (Most measure-mode measurements return results.)
The -v option tells res to produce the verbose (human-readable) form of the
output. The default is the encoded form of the output, intended to be read by
computers.
The optional number arguments specify the ordinal numbers of measurement
results desired. For example, if a measurement produces seven results and you
only want results 1, 2, and 5, you would issue the command res 1 2 5.
Deciphering res Results: the –v Option. Results returned by res are deciphered
differently, depending on whether or not the -v option is present in the command
line.
Consider the following command sequence:
execute H_Timing
getresults
show H_Timing
2–18
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
This sequence of commands transfers the H_Timing measurement results file out
the VM700T remote port, in the following form:
Measurement Results
Channel B
Tue Jul 30 11:16:12
H Timing
Line = 17
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Sync Rise Time
255.8 n sec
Sync Fall Time
260.0 n sec
Sync Width
4.69 u sec
Sync Level
301.2 mV
Burst Level
306.0 mV
Sync to Burst Start
5.52 u sec
Burst Width
2.19 u sec
----------------------------------------------------------------------
The equivalent result, generated by the following command sequence using the
–v option:
execute H_Timing
res -v
looks like this:
18 1:255841 2:260041 3:46944 4:301249 5:306049 6:55244
7:21944
This result is interpreted as follows:
The first number (18) uniquely identifies the measurement application that
generated the result. The H_Timing measurement’s identification number is
18.
The second and succeeding numbers have the form XX:YYYYYY. The
digit(s) to the left of the colon signify the data item number. In the H_Timing
measurement, 1 is the sync rise time value, 2 is the sync fall time value, etc.
The digits to the right of the colon indicate the measurement result, encoded
as follows:
If D is the number of digits in the measurement result, the leftmost D-2
digits specify the mantissa of the measurement result, normalized to a
number between 0 and 10 (preceded by a minus sign if the mantissa is
negative). For example, if the measurement result is 301149, the
mantissa of the number is 3.011.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–19
VM700T Remote Commands
The rightmost two digits specify the power of ten by which the mantissa
is multiplied, plus fifty. Thus, if the multiplier is 10–6 (“micro”), the
rightmost two digits in the data item are 44. If the multiplier is 103
(“kilo”), the rightmost two digits in the data item are 53.
If N is the total number of measurement results returned, the total number of
data items sent is always equal to 2N +1: one for the measurement’s
identifying number, followed by an ordinal number and the data value for
each measurement result.
An asterisk character (‘*’) returned as data indicates that a measurement
result is unavailable. This happens, for instance, when the VM700T is
unable to find or recognize a signal feature necessary for a particular
measurement.
Deciphering res Results: No –v Option. When used without the option, returns an encoded string containing the same information as the string returned
by the option, but in compressed form. Each byte of the human-readable
message maps to a nibble (that is a half-byte or four bits) in the encoded
message, as shown in Table 2–4.
Table 2–4: Encoding scheme for res command
results
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ASCII character
Hexadecimal encoding
‘0’–’9’
0–9
Space
A
–
B
*
C
End-of-Buffer
D
Note that the colon character does not appear in the table. This is because colon
characters are only output as visual delimiters for the human-readable form of
the measurement result. In the encoded form, only space characters are output as
delimiters.
If an odd number of nibbles encode a measurement set, the nibble following the
end-of-buffer nibble is filled with another end-of-buffer nibble.
Notes About Interpreting res Results. The command only reports results that
are in the application’s current “measurement loop.” This means that may
not return all results that may be contained in a measurement results file on each
pass. Results that are returned, however, are uniquely identified so that a
computer program (or a human reader) can always correctly identify them.
2–20
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
Example:
VMā700T>execute V_Blank
VMā700T>hardkey Menu
VMā700T>softkey Equalizer_Pulse
VMā700T>hardkey Freeze
VMā700T>getresults
V_Blank
VMā700T>show V_Blank
Measurement Results
Channel A
12:39:59
Fri Aug 09
V Timing Measurement
Average Off
------------------------------------------------------------Equalizer Pulse
2.29 u sec
Equalizer Pulse 10%
2.42 u sec
Serration Pulse
4.75 u sec
Serration Pulse 10%
4.62 u sec
------------------------------------------------------------VMā700T>res -v
28 1:22944 2:24244
VMā700T>softkey Serration_Pulse
VMā700T>hardkey Freeze
VMā700T>hardkey Freeze
VMā700T>getresults
V_Blank
VMā700T>show V_Blank
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 09
12:41:26
V Timing Measurement
Average Off
------------------------------------------------------------Equalizer Pulse
2.29 u sec
Equalizer Pulse 10%
2.42 u sec
Serration Pulse
4.75 u sec
Serration Pulse 10%
4.62 u sec
------------------------------------------------------------VMā700T>res -v
@28 3:47544 4:46244
The example shown above runs the V_Blank application and brings up the
Equalizer Pulse display. The getresults command returns four distinct data
values: two for equalizer pulse data, and two for serration pulse data. The res
command, however, returns only the two equalizer pulse values (labeled “1:” and
“2:”, respectively).
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–21
VM700T Remote Commands
Bringing up the Serration Pulse display and invoking getresults returns four
distinct data values. Executing res at this time, however, returns only the two
serration pulse values (labeled “3.” and “4:”, respectively).
resoff
Syntax Form:
resoff
Descriptive Form:
resoff
Scope:
remote operation
See also:
res, reson
The resoff command tells the VM700T to stop sending measurement results out
its remote port. It is used to “turn off” a previous reson command.
reson
Syntax Form:
reson
Descriptive Form:
reson
Scope:
remote operation
See also:
res, resoff
The reson command works similarly to res, except that reson sends a
continuous stream of measurement results out the remote port of the VM700T,
instead of a single result. The stream of results is sent asynchronously, so that the
VM700T can still recognize and respond to incoming commands (such as
resoff). reson can be used with or without the -v option, to produce encoded or
human-readable ASCII results.
Reading the VM700T reson Output Stream. When reson is issued, the VM700T
begins sending results data out the remote port. At this point, there are, in effect,
two separate data streams coming from the VM700T. The first is the normal data
stream for remote control, consisting of prompts, echoed commands, viewed file
output, and other output generated by remote control requests. For example:
VMā700T> execute ColorBar
VMā700T> getresults
Results are available in file `ColorBar'.
VMā700T>
In this example output, the prompts and the Results message were generated by
the VM700T in response to a specific input request. By contrast, the results data
produced while the VM700T is executing reson are sent asynchronously,
without any specific request after the original reson command. For example:
VMā700T> reson
VM7{results data}00A> {results data}{results data}...
2–22
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
Notice that in this example some of the results data arrived in the middle of the
VM700T prompt string, making the VM700T output appear garbled. In order to
separate the two data streams, you must know how they were combined.
When the two data streams are encoded, all characters in the normal output data
stream are printable ASCII characters in the range 0 to 127, inclusive. By
contrast, the initial character for the measurement results data stream is a
nonprintable character, with a decimal value of at least 127. To be specific, the
initial character of a data packet produced by reson has decimal value 182 (hex
value B6); the initial character of a data packet produced by reson -v has
decimal value 183 (hex value B7).
Thus, a computer program reading the output data stream from the VM700T
need only compare each received character with the value 127. Any character
greater than 127 introduces a measurement results data packet, and a handler
function should be called to process the incoming data. The handler function
should return when the end-of-buffer nibble (hex value 13) is encountered.
restoreconfig
Syntax Form:
restoreconfig
Descriptive Form:
restoreconfig
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
Sending a restoreconfig command restores configuration values from the
Configure files. Exiting a function or exiting remote operation does not
automatically restore these values; restoreconfig must be issued to do so.
Note that the system line and other global variables are not restored with
restoreconfig.
return
Syntax Form:
return
Descriptive Form:
return
Scope:
function playback
See also:
stop
Sending return exits the currently executing function and returns to its calling
function. Compare stop.
rgoff
Syntax Form:
rgoff
Descriptive Form:
rgoff
Scope:
remote operation
See also:
rgon
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–23
VM700T Remote Commands
Sending rgoff takes the VM700T out of remote graphics mode. This command
is only of interest to someone writing remote applications for the VM700T.
rgon
Syntax Form:
rgon
Descriptive Form:
rgon
Scope:
remote operation
See also:
rgoff
Sending rgon puts the VM700T into remote graphics mode. This command is
only of interest to someone writing remote applications for the VM700T.
set
Syntax Form:
set string [A|B|C] number|string [number|string...]
Descriptive Form:
set keyword [A|B|C] value [ value...]
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
See also:
get
The set command defines the configuration values to be used during the remote
session. The keywords available to use with set are listed in Appendix B.
Configuration values changed with set remain in effect until they are changed
by another set command, restoreconfig is executed, or the instrument is
powered off. Note that the system line and other global variables can be changed
with set but are not restored with restoreconfig.
Example:
VMā700T> set GLN5 100
VMā700T> set GLN6 18
VMā700T> set SPCF PostScript
This command sequence sets the system line for NTSC to 100, the system line
for PAL to 18, and the serial port copy format to PostScript.
setclock
Syntax Form:
setclock string
Descriptive Form:
setclock date_and_time_string
Scope:
remote operation
See also:
getclock
The setclock command sets the date and time on the system clock, using the
following format:
mon dd hh:mm:ss yyyy
2–24
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
where mon is the first three letters of the month, dd is the day of the month, hh is
the current hour, mm is the minute, ss is the second, and yyyy is the current year.
Hours are specified in 24-hour format (00 for midnight, 23 for 11 p.m.).
Example:
VMā700T> setclock Aug 11 17:07:22 1996
show
Syntax Form:
show string
Descriptive Form:
show filename
Scope:
remote operation
The show command returns the contents of a specified file. The default path for
the file is the Measurement~Results directory, but other files can be specified by
supplying a full pathname or a path relative to the Measurement~Results
directory.
Example:
VMā700T> show /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Video~Source
The default file for video sources
Channel A Video Source:
xmiter
Channel B Video Source:
switcher
Channel C Video Source:
System~Default
This example returns the contents of file Video~Source in directory /nvramØ/
ConfigFiles.
softkey
Syntax Form:
softkey string
Descriptive Form:
softkey softkey_name
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
See also:
softpress, softrelease
The softkey command (soft key used as one word) is equivalent to pressing and
releasing a specified soft key. The softkey command has the same effect as
softpress followed by softrelease; however, in general softkey should be
used instead of these commands.
When specifying soft key names in functions or remote operation commands, it
is important to match the case (upper or lower) and any special characters used in
the name of the soft key. See Naming Conventions on page 2–30 for information
about the rules for specifying soft key names.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–25
VM700T Remote Commands
Example:
VMā700T> softkey ITS_Search
This example is equivalent to pressing and releasing a soft key labeled ITS
Search on the touch screen.
softpress
Syntax Form:
softpress string
Descriptive Form:
softpress softkey_name
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
See also:
softkey, softrelease
Using softpress is equivalent to pressing a specified soft key without releasing
it. The soft key remains pressed (held in) until a softrelease or touchrelease
command is received. The softpress and softrelease commands should be
used with soft keys that need to be held while another action takes place. For all
other soft keys, use the softkey command. Note also that if a soft key function
toggles, you can use softpress again to turn it off.
When specifying soft key names in functions or remote operation commands, it
is important to match the case (upper or lower) and any special characters used in
the soft key name. See Naming Conventions on page 2–30 for information about
the rules for specifying soft key names.
Example:
VMā700T> softpress Rescale
This command is equivalent to pressing a soft key labeled Rescale without
releasing it.
softrelease
Syntax Form:
softrelease
Descriptive Form:
softrelease
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
See also:
softkey, softpress
Receiving a softrelease command indicates that a soft key has been released.
spool
2–26
Syntax Form:
spool string
Descriptive Form:
spool filename
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
See also:
print
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
The spool command sends an unformatted, ASCII-text file to the print spooler.
The default path for the file is the Measurement~Results directory, but other files
can be specified with a full pathname or a path relative to the Measurement~Results directory. Compare print.
Example:
VMā700T> spool ChromLum~GainDelay
This examples sends the file ChromLum~Gaindelay from directory Measurement~Results to the print spooler, in ASCII-text format.
VMā700T> spool
/rom/ConfigFiles/Measurement~Locations/NTSC/System~Default
This example prints the default Measurement Locations file for the NTSC
standard, in ASCII-text format. (Note that the path shown only applies to
VM700T units equipped with both Option 01, NTSC, and Option 11, PAL.)
stop
Syntax Form:
stop
Descriptive Form:
stop
Scope:
function playback
See also:
return
Sending stop exits all functions in the current call sequence.
terminal
Syntax Form:
terminal
Descriptive Form:
terminal
Scope:
remote operation
See also:
computer, remote
Sending terminal sets the VM700T to be controlled from a terminal. The
terminal command is used only in no-protocol mode. When terminal is
specified, characters are echoed, there is a space following the prompt, and any
errors or messages are returned as text. Compare computer.
touchpress
Syntax Form:
touchpress number number
Descriptive Form:
touchpress x_coordinate y_coordinate
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
See also:
touchrelease
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–27
VM700T Remote Commands
Sending touchpress indicates that a specified x,y location on the touchscreen is
being “touched.” The 0,0 location is the upper left corner of the screen. The X
range is 0 to 639; the Y range is 0 to 479. If the X,Y location is within a soft key
icon, the soft key action is executed.
Example:
VMā700T> touchpress 200 330
This example “touches” the screen location 200 units to the right and 330 units
down from the upper left corner of the screen.
touchrelease
Syntax Form:
touchrelease
Descriptive Form:
touchrelease
Scope:
function playback, remote operation
See also:
softpress, touchpress
The touchrelease command indicates a soft key or touchscreen location has
been released.
? and ?! Constructs
The ? construct is followed by any configuration keyword and a single
command. During function playback, if the keyword has non-zero value, the rest
of the line following the ? construct is executed. Otherwise,function execution
continues with the next statement in the function.
The ?! construct is similar, except that the rest of the line is executed if the
keyword has a value of zero. Otherwise,function execution continues with the
next statement in the function.
The ? and ?! constructs are available only during function playback. They are
typically used to test the value of a Carrier Detect line in order to control
communications with a modem, or to test the global out-of-limits (GOOL) flag
to see if an application found one or more measurements that were out-of-limits.
Using ? and ?! With the Carrier Detect Flag
2–28
Syntax Form:
?GCD0 string | ?GCD1 string |
?!GCD0 string | ?!GCD1 string
Descriptive Form:
?GCD0 command | ?GCD1 command
?!GCD0 command | ?!GCD1 command
Scope:
function playback
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
?GCDO tests the status of the Carrier Detect line on Port 0. ?GCD1 tests the
status of the Carrier Detect line on Port 1. If the value returned is 1 (true),
then command is executed. Otherwise, function execution continues with the
next statement in the function.
?!GCDO and ?!GCD1 function similarly, except that command is executed if the
value returned is 0 (false).
?GCDO, ?GCD1, ?!GCD0, and ?!GCD1 are primarily used to control communication with a modem connected to the VM700T.
Example:
?GCD0 return
delay 5
loop
This first line of this example tests the status of the Carrier Detect line on serial
port 0. If the test returns true, the function returns to its caller. If it returns false,
the function waits one half-second, then loops back to the first command.
Using ? and ?! with the Global Out-of-Limits Flag
Syntax Form:
?GOOL string | ?!GOOL string
Descriptive Form:
?GOOL command | ?!GOOL command
Scope:
function playback
The ?GOOL query returns the status of the global out-of-limits flag. If the most
recently executed application fould one or more measurements that were
out-of-limits, this flag is set to TRUE. If the global out-of-limits flag returns 1
(true) when ?GOOL is executed, then command is executed. Otherwise, function
execution continues with the next statement in the function.
The ?!GOOL query functions similarly, except that command is executed if the
value returned is 0 (false).
The GOOL flag must be reset to 0 explicitly within a function. It is a good
programming practice to do this just before executing a measurement application.
Example:
set GOOL 0
execute K_Factor
getresults
?GOOL print K_Factor
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–29
VM700T Remote Commands
The first line of this sample function sets the global out-of-limits flag to 0. The
second and third lines execute a measurement application (in this case,
K_Factor) and write a results file from it. The last line tests to see if the global
out-of-limits flag was asserted, i.e., if any measurement returned an out-of-limits
value since the last time the out-of-limits flag was de-asserted. If ?GOOL returns
true, then the command “print K_Factor” is executed to print out the results file.
Naming Conventions
This section tells where to find the legal button names, and discusses the rules
for forming application, softkey, and function names for use in function and
remote operation commands.
Button Names
Major-Mode Applications
Table 2–3, accompanying the description of the hardkey command on page
2–12, lists the legal button names.
Major-mode applications are reachable with single-button presses in front-panel
operation. These applications are Waveform, Vector, Picture, and Auto.
Major-mode applications can be executed in functions or remote operation using
the execute or hardkey commands, followed by the button or application name.
Example:
VMā700T>
VMā700T>
VMā700T>
VMā700T>
VMā700T>
VMā700T>
VMā700T>
VMā700T>
execute
hardkey
execute
hardkey
execute
hardkey
execute
hardkey
Waveform
Waveform
Vector
Vector
Picture
Picture
auto
auto
All of these example commands cause the major-mode applications named in
them to execute.
Measure-Mode
Applications
Measure-mode applications are the applications available when you press the
Measure front-panel button. These include measure-mode video measurements
and diagnostics. They may also include optional video measurements and audio
measurements, if your VM700T is equipped with options.
To form the application name for a measure-mode application, use the name
exactly as displayed in the directory window. If the name is split over two lines,
substitute a tilde character (‘~’) for the carriage return between the two parts of
the name.
2–30
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
Examples:
The H_Timing measurement, whose soft key looks like this in the video-measurements directory window:
H_Timing
would be executed like this:
VMā700T> execute H_Timing
The ChromLum Gaindelay measurement, whose soft key looks like this in the
video-measurements directory window:
ChromLum
GainDelay
would be executed like this with a remote command:
VMā700T> execute ChromLum~GainDelay
It is important to match upper and lower case and any special characters that
appear in the application name exactly.
Soft Key and Function
Names
The general rule for forming a soft key name is to take the spelling and
capitalization from the text displayed, omit any variable part, and join all words
with an underscore character (‘_’).
Examples:
The default set of soft keys that appears on the screen when you press the Menu
button while the VM700T is in Waveform mode looks like this:
1H
Display
Cursors
Sync
Noise
Extra
Functions
Filter
Select
Clamp
Couple
A function that executes Waveform and presses each of these soft keys in turn is
as follows:
execute Waveform
hardkey Menu
softkey H_Display
delay 20
softkey Cursors
delay 20
hardkey Menu
delay 10
softkey Sync
delay 20
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–31
VM700T Remote Commands
hardkey Menu
delay 10
softkey Noise_dB
delay 10
softkey Noise_dB
delay 10
softkey Extra_Functions
delay 20
hardkey Menu
delay 10
softkey Filter_Select
delay 20
hardkey Menu
delay 10
softkey Clamp_Couple
delay 20
hardkey Menu
delay 10
hardkey Menu
The delay commands are inserted between the various softkey and hardkey
commands so that you can see the effects of each command when the function is
replayed.
Note that a hardkey Menu command follows the commands to touch the
Cursors, Sync, Extra_Functions, Filter_Select, and Clamp_Couple soft keys.
This is because each of these soft keys displays a submenu when touched.
hardkey Menu returns you to the top-level menu of an application from any
submenu.
Note also that the Noise_dB soft key is touched twice in succession. This is
because this soft key toggles on and off. The first command highlights the soft
key. At this point you can change the value displayed in the soft key by means of
a knob command. The second command turns the soft key highlight off.
Select Line Soft Keys
The exceptions to the soft key naming rule are the soft keys that select a system
line after you press the Select Line button.
For most Measure-mode applications, the names for these soft keys are PresetN,
where N varies from 1 to the number of line soft keys available.
For the Waveform, Vector, ICPM, Bowtie, and Lightning applications, however,
the names for these soft keys are PresetNstd, where N again varies from 1 to the
number of soft keys available, and std can be either NTSC or PAL.
2–32
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
Examples:
The default soft keys that appear when you press the Select Line button in the
Bar LineTime application while using the NTSC standard are:
Field
Toggle
Field 1
Line 17
Field 1
Line 18
Field 2
Line 17
Field 2
Line 18
Default
Line
The names of these soft keys, from left to right, are: Field_Toggle, Preset1,
Preset2, Preset3, Preset4, Default_Line.
The default soft keys that appear when you press the Select Line button in the
Waveform application while using the NTSC standard are:
Field
Toggle
Field 1
Line 17
Field 1
Line 18
Field 1
Line 19
Field 1
Line 20
Field
1 or 2
Field
3 or 4
The names of these soft keys, from left to right, are: Field_Toggle,
Preset1NTSC, Preset2NTSC, Preset3NTSC, Preset4NTSC, Field_1_or_2, and
Field_3_or_4.
The default soft keys that appear when you press the Select Line button in the
Waveform application while using the PAL standard are:
Field
Toggle
Line 17
Line 18
Frame 1
Frame 2
Frame 3
Frame 4
The names of these soft keys, from left to right, are: Field_Toggle, Preset1PAL,
Preset2PAL, Frame_1, Frame_2, Frame_3, and Frame_4.
Table 2–5 tells whether each video application uses the PresetN form or the
PresetNstd form of line selection soft key names. It also lists the video applications that do not use presets in their line selection soft keys, as well as those that
do not use the Select Line button.
Audio applications don’t use the Select Line button.
For video applications not listed here (that is, applications that may come in
future option packages for the VM700T), the easiest way to ascertain which
form of the Select Line soft key name to use is to create a function that uses
those soft keys. You can then examine the function for commands
that correspond to the soft keys you wish to use. The commands will
show the correct names for the soft keys.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–33
VM700T Remote Commands
Table 2–5: Select Line soft key names
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
2–34
Preset form
Soft Key names
Uses PresetN
Bar~LineTime
ChromLum~GainDelay
Chrominance~FreqResp
Chrominance~NonLinearity
ColorBar
DGDP
Echo
GroupDelay~SinX_X
H_Timing
K_Factor
Luminance~NonLinearity
MultiBurst
Noise~Spectrum
Rounding~Errors
ShortTime~Distortion
SoundInSync
Teletext
TwoField
Uses PresetNstd
Bowtie
ICPM
Lightning
Vector
Waveform
Doesn’t Use Presets
Chrominance~AMPM
Doesn’t Use Select Line
Bounce
Burst~Frequency
H_Blank
Jitter
Jitter~LongTime
Line~Frequency
Picture
SCH_Phase
VITS~ID
V_Blank
Video~Standard
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
VM700T Remote Commands
Option 1S Soft Keys
The Option 1S soft keys that are exceptions to the soft key naming rule are listed
in Table 2–6. The measurement cells for the SDI Format Monitor application
that are exceptions to the naming rule are listed in Table 2–7.
Table 2–6: Option 1S soft key names
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Soft key names
Remote soft key names
75% with 100% Flag
75%
100%
Cursors / Units
Field 1 Line 22a
Field 2 Line 22a
Rise\Fall Times
Rise\Fall Overshoot
75_with_100_Flag
75
100
Cursors_Units
Field_Line_1a
Field_Line_2a
Rise_Fall_Times
Rise_Fall_Overshoot
a
These names represent the two SDI Select Line mode preset soft keys.
Table 2–7: Option 1S Format Monitor measurement cell names
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Measurement cell names
Remote measurement cell names
Ancillary Audio Sequence
Ancillary Audio BrokenBlk
Ancillary Audio Smpls/Frm
Ancillary Audio 5/5Pattrn
Luminance Error Low
Luminance Warning Low
Luminance Warning High
Luminance Error High
Chrominance Error Low
Chrominance Warning Low
Chrominance Warning High
Chrominance Error High
Miscellaneous XY(Z)
Miscellaneous Empty Spc
Anc_Audio_Sequence
Anc_Audio_BrokenBlk
Anc_Audio_Smpls/Frm
Anc_Audio_5/5Pattrn
Luma_Error_Low
Luma_Warning_Low
Luma_Warning_High
Luma_Error_High
Chroma_Error_Low
Chroma_Warning_Low
Chroma_Warning_High
Chroma_Error_High
Misc_XY(Z)
Misc_Empty_Spc
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
2–35
VM700T Remote Commands
2–36
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Status and Events
Status and Events
This section lists the error and feedback messages returned by the VM700T, and
their meanings.
Command Input Error Messages
Table 3–1: Command input errors
Computer
mode
Terminal mode
Computer
mode
Terminal mode
?001
Bad command argument
?017
Remote not enabled
?002
Sub-function not found
?101
Request filtered
?003
Playback nesting too deep
?102
Screen event not key
?004
Function directory inaccessible
?103
Unknown softkey
?005
Function not found
?104
Invalid softkey
?006
Unknown command
?105
Unwanted hardkey
?007
Unknown hardkey
?106
Unknown input
?008
Out of memory
?107
Not found
?009
Recursive function call
?108
Request not supported
?010
Bad command in this context
?109
No server resources
?011
Name too long
?110
Illegal name
?012
No filename
?111
Not writable
?013
Line too long
?112
Not readable
?014
Command only meaningful for
non-IP connections
?113
No permission
?015
Bad time format (use getclock)
?114
Bad argument(s)
?016
Function playback in progress. Enter
^C to stop it.
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
3–1
Status and Events
Feedback Messages
Table 3–2: Messages
Computer
mode
Terminal mode
Computer
mode
Terminal mode
a
Function playback in progress. Enter
^C to stop it.
!006
Hit CR to continue.
a
Function playback continues...
!007
Remote terminated.
a
Function playback terminated.
!008
Remote has been
terminated locally.
a
Function playback completed.
@name b
Results in file name b
!005
c
!010
application-specific
message
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
a
This message has no computer mode equivalent.
b
Name is the file where measurement results are stored after a getresults command.
c
This message indicates that a function is displaying text on the screen or else an
error has occurred in function playback. This message has no terminal mode
equivalent.
NOTE. In computer mode, a @ is returned after successful command completion;
a ! precedes a message; and a ? precedes an error.
3–2
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Examples
Simple Remote Control
This section describes how to control the VM700T remotely, using a terminal
emulator program such as Kermit or Telnet. It assumes that you already have a
terminal emulator program on your PC, and that you know how to use it.
The section concerns itself with the specific operations required to control the
VM700T in a terminal session, where the user types commands into the PC or
terminal one at a time. Computer-Based Remote Control, starting on page 4–17,
tells how to write programs that control the VM700T without requiring human
intervention or supervision.
Remote operation on the VM700T is performed via the serial (RS-232-C) ports
on the rear panel. The Getting Started section entitled “Connecting the PC and
the VM700T,” discusses the VM700T RS-232-C port requirements in detail and
s typical cable wiring configurations.
The VM700T has two modes for remote control: “no-protocol” mode and
“SLIP” mode. The VM700T is in “no-protocol” mode when the Protocol setting
for the Remote Control port in the Communication Setup file has a value of
“None”. The VM700T is in “SLIP” mode when the “Protocol” setting for the
Remote Control port in the Communication Setup file has a value of “SLIP”.
In no-protocol mode, the VM700T and the PC/terminal communicate without
any special communications protocol. There is simply a cable connection
between the VM700T and the PC/terminal, over which commands and data are
exchanged. When the VM700T is in no-protocol mode, you can use any
commonly available communications program, such as Kermit, ProComm, or
Qmodem.
No-protocol mode has two important limitations:
In no-protocol mode, there is no control to ensure that information is not
corrupted in transit between the VM700T and the PC/terminal.
No-protocol mode cannot be used to write files onto the non-volatile
memory in the VM700T. This limitation ensures that corrupted information
will not be written into the critical operating files and settings of VM700T
file system.
Protocol, or SLIP, mode establishes an error-free connection between the
VM700T and the PC, through the use of data checking and re-transmission
techniques. When the VM700T is in SLIP mode, it lets you write files into its
non-volatile memory, by means of programs such as FTP (File Transfer Protocol,
for which implementations exist on many platforms, including PC’s).
Communicating with the VM700T when it is in SLIP mode requires that you
have a program running on the PC that implements SLIP (Serial Line Internet
Protocol). Several SLIP implementations are commercially available.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–1
Simple Remote Control
The one in use by the VM700T developers at Tektronix is called “PC/TCP,” and
is produced by FTP Software, Inc.1 Other packages available for PC’s and
compatibles include KA9Q/NET,2 BW?TEL,3 CMU PC/IP,4 MIT PC/IP,5
FUSION,6 Internet-PC,7 PC-NFS, 8 and WIN/PC.9
If you only need to send commands and receive data from the VM700T and do
not need to send files into it, you should consider using Tektronix’ VMT
program. This program is made to communicate with the VM700T. It incorporates more knowledge of the VM700T than a general-purpose terminal emulator
can, and makes the task of remote control of the VM700T considerably easier.
To order the VMT program, contact your Tektronix sales representative.
Tektronix also makes available a set of programs called VMBKUP, consisting of
the VMFTP program (for one-file-at-a-time transfers) and VMBACKIT (for
multiple-file transfers). These programs are highly recommended if your major
purpose in transferring files is simply to back up data residing on the VM700T.
See your Tektronix sales representative for more details about the VMBKUP
software package.
The rest of this section tells you how to perform common VM700T operations
using either a no-protocol terminal emulator (for example, Kermit) or a
SLIP-protocol one (for example, Telnet). Whether the VM700T is in no-protocol
mode or SLIP mode, the steps you use to perform most actions during a terminal
session are the same. The operations described in this section include the
following:
4–2
how to start a terminal session
how to read or set configuration parameter values
how to measurements
how to get measurement results
how to end a terminal session
how to transfer files (SLIP mode only)
1
Contact: FTP Software, Inc., 26 Princess St., Wakefield, MA 01880.
2
Contact: Phil Karn, KA9Q, 25-B Hillcrest Rd., Warren, NJ 07060.
3
Contact: Beame & Whiteside Software Ltd., 259 Fiddler’s Green Road, Ancaster,
Ontario, Canada L9G 1W9.
4
Contact: Drew D. Perkins, Carnegie Mellon University, 4910 Forbes Ave., Pittsburgh,
PA 15213
5
Contact: M.I.T. Microcomputer Center, Room 11-209, 77 Massachusetts Ave.,
Cambridge, MA 02139.
6
Contact: Network Research Corporation, 2380 N. Rose Avenue, Oxnard, CA 93030.
7
Contact: Sirius Systems, Inc., Box 2202, Petersburg, VA 23804.
8
Contact: Sun Microsystems, Inc., 2550 Garcia Ave., Mountain View, CA 94043.
9
Contact: The Wollongong Group, 1129 San Antonio Road, Palo Alto, CA 94303.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Simple Remote Control
Starting a Terminal Session
Before you start a terminal session with the VM700T, you should check several
things:
1. Verify that a serial port on the PC and a serial port on the VM700T are
connected via an RS-232-C cable.
2. Verify that the correct drivers are loaded on the PC, if you intend to use SLIP
mode. (Check your CONFIG.SYS file; if you are using PC/TCP, for
instance, it should contain two lines that load the SLIP.SYS and
IPCUST.SYS drivers, respectively.)
3. Check the settings contained in the Communication Setup file in the
/nvram0/ConfigFiles directory. To do so, do the following:
a. Display the Communications Setup file on the VM700T screen (press
the Configure button, touch the Configure Files soft key, touch the icon
for the Communications Setup file). Check the following settings:
b. Remote Control Port should be set to the port that the RS-232-C cable is
connected to.
c. Message Display should be set to Remote if you want messages from
VM700T functions to be displayed on the PC/terminal, or to VM700
Screen if you want messages to be displayed on the VM700T screen.
d. If you are using no-protocol mode, Non-SLIP Interfacing mode should
be set to Terminal.
e. Scroll to the communications parameters (Protocol, Baud Rate, Flow
Control, Character Size, Parity, Reset Character, Carrier Detect) for the
remote control port (0 or 1).
f.
If you are using no-protocol mode, set Protocol to None, otherwise set it
to SLIP.
g. Set the baud rate as desired.
h. Set flow control to CTS/RTS for hardware flow control, XON/XOFF for
software flow control, whichever your communications program
supports. Note that in SLIP mode, Flow Control becomes CTS/RTS
regardless of the setting displayed.
i.
Set Character Size to an appropriate value. (A value of 8 almost always
works.) Note that in SLIP mode, Character Size becomes 8 regardless of
the setting displayed.
j.
Set the Reset Character to “none” on the Remote port.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–3
Simple Remote Control
k. Set Carrier Detect to “disabled”. (This parameter is not currently used,
but is reserved for future use.)
4. Start your communications program, and configure it to send commands out
the communications port connected to the VM700T.
5. Type the command remote.
At this point, further presses of the carriage return key should return the
VM700T prompt on a new line. You are now communicating with the VM700T
via remote connection.
Executing Measurements
The execute command starts applications on the VM700T. It takes a single
parameter, the name of the application being invoked. When an application name
takes two lines to display on the screen, the parameter name is formed using a
“~” (tilde) between the two lines. See the description of the execute command
in VM700T Remote Commands on page 2–7 for a complete list of VM700T
applications.
NOTE. New applications may be included as new version of the VM700T are
introduced. Press the Measure key to find out what applications are available for
your VM700T.
Examples:
VMā700T> execute Vector
starts Vector Mode on the VM700T.
VMā700T> execute Chrominance~NonLinearity
starts the Chrominance~NonLinearity measurement on the VM700T.
Getting Measurement Results
To make a measurement and retrieve the results remotely, do the following:
1. Start the measurement, using the execute command (“execute applicationname”).
2. Send the getresults command.
3. Send the command show application-name.
4–4
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Simple Remote Control
The execute command starts the application. The getresults command takes a
“snapshot” of the application’s measurements and stores them in a file in the
Measurement Results directory. When the results are written in the file, the
VM700T sends a message out the control port, consisting of the filename in
which the results were stored. This is always the same as the application name.
Each invocation of getresults writes a new set of measurement values into the
Measurement Results directory. This new set overwrites the previous contents of
the Measurement Results file for the current application name. For example, if
the H_Timing measurement is running, issuing the getresults command writes
the current measurement results into a file called H_Timing in the Measurement
Results directory. Issuing getresults again writes a new set of results into a file
with the same name (H_Timing) in the same directory (Measurement Results).
The results produced by the first getresults command are lost.
You can save results from successive getresults commands by using the
rename command, or by using logging or file-saving features available with your
telecommunications program.
When a measure-mode application is running, getresults takes a single,
optional argument. That argument is the keyword verbose, which for certain
measurements provides a complete list of measured points. The measurements
that accept the verbose argument are DGDP, Luminance~NonLinearity,
Noise~Spectrum, and GroupDelay~SinX_X .
Measure-mode video measurements also write out their results (just as if a
getresults command was issued) when exiting (for example,when another
measurement or mode is started). Note, however, that while the getresults
command always ensures that completed measurement results are written, simply
exiting a measurement may not.
In Auto mode, getresults can take a list of arguments, each consisting of the
four-letter keyword of an Auto-mode measurement. If getresults is issued
without any arguments, the results of measurements specified by the current
selected measurements file are written to the results file.
When a list of measurements is specified as arguments to getresults, Auto
mode continues to make only the measurements specified in the list until another
getresults command is sent with a new list, or until the current selected
measurements file is reset, or until a restoreconfig command is sent. Thus, if
you want results from multiple passes of the same measurements list, only the
first getresults command need supply the measurement list. Subsequent
getresults commands without arguments will return results from the same list.
show sends the contents of a specified file out the control port. The show
command takes a single argument, consisting of the name of the file to be sent. If
no pathname is supplied in the show command’s argument, the file is assumed to
be a results file, residing in the Measurement Results directory.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–5
Simple Remote Control
Most often, the show command is used along with getresults to retrieve or
view measurement results just written. However, any file can be viewed with the
show command, by specifying either a relative path from the Measure~Results
directory, or an absolute system path.
Examples:
VMā700T> execute K_Factor
VMā700T> getresults
Results in file: K_Factor
VMā700T> show K_Factor
Measurement Results Channel A Thu Sep 28 14:28:42
2T Pulse K Factor Waveform->Pulse & Bar
Line = 17
Graticule CCIRĆ2T
Average Off
-----------------------------------------------------------K-2T 0.6 % KF
K-PB -0.2 % KF
PB Ratio 99.0 %
HAD 201.0 n sec
-----------------------------------------------------------VMā700T>
This example executes the K_Factor measurement, stores the results in a file
called K_Factor in the Measurement Results directory, and displays the results
on the PC/terminal screen.
VMā700T> execute Auto
VMā700T> getresults PBAM PTTK PSYA
Results in file: Auto
VMā700T>
This example puts the VM700T into Auto mode, measures the PAL Bar
Amplitude Error, 2T Pulse K-Factor, and Sync Amplitude Error for the current
channel, then writes the results into a file named Auto in the Measurement
Results directory.
VMā700T> show /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Auto_Limit~Files/PAL/Studio
This example displays a file called Studio from the directory of PAL Auto_Limit
Files.
4–6
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Simple Remote Control
Printing Files
The print command sends VM700T files to the Copy port (which is usually
attached to a printer). The file is printed in two steps. First, the file is copied into
the print spooler directory. Then, the print spooler sends it out to the Copy port.
The VM700T prompts for a new command as soon as the file is submitted to the
spooler; the file need not have actually printed out yet.
The print command formats files in accordance with the Copy Format entry in
the Communications Setup file. “Formatting” a file means generating page
headers, page ejects, and special printer commands, depending on the printer
type.
The spool command is similar to print, except that it does not format the file.
spool is used when the page formatting implemented by the print command is
not wanted. The spool command differs from show in that spool is available
from remote operation or from function playback, while show is only available
from remote operation. In addition, spool and print spool the output file to the
Copy port, while show simply outputs the file to the Remote Control port.
Function Playback
Function playback can be started from remote control with the playback
command. The playback command takes a single argument, and that is the
name of the function to play back. If the function is in a subdirectory, the
subdirectory name must be included in the argument.
Example:
VMā700T> playback Special~Measurements/TransDGDP
This example plays back a function called TransDGDP, stored in a directory
called Special~Measurements in the /nvram0/FunctionKeys directory.
When a function is being played back remotely, it stops before finishing if issued
a Ctrl-C, or upon exit from remote control. If remote control is terminated
locally (by pressing the Configure button) while remote function playback is in
progress, the function playback stops also.
Informational messages are displayed when functions are played back remotely.
The location of the message display is controlled by the Remote Control/Message Display entry in the Communications Setup file. If this entry is set to
“VM700T Screen”, messages appear on the VM700T screen, and you have to
touch the screen to continue function playback. If this entry is set to “Remote”,
messages appear on the PC or terminal screen, and you have to type Return to
continue function playback.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–7
Simple Remote Control
Note that when certain commands that normally provide a response (especially
getresults ) are issued from function playback, the response is not seen on the
PC or terminal screen. This is true even if the function playback command was
issued during remote operation. In such cases, it is important to know
EXACTLY what the function is doing, and to store results away periodically for
later retrieval.
Example:
Consider the following function, which makes the same Differential Gain video
measurement five times, saving the results for retrieval later:
execute DGDP
hardkey Menu
softkey ITS_Search # let it find the right line
hardkey Menu
# make 5 passes for retrieval later
getresults
rename DGDP DGDP1
delay 36000 #delay one hour
getresults
rename DGDP DGDP2
delay 36000 #delay one hour
getresults
rename DGDP DGDP3
delay 36000 #delay one hour
getresults
rename DGDP DGDP4
delay 36000 #delay one hour
getresults
rename DGDP DGDP5
Playing back this function from remote operation would produce no output on
the screen. If the individual commands were issued directly, each getresults
command would return the string “Results in file: DGDP.” By using the rename
command, however, it is easy to store away results in the Measurement Results
directory for later retrieval with the show command.
Reading/Setting Configuration Parameters
Configuration Files
4–8
The VM700T reads several files when it is powered up. The Source_Selection
Video file specifies a file from the Video_Source Files directory, one for each
channel. VM700T units equipped with both Option 01 and Option 11 specify a
file from the Video_Source Files directory for each channel and for each standard
(NTSC and PAL).
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Simple Remote Control
Files from the Video_Source Files directory tell the VM700T what files to read
in other directories to get configuration information. These files and their
corresponding directories include the following:
Auto Limits File: tells what file to read from the Auto_Limit Files directory
to get the caution and alarm limits on Auto-mode measurements.
Measure Limits File: tells what file to read from the Measure_Limit Files
directory to get the alarm limits on Measure-mode measurements.
Measurement Locations File: tells what file to read from the Measurement
Locations directory to get the line/position locations of Measure-mode
measurements.
Selected Measurements File: tells what file to read from the
Selected_Measurements directory to get the list of selected Auto-mode
measurements.
Option directory files (such as, Component, Teletext, and so on): tells what
file to read from the directory given by the option name to get the configuration parameters for that option.
All these files are stored in the nonvolatile memory of the VM700T. At start-up
time, the files are read into random-access memory, where they are referenced as
needed when the instrument makes measurements or performs other operations.
Configuration Keywords
Each configuration parameter has a unique keyword, consisting of four characters (capital letters or digits). Some keywords also require that a channel
specification be included. For example, to find out the PAL Bar Amplitude Error
limits for channel A in Auto mode, you would use the keyword and channel
specification PBAM A.
Some keywords do not reflect a value from the configuration files, but instead
record a specific part of the instrument state. Examples include the following
keywords:
GSRC, which specifies the current video source (channel A, B, or C, or
some combination thereof),
GSSR, which specifies whether or not the signal is locked to source, and
GLN6, which sets or returns the global line number when using the PAL
standard. The corresponding keyword for NTSC is GLN5.
You can find out the current setting of any configuration parameter with the get
command. You can set most configuration parameters with the command.
Note that these commands modify only the configuration values kept in the
memory of the instrument; the files stored in non-volatile memory are not
touched.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–9
Simple Remote Control
Therefore, after power to the instrument is cycled, or after the restoreconfig
command is executed, or after a function key is aborted, the actual configuration of the instrument again reflects the values in the files.
Some configuration parameters, especially those relating to communications,
such as baud rate, character size, and so on, cannot be set remotely. Parameters
that can only be read but not set are listed as “read-only” parameters in
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords.
Getting Configuration
Parameters
You find out the current value of any VM700T configuration parameter by using
the get command and the parameter of the keyword. The syntax of the get
command is as follows:
get keyword [channel]
Not all keywords require a channel specification. See Appendix B for a complete
list of VM700T keywords, their syntaxes, and their meanings.
Example:
VMā700T> get PBAM A
-5.00 5.00 -10.00 10.00
VMā700T>
The command get PBAM A returns the lower caution, upper caution, lower
alarm, and upper alarm limits in effect for the PAL Bar Amplitude Error Auto
measurement on channel A.
Setting Configuration
Parameters
You can specify the value of any settable VM700T configuration parameter by
using the set command, followed by the parameter’s keyword, a channel
specification (if applicable), and the correct number of data values for that
parameter. The syntax of the set command is as follows:
set keyword [channel] value [value[ value...]]
Not all keywords require a channel specification. Refer to Appendix A: Get/Set
Keywords for a complete list of VM700T keywords, their syntax, and their
meaning.
Some of the numeric values associated with a keyword might be undefined
(represented in the configuration files by a –-––– field). To set a value to
undefined, use the string “undef” (see examples, below).
When a keyword has several values associated with it (for example, the set of
four floating point numbers associated with Auto measurements limits), you can
keep a value unchanged by using the string “same” (see examples, below).
Reading in a new configuration file is like re-setting every one of the parameters
named in that file. For example, if you set new values for a PAL Auto
4–10
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Simple Remote Control
measurement limit, and then reset the Auto Limits File name for that channel
(keyword: CHAF), you effectively over-write the parameter values you just set.
This leads to an important rule: read in configuration files first, then set
individual parameters.
Examples:
VMā700T> set PBAM A -6. 6. -12. 12.
changes the caution and alarm values used for the PAL Bar Amplitude Error
Auto measurement on channel A, and
VMā700T> set SPCF PostScript
changes the current copy format to PostScript.
VMā700T> set PSNP A 42.0 undef 42.0 undef
sets the lower caution limit and the lower alarm limit for the Signal-to-Noise
Periodic measurement to 42.0 db, and sets the upper limits to “undefined.”
VMā700T> set PBAE A same same same 12.0
sets the upper alarm limit for Burst Amplitude Error in Auto mode on
Channel A to 12 percent, and leaves the others unchanged.
Restoring Configuration
Parameters
The restoreconfig command re-reads all configuration values from the
configuration files.
Note that when you record a function, the VM700T puts many set commands at
the start of the function file, and puts a restoreconfig command at the end.
These commands make it possible to reproduce the exact state in which a
VM700T function was recorded when the function is played back. Upon
function completion, the restoreconfig command returns the VM700T to its
power-up state. (Be warned, however, that any user-specified parameter settings
not stored in a file when the restoreconfig command is executed are lost.)
Most of the keywords set at the beginning of a function are not associated with
the configuration files, but with the current global state of the instrument: values
like GLN5/GLN6 (global line number), GACP (clamp position in microseconds
for channel A), and GCCC (clamp coupling value for channel C). These
keywords are not included in any configuration file, thus there is no concept of
restoring these values.
There are three configuration values recorded at the beginning of a function that
are normally specified from configuration files. These are the names of the video
source files for each channel (VNCA, VNCB, and VNCC for NTSC; VSCA,
VSCB, and VSCC for PAL). The trailing restoreconfig command undoes the
effect of these final three set commands when the function is finished playing
back.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–11
Simple Remote Control
If the restoreconfig command is deleted from the function, the state of the
VM700T remains as it was when the function key was finished being recorded,
which might be different than what is currently in the NVRAM files.
Getting the System Clock
Time
The getclock command returns the VM700T’s system date and time. The
getclock command does not take any parameters.
Example:
VMā700T> getclock
Sep 20 11:03:04 1989
Setting the System Clock
Time
The setclock command sets the VM700T system date and time feature. The
setclock command takes a single parameter in the same format the instrument
returns it as a result of a getclock command.
Example:
VMā700T> setclock Aug 20 20:04:00 1996
Ending a Terminal Session
To end a terminal session, type quit or exit to break the remote connection
with the VM700T. Then, exit your telecommunications program.
Transferring Files (SLIP Mode Only)
The VM700T must be in SLIP mode to allow you to transfer files into it. This
section tells you how to put the VM700T into SLIP mode, and how to use the
telnet and ftp programs to transfer files to the VM700T.
If your major purpose in transferring files is simply to back up data residing on
the VM700T, or to restore files originally backed up from the VM700T, you
may wish to consider a set of programs that Tektronix makes available called
VMBKUP. VMBKUP consists of the VMFTP program used for one-file-at-atime transfers, and VMBACKIT used for backing up multiple files. See your
Tektronix sales representative for more details about the VMBKUP software
package.
Putting the VM700T into
SLIP Mode
Use the following steps to put the VM700T into SLIP mode from the front
panel:
1. Press the Configure button.
2. Touch the Configure Files soft key.
4–12
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Simple Remote Control
3. Turn the knob until the icon for the Communication Setup file appears in the
directory window.
4. Touch the icon for the Communication Setup file.
5. Turn the knob until you can read the Port entry for the Remote Control
parameter group. It will read None, Serial Port 0, or Serial Port 1. If it is
already set to the serial port that the PC is connected to, skip to step 10.
Otherwise, continue with the next step.
6. Turn the knob until the “Port” line in the Remote Control parameter group is
highlighted.
7. Touch the line on the screen. A box appears around the highlighted line.
8. Turn the knob until the desired value appears.
9. Touch the line on the screen again, or touch the “Accept Input” soft key.
10. Turn the knob until you can read the Protocol entry in the “Port” parameter
group for the Remote Control port. If it is already set to SLIP, you’re done.
Touch the “Update & Exit” soft key to exit the editing session. Otherwise,
continue with the next step.
11. Turn the knob until the “Protocol” line in the “Port” parameter group for the
Remote Control port is highlighted.
12. Touch the line on the screen. A box appears around the highlighted line.
13. Turn the knob until the value “SLIP” appears.
14. Touch the line on the screen again, or touch the “Accept Input” soft key.
15. Touch the Update & Exit soft key to exit the editing session.
Starting ftp
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) transfers files from one computer to another, using
the TCP/IP protocol.
FTP connections take place between a server and a client. The server listens on a
TCP/IP logical port for connection requests. The client issues a connection
request to a waiting server, and a connection is made during which files can be
transferred.
File transfers are managed between FTP participants through commands from
the client and responses from the server. There are commands available to send
and receive files, to change the server’s working directory, to get directory
listings, to create new directories, and to remove directories and files.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–13
Simple Remote Control
The VM700T implements the FTP protocol in such a way that it can act as an
FTP server, while a computer connected to it can act as an FTP client. In order to
use FTP to access the file system of the VM700T, you must have an FTP client
program running on the computer connected to the VM700T. In addition, the
FTP program must be running on the VM700T. You can use FTP on any serial
port configured for SLIP protocol.
To start the ftp program on the VM700T from the front panel do the following
steps:
1. Press the Measure button.
2. Go to the /nvram0/Executable~Files/Instrument~Operations directory.
3. Touch the FTP soft key.
The VM700T is ready to be connected to a remote host.
To start the ftp program on the VM700T from remote control do the following
steps:
1. Start telnet on your PC, and connect to the VM700T. You can use the
ipaddress of the VM700T directly (for example, telnet 254.254.254.2, as
configured in the /nvram∅/IpConfig file), or you can use a pseudonym from
a hosts table entry (for example, telnet VMā700T).
2. Type the command execute FTP.
3. Type the command quit.
4. Start ftp on your PC, using either the ip address of the VM700T (for
example, ftp 254.254.254.2, as configured in the /nvram∅/IpConfig file)
or a pseudonym from a hosts table entry (such as, ftp VMā700T).
If password checking is enabled on the VM700T, you must issue the PASS
command with the correct password before file access is granted.
Using ftp
Once you have established an ftp connection between the VM700T and your PC,
you can transfer files between the PC and the VM700T, find out or set the
current VM700T directory, list the files in the current VM700T directory, and
quit from the ftp session (among other operations). See your ftp program
documentation for a complete list of program capabilities.
The put command transfers files from the PC to the VM700T.
Example:
The following command transfers a file named “test.fnc” from the PC to the
current directory in the VM700T:
4–14
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Simple Remote Control
ftp:VMā700T> put test.fnc
foreign file (default test.tnc):Transferred 91 bytes in 1
seconds (728 bits/sec, 91 bytes/sec)
250 File transfer complete
ftp:VMā700T>
Certain VM700T files are not writable via FTP –– these generally being those
which control communication parameters of the VM700T.
When you try to write a configuration file, the file is compared against an
internal template to ensure that it will be readable when needed by the VM700T.
If this check fails, an error is returned, and the file is not written. To ensure the
proper file format, it is a good idea to first read a valid matching configuration
file from the VM700T, modify it locally, then write it back.
NOTE. Configuration files, when successfully written, will not take effect in the
VM700T until the restoreconfig command is issued from a remote connection
or function playback, or until you cycle power on the VM700T.
The get command transfers files from the VM700T to the PC.
Example:
The following command transfers a file named “Func1” from the VM700T’s
current directory to the PC.
ftp:VMā700T> get Func1
local file (default Func1): func1.txt
Transferred 91 bytes in 0 seconds
250 File transfer complete
ftp:VMā700T>
The pwd command returns the current VM700T directory.
Example:
ftp:VMā700T> pwd
257 Current directory is /nvram0/FunctionKeys".
ftp:VMā700T>
The cd command sets the current VM700T directory.
Example:
ftp:VMā700T> cd /nvram0/ConfigFiles
250 Change of directory successful.
ftp:VMā700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–15
Simple Remote Control
The ls command lists the files in the current VM700T directory.
Example:
ftp:VMā700T> ls
Timed~Functions
Func1
Transferred 24 bytes in 1 seconds (192 bits/sec, 24
bytes/sec)
250 File listing complete.
ftp:VMā700T>
The dir command is similar to ls, but also returns the size (in bytes) of each
directory entry. Entries with a size of 0 are most likely (but are not necessarily)
directories.
Example:
ftp:VMā700T> dir
0 Timed~Functions
85 Func1
Transferred 42 bytes in 0 seconds
250 File listing complete.
ftp:VMā700T>
Both quit and exit terminate the ftp connection.
Example:
ftp:VMā700T> quit
C:\>
4–16
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Computer-Based Remote Control
This section describes how to write programs to control the VM700T remotely,
without operator intervention.
There are several reasons you may wish to write a program to control the
VM700T instead of controlling it from a terminal or using its front panel. These
are the following:
a greater degree of automatic operation. Repetitive operations are more
efficient and less prone to error when executed from a program than
manually.
faster execution. A set of operations written into a program will generally
execute faster than the same operations performed manually.
ability to branch. You may wish to make some measurement, then perform
different action depending on the results of the measurement. Since the
VM700T command language contains only limited branching constructs,
any alternative courses of action you may wish to take can’t be written into a
VM700T function. They must be written into a program.
A “shell” program that you can use as a template for your own programs appears
later in this chapter. Before presenting it, however, this chapter discusses several
other matters you must consider when writing programs to control the VM700T.
Those things discussed are the following:
the programming language you are going to use
whether or not you need a communications library for the language you
choose
how the VM700T communicates with a computer program, including how
the VM700T signals the following conditions:
acceptance of a command
error conditions
completion of a transmission and readiness to accept another command
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–17
Computer-Based Remote Control
Programming Languages
Before you start to write programs to control the VM700T, you have to decide
what language to write the program in. You can write programs to control the
VM700T in any programming language you like. However, you will probably
want to use a language for which libraries of routines are available to handle data
communications. BASIC, C, and Pascal are good choices. The sample program
presented in this chapter is written in Microsoft QuickBASIC. (C and Pascal
users should have no problem understanding the BASIC code; the reverse is
probably not true, which is why the program appears in BASIC.)
Communications Libraries
You will probably want to purchase a commercial library of communications
routines to use with your program if any of the following applies:
your program uses SLIP mode to transfer files between the PC and the
VM700T
you are writing in any language other than BASIC and using only no-protocol data transfers
you are using CTS/RTS flow control
Communications packages currently available for BASIC, C, and Pascal (and the
companies that produce them) include the following:
BASIC:
QuickComm (Software Interphase)
C:
C Asynch Manager (Blaise Computing),
Comm Library (Greenleaf Software),
C Communications Toolkit (Magna Carta),
Silverware C Asynch Library (SilverWare),
Essential Communications (South Mountain Software)
Pascal:
Pascal Asynch Manager (Blaise Computing)
In addition, the section entitled Simple Remote Control beginning on page 4–1
lists sources for commercially available SLIP implementations.
4–18
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Computer-Based Remote Control
Communicating with the VM700T
Before you can write programs to control the VM700T, you must know how the
VM700T communicates with a computer and understand the following:
Terminal versus
Computer Mode
terminal versus computer mode (such as local versus remote echo)
VM700T responses that indicate: acceptance of a command; error conditions; completion of a transmission
exceptions to the previous item: the command.
When remotely controlled, the VM700T operates in either terminal mode or
computer mode.
Terminal mode is intended for use when the VM700T is being controlled
interactively from an actual terminal (with no processing capabilities). In
terminal mode the VM700T acts as follows:
echoes characters it receives
adds a space after sending its prompt
sends error messages as alphabetic text
Computer mode is intended for use when the VM700T is being controlled by a
computer program, without human intervention. In computer mode, the VM700T
acts as follows:
does not echo characters it receives
sends only its prompt when execution of a command is completed (no
additional space)
sends error messages as numerical encodings, not alphabetic text
When you write a computer program to control the VM700T, the VM700T is
best used in computer mode.
VM700T Responses
In computer mode, the VM700T responds to commands in one of two ways.
The VM700T sends an ‘@’ character if the command was successful.
The VM700T sends a ‘?’ character or ‘!’ character followed by a three-digit
error encoding if the command was not successful.
After sending the ‘@’ character, the VM700T sends any data transmission
initiated by the command (for example, filename). When this data
transmission is complete, the VM700T sends the remote prompt to indicate
readiness to accept another command.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–19
Computer-Based Remote Control
The exception to this rule is the command. After it receives a
command, the VM700T sends no ‘@’. Once function playback
begins, the next character the computer program receives from the VM700T will
be either a ‘?’ or ‘!’ character (if an error occurs during function playback, or if
the VM700T sends an informational message) or the characters that make up the
remote prompt.
After sending the ‘?’ or ‘!’ character and a three-digit error identifier, the
VM700T sends the remote prompt, unless the error is returned because remote
operation has been terminated.
Structure of a VM700T Program
Once you know the rules that the VM700T uses to respond to commands, you
can determine what the structure of a generic VM700T remote control program
should be. Such a program can be divided into three parts:
initialize variables, then establish communication and remote operation
execute and respond to commands
clean up
The first part of the program sets up any variables that will be required, opens
any files that will be required, opens a communications channel to the VM700T,
then (in no-protocol mode) sends the command “remote”. If this operation is
successful, the LED in the front panel Configure button starts blinking. This
indicates that the VM700T is now in remote mode and is being controlled by the
computer program. (You can terminate remote operation from the front panel by
pressing the Configure button. If remote operation is terminated in this way in
no-protocol mode, it can be restarted by sending the command “remote”.)
The main loop of the program sends a command to the VM700T, reads the
response from the VM700T, performs an appropriate action depending on the
response received (such as branching to another part of the program, displaying
an error message, logging data into a file, and so on), reads the VM700T prompt,
then loops back to send another command. This loop may also need to handle
flow control (such as, telling the VM700T to stop sending characters until the
ones already sent can be processed, and restarting the flow of characters from the
VM700T once they are processed). The main loop of the program should
execute until the setting of some variable indicates that program execution is
complete.
The final part of the program performs final cleanup functions (writing out and
closing files, closing communications channels, restoring the initial configuration of the VM700T, and so on).
4–20
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Computer-Based Remote Control
Sample Program: SHELL.BAS
The following pages list and explain a sample program called SHELL.BAS to
control the VM700T. You can use this sample program as a starting point from
which to write your own VM700T programs.
Before running the program, make sure that the VM700T is properly set up for
communicating with the PC: the proper cable is connected to the proper port on
both the PC and the VM700T, the remote port is set correctly in the Communication~Setup file, the baud rate is set correctly, and all the other communication parameters are right. When running SHELL.BAS, make sure that Flow
Control for the remote port in the VM700T is set to XON/XOFF.
A listing of the SHELL.BAS program follows, along with comments about what
each section of the program does.
Program Overview
SHELL.BAS is written in Microsoft QuickBASIC. SHELL.BAS accepts as
input a user-specified text file containing VM700T commands, written one
command to a line. The program reads and executes each command sequentially.
SHELL.BAS logs all commands and data in another user-specified file, in
addition to displaying them on the PC screen.
SHELL.BAS demonstrates many items of interest in writing programs for the
VM700T, including the following operations:
Preliminaries
how to acquire the VM700T prompt the first time, so that it can be
monitored to indicate the completion of a transmission from the VM700T
how to handle VM700T responses to commands
how to handle XON/XOFF flow control
how to decode VM700T error codes
Lines 1 through 35 perform some preliminary tasks before the main part of the
program starts.
Lines 5 through 10 declare several functions and subroutines that will be used
later.
Lines 12 through 18 set up some global variables that will be needed later.
Lines 19 through 35 get the names of the input and output files from the
keyboard, open the files, then start the output file by writing the date, the time
and the names of the input and output files.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–21
Computer-Based Remote Control
Establishing
Communication
Lines 37 through 42 establish communication with the VM700T.
Line 38 sets up output port COM1 on the PC to communicate at 9600 baud, no
parity, eight data bits, one stop bit, send a line feed with each RETURN, and
initialize the DSR (Data Set Ready) line to 0.
Line 39 sends the command remote out port COM1.
Line 40 calls the GetPrompt function, which waits for the response from the
VM700T and records the VM700T prompt for later use in recognizing end-oftransmission.
Line 41 displays the prompt character sequence on the screen. Line 42 writes the
prompt character sequence to the output file.
Main Program Loop
Lines 44 through 94 form the main program loop.
Lines 46 through 79 form a large WHILE loop that executes as long as there are
lines to be read from the input file and no fatal error has been encountered.
Line 47 reads a line from the input file. If the line read is not blank, line 49
prints it on the screen, line 50 writes it to the output file, and line 51 sends it to
the VM700T by calling PutCmd.
Lines 52 through 67 handle the case where PutCmd! returns a non-zero value,
such as an error or warning message happened during execution of the last
command.
Program Listing
Table 4–1: Sample program listing
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Line
5
10
15
4–22
' sample program for controlling VMā700T
' reads text file containing VMā700T commands
'
' declarations
DECLARE FUNCTION ReadError! (return$)
DECLARE FUNCTION ReadString (text$, start$, p$)
DECLARE FUNCTION PutCmd! (Cmd$, return$)
DECLARE FUNCTION getPrompt$ (i%)
DECLARE SUB gettimeout (i%)
DECLARE SUB VMError (c!, message$)
'
' preliminaries
holdoff = 0
'used for XON/XOFF flow control
xon$ = CHR$(17)
'used for XON/XOFF flow control
xoff$ = CHR$(19)
'used for XON/XOFF flow control
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Computer-Based Remote Control
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 4–1: Sample program listing (Cont.)
Line
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
return$ = ""
fatalerror = 0
CLS
' get name of file to read commands from
infile$ = ""
WHILE infile$ = ""
INPUT "Name of command file (input):", infile$
WEND
OPEN infile$ FOR INPUT AS #2
' get name of file to log results to
outfile$ = ""
WHILE outfile$ = ""
INPUT "Name of log file (output):", outfile$
WEND
OPEN outfile$ FOR OUTPUT AS #3
PRINT #3, DATE$
PRINT #3, TIME$
PRINT #3, "Input file:"; infile$
PRINT #3, "Output file:"; outfile$
' setup
OPEN "com1:9600,N,8,1,LF,DS0" FOR RANDOM AS #1
PRINT #1, "remote"
prompt$ = getPrompt$(1)
PRINT "Prompt: "; prompt$
PRINT #3, "Prompt: "; prompt$
'main loop
'read lines from input file
WHILE NOT (EOF(2)) AND fatalerror = 0
LINE INPUT #2, inputline$
IF inputline$ <> "" THEN
PRINT inputline$
PRINT #3, inputline$
c = PutCmd!(inputline$, return$)
IF c <> 0 THEN
fatalerror = 1
IF c < 0 THEN
PRINT "Error encountered:"; -c
PRINT #3, "Error encountered:"; -c
ELSE
PRINT "Warning message:"; c
PRINT #3, "Warning message:"; c
END IF
CALL VMError(c, message$)
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–23
Computer-Based Remote Control
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 4–1: Sample program listing (Cont.)
Line
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
105
4–24
PRINT message$
PRINT #3, message$
IF c <> 7 AND c <> 8 AND c <> -17 THEN
c = PutCmd!("quit", return$)
END IF
END IF
IF fatalerror = 0 THEN
d = 0
DO UNTIL d = 1
d = ReadString(c$, return$, prompt$)
PRINT c$
PRINT #3, c$
LOOP
PRINT prompt$;
PRINT #3, prompt$;
END IF
END IF
WEND
IF fatalerror = 0 THEN
PRINT:PRINT "End of input file reached"
PRINT #3,:PRINT #3, "End of input file reached"
PRINT "quit"
PRINT #3, "quit"
c = PutCmd!("quit", return$)
IF c <> 0 THEN CALL VMError(c, message$)
ELSE 'fatalerror=1
PRINT "Fatal error encountered"
PRINT "Program terminated"
PRINT #3, "Fatal error encountered"
PRINT #3, "Program terminated"
END IF
CLOSE ALL
END
FUNCTION getPrompt$ (i%)
SHARED holdoff
SHARED xon$, xoff$
DO
LOOP UNTIL NOT EOF(i%)
loopa1:
'
' Check if the input buffer is up to 128 bytes.
' If it is, then send xoff to stop transmission
'
IF LOC(i%) > 128 THEN
holdoff = 1
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Computer-Based Remote Control
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 4–1: Sample program listing (Cont.)
Line
PRINT #i%, xoff$;
END IF
110
115
120
125
130
135
140
145
150
'
' If there are characters to read in, then do so,
'
IF LOC(i%) > 0 THEN
c$ = INPUT$(LOC(i%), #1)
text$ = text$ + c$
END IF
'
' If there are no more characters left, and tx has been held off,
' then turn it back on with xon.
'
IF holdoff AND LOC(1) = 0 THEN
holdoff = 0
PRINT #i%, xon$;
END IF
'
' Check for eof, and loop for a while in case it was only momentary.
'
IF NOT EOF(i%) THEN GOTO loopa1
FOR j = 1 TO 4000
IF NOT EOF(i%) THEN EXIT FOR
NEXT
'
' If the loop was exited early, then continue with reading.
'
IF j < 4000 THEN GOTO loopa1
getPrompt$ = text$
END FUNCTION
FUNCTION PutCmd (Cmd$, return$)
PRINT #1, Cmd$
PutCmd = ReadError(return$)
END FUNCTION
FUNCTION ReadError (return$)
return$ = ""
ErrCode = 0
' Read in VMā700T Computer response
DO UNTIL LOC(1) > 0
LOOP
c$ = INPUT$(1, #1)
IF c$ = "?" OR c$ = "!" THEN
DO UNTIL LOC(1) >= 3
LOOP
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–25
Computer-Based Remote Control
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 4–1: Sample program listing (Cont.)
Line
155
160
165
170
175
180
185
190
195
4–26
num$ = INPUT$(3, #1)
ErrCode = VAL(num$)
IF c$ = "?" THEN
ErrCode = -ErrCode
END IF
ELSEIF c$ <> "@" THEN
return$ = c$
END IF
ReadError = ErrCode
END FUNCTION
FUNCTION ReadString (text$, start$, p$)
SHARED holdoff
SHARED xon$, xoff$
DO
' Wait until there are
LOOP UNTIL NOT EOF(1) ' Characters to read.
temp$ = start$
' Initialize temp$
last = 0
' Flag for prompt found
p = 1
' Initialize prompt count
FOR i = 1 TO LEN(start$)
temp2$ = MID$(start$, i, 1)
temp3$ = MID$(p$, i, 1)
IF temp2$ = temp3$ THEN p = p + 1 ELSE p = 1
NEXT
done = 0
' Set done flag to zero
DO WHILE done = 0
'
' Check if the input buffer is up to 128 bytes.
' If it is, then send xoff to stop transmission
'
IF LOC(1) > 128 THEN
holdoff = 1
PRINT #1, xoff$;
END IF
'
' If there are characters to read in, then read one in.
'
IF LOC(1) > 0 THEN
c$ = INPUT$(1, #1)
IF ASC(c$) = 10 THEN
' If linefeed, then done
done = 1
ELSEIF ASC(c$) <> 13 THEN ' Skip carriage returns
temp$ = temp$ + c$
' Add it to string
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Computer-Based Remote Control
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 4–1: Sample program listing (Cont.)
Line
200
205
210
215
220
225
230
235
240
d$ = MID$(p$, p, 1)
IF d$ <> c$ THEN
' Is it part of prompt?
p = 1
' No
ELSE
IF p = LEN(p$) THEN ' Was it the whole prompt?
done = 1
' Yes
found = 1
' Prompt found
text$ = MID$(temp$, 1, LEN(temp$) - p) ' Remove prompt
ELSE
p = p + 1
END IF
END IF
END IF
END IF
' If there are no more characters left, and tx has
' been held off, then turn it back on with xon.
IF holdoff AND LOC(1) = 0 THEN
holdoff = 0
PRINT #1, xon$;
END IF
'
' Check for eof, and loop for a while in case it was only momentary.
IF EOF(1) AND NOT done THEN
FOR j = 1 TO 4000
IF NOT EOF(1) THEN EXIT FOR
NEXT
' If the loop was exited early, then continue reading.
IF j > 4000 THEN EXIT DO
END IF
LOOP
IF found = 0 THEN text$ = temp$ ' Line if data without prompt
ReadString = found
END FUNCTION
SUB VMError (c!, message$)
SELECT CASE c!
CASE -1
message$ = "Bad command argument"
CASE -2
message$ = "Sub-function not found"
CASE -3
message$ = "Playback nesting too deep"
CASE -4
message$ = "Function directory inaccessible"
CASE -5
message$ = "Function not found"
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–27
Computer-Based Remote Control
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 4–1: Sample program listing (Cont.)
Line
245
250
255
260
265
270
275
280
285
4–28
CASE -6
message$
CASE -7
message$
CASE -8
message$
CASE -9
message$
CASE -10
message$
CASE -11
message$
CASE -12
message$
CASE -13
message$
CASE -14
message$
CASE -15
message$
CASE -16
message$
CASE -17
message$
CASE -101
message$
CASE -102
message$
CASE -103
message$
CASE -104
message$
CASE -105
message$
CASE -106
message$
CASE -107
message$
CASE -108
message$
CASE -109
message$
CASE -110
message$
CASE -111
= "Unknown command"
= "Unknown hardkey"
= "Out of memory"
= "Recursive function call"
= "Bad command in this context"
= "Name too long"
= "No filename"
= "Line too long"
= "Command only meaningful for non-IP connections"
= "Bad time format (use getclock)"
= "Function playback in progress. Type ^C to stop it."
= "Remote not enabled"
= "Request filtered"
= "Screen event not key"
= "Unknown softkey"
= "Invalid softkey"
= "Unwanted hardkey"
= "Unknown input"
= "Not found"
= "Request not supported"
= "No server resources"
= "Illegal name"
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Computer-Based Remote Control
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 4–1: Sample program listing (Cont.)
Line
290
295
300
305
message$
CASE -112
message$
CASE -113
message$
CASE -114
message$
CASE 5
message$
CASE 6
message$
CASE 7
message$
CASE 8
message$
CASE 10
message$
END SELECT
END SUB
= "Not writable"
= "Not readable"
= "No permission"
= "Bad argument(s)"
= "Error occurred in function playback"
= "Type carriage return to continue"
= "Remote terminated"
= "Remote has been terminated locally"
= "Application returned error status"
Lines 68 through 78 handle the case where PutCmd returns a zero value, such as
where the last command executed successfully. Line 71 calls function ReadĆ
String to read characters from the VM700T and print them, both on the screen
and into the output file, until it sees the VM700T prompt.
Lines 80 through 86 print appropriate messages, both on the screen and in the
output log file, when the end of the input file is reached.
Lines 88 through 92 print appropriate messages, both on the screen and in the
output log file, when program execution is halted because of a VM700T error
condition.
Function GetPrompt
Function GetPrompt reads characters from the VM700T until the VM700T
stops sending characters. The characters it reads in are assumed to be the
VM700T prompt, which the VM700T uses to signal end-of-transmission.
Lines 96 through 98 declare variables holdoff, xon$ and xoff$ to be “shared”
variables. Shared variables share their values with other procedures and functions
and with the main program. These are similar to “static” variables in other
programming languages.
Lines 100 through 108 check to see if the input buffer is past the “critical” point,
defined as 128 bytes. (The LOC function returns the number of characters in the
input buffer for a specified communications channel.) If the input buffer contains
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–29
Computer-Based Remote Control
128 bytes or more, the program sets the value of variable holdoff to 1 (“true”),
then sends the XOFF character to the VM700T.
Lines 110 through 115 read a line of input from the VM700T into variable c$,
then appends the contents of c$ to variable text$.
Lines 117 through 123 check to see if the input buffer is empty and the variable
holdoff is set to 1. If both of these conditions hold, the programs sets holdoff to 0
and sends the XON character to the VM700T.
Lines 127 loops back to line 100 if “end-of-file” has not been seen from the
VM700T.
Lines 128 through 130 simply delay to give the VM700T a chance to transmit
another character, in order to avoid spurious end-of-transmission readings.
Line 134 tests to see if the FOR...NEXT loop in lines 128 through 130 was
exited early. If it was, the program loops back to line 100. Otherwise, line 135
assigns the contents of variable text$ to function GetPrompt, and line 136
returns from the function call.
Function PutCmd
Function ReadError
Function PutCmd sends a string out the COM1 port to the VM700T, then calls
function ReadError to see if the VM700T accepts the string as a command.
Function ReadError reads characters from the VM700T to determine if a
command sent by PutCmd caused a VM700T error condition.
If the first character that ReadError reads is an “@” character, the command was
successful.
If the first character that ReadError reads is a “?” or “!” character, the command
caused an error condition or returned a warning. ReadError reads the next three
characters and returns them in ErrCode.
If the first character that ReadError reads is not an “@”, “?”, or “!”, then a
playback command is executing, and the first character is probably the first
character of the VM700T prompt string. It is returned in variable return$ for
special handling by the calling routine in this instance.
Function ReadString
Function Readstring reads characters from the VM700T until it reads the
VM700T prompt. It then returns all characters read up to the start of the
VM700T prompt.
Parameter text$ contains the string that ReadString returns.
Parameter start$ contains the string that ReadString starts out with when it is
called. This is usually the null string, but may also contain characters returned by
a previous call to ReadError.
4–30
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Computer-Based Remote Control
Parameter p$ contains the VM700T prompt string. Characters read in from the
VM700T are compared to this string to see if the end of the VM700T transmission has been reached.
If ReadString finds the VM700T prompt, it returns a value of 1. If it times out
without finding the VM700T prompt, it returns a value of 0.
Sub VMError
Subroutine VMError takes a number as input and returns an error or warning
message corresponding to that number.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–31
Computer-Based Remote Control
4–32
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation and Modem Control
Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation
A common use of the remote capabilities of the VM700T is to monitor Automode measurements and print a warning message when test results are out of
limits.
When doing this, it is important to remember that remote monitoring is different
from remote control. The VM700T doesn’t have to be in remote mode to allow
you to monitor tests. You can simply attach a printer or terminal to the VM700T
log port to monitor test results.
If you want to monitor Auto mode measurements while the VM700T is under
remote control, you must avoid sending commands to the VM700T at the same
time that the VM700T is sending log data to the computer. Doing so can cause
the two data streams (log data and commands) to interfere with each other, with
unpredictable results.
The following sections explain how to monitor Auto mode operation, in remote
mode or otherwise.
Monitoring Auto-Mode
Operation Without Remote
Control
To monitor Auto mode operation without putting the VM700T under remote
control, use the following procedure:
1. Attach the monitoring device (printer, terminal, data logger, or similar
device) to the Log port of the VM700T. To find out which port is the Log
port, check the Log Port entry in the Communication Setup file.
2. In the Communication Setup file, set the format of the Log port to an
appropriate setting for the monitoring device (for example, ASCII Printer,
PostScript, Epson LQ, or Parallel).
3. Press the Auto button.
A message appears on the monitoring device when a measurement falls outside
its alarm limits, or when a measurement transitions from outside its alarm limits
to within its alarm limits. Refer to Consecutive Errors Parameter on page 4–34
for more information about when a measurement is logged.
Monitoring Auto-Mode
Operation With Remote
Control
To monitor Auto mode operation when the VM700T is under remote control, use
the following procedure:
1. Set the Remote Control port and the Log port to the same serial port in the
Communication Setup file.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–33
Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation and Modem Control
2. Establish a connection between the PC and the VM700T.
3. Execute the Auto measurement.
4. Read the prompt from the VM700T, indicating that the command to execute
Auto mode has been received.
5. Wait for further response from the VM700T. This will be a message
indicating that an alarm limit has been violated.
6. Take appropriate action with the alarm message (for example, write it into a
file or branch to another section of program).
The following topic, Consecutive Errors Parameter, has more information about
when a measurement is logged.
Consecutive Errors
Parameter
The VM700T sends a message out the Log port when on of the following actions
occurs:
a measurement transitions from within its alarm limits to outside its alarm
limits
a measurement transitions from outside its alarm limits to within its alarm
limits
The “consecutive errors before reporting” parameter specified in the current Auto
Limits file controls the frequency with which log messages are sent. For a log
message to be sent concerning a measurement, that measurement must fall
outside its alarm limits for the number of Auto mode cycles specified by the
consecutive errors parameter. (An Auto-mode cycle is a single pass through the
currently selected Auto-mode measurements.)
Once a log message is sent warning of an out-of-limits measurement, the next
message concerning that measurement will be sent only if the measurement falls
within its alarm limits for the number of Auto mode cycles specified by the
consecutive errors parameter.
Successive messages about a measurement continue in this fashion, one
indicating that an alarm limit has been violated, the next indicating that the
measurement has returned to its alarm limit range. This method of operation
keeps the data monitoring device from being bombarded with a stream of
repetitive alarm-violation messages.
4–34
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation and Modem Control
Modem Control
If you connect the VM700T remote port to a modem, you can set up functions
that dial the modem, acquire a carrier signal, transmit data over a telephone line,
and hang up the telephone. In order to use the VM700T in this way, the modem
must be set up to meet certain requirements:
The Control Command
The modem must be silent. It must not issue characters to be read by the
VM700T, or echo back characters sent to it by the VM700T. This means, for
instance, that Hayes-compatible modems should be set to not return results
codes, and to not echo received characters.
The modem should use hardware flow control to signal readiness to receive
data, or to halt data transmission from the VM700T.
The control command sends a specified string of characters out the VM700T
Control port. (Note: The Control port referred to in the previous sentence is not
the same as the Remote Control port. It is a distinct entry in the Communication
Setup file.) You typically use control to send commands to a modem or switcher.
The string can be any sequence of ASCII characters, or any of the following:
^x
a control character,
$nn
\$
\^
\\
\<LF>
such as, ^G (bell)
or ^M (carriage return)
a hexadecimal number, where n is 0-9, A-F, or a-f
the `$" character
the `^' character
the `\' character
a trailing `\' on a line says to ignore end-of-line
Note that communication through the control command is one-way only. There
is no feed-back from the controlled device. This means that if the controlled
device is not powered on, or is not even attached, or is sent an incorrect string,
the VM700T function or program will continue executing.
Note also that the control statement does not add characters to delimit messages.
Thus, if the device being controlled requires that messages be delimited with a
carriage return, line , or carriage-return/line-feed sequence, those characters must
be included in the string accompanying the control command.
Examples:
VM700T> control ^G
This example sends a bell character out the Control Port.
VM700T> control ATDT123-4567^M
This example sends the ASCII string “ATDT123–4567”, followed by carriage
return, out the Control Port.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–35
Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation and Modem Control
The ? and ?! Constructs
The ? construct is followed by any configuration keyword and a single
command. During function playback, if the keyword has non-zero value, the rest
of the line following the ? construct is executed. Otherwise,function execution
continues with the next statement in the function.
The ?! construct is similar, except that the rest of the line is executed if the
keyword has a value of zero. Otherwise,function execution continues with the
next statement in the function.
The ? and ?! constructs are available only during function playback. They are
typically used to test the value of a Carrier Detect line in order to control
communications with a modem, or to test the global out-of-limits (GOOL) flag
to see if an application found one or more measurements that were out-of-limits.
Example:
?GCD0 return
delay 5
loop
This first line of this example tests the status of the Carrier Detect line on serial
port 0. If the test returns true, the function returns to its caller. If it returns false,
the function waits one half-second, then loops back to the first command.
A “Generic” Modem
Control Function
Functions that dial up a telephone line, send data, then hang up the telephone
take a standard form composed of the following four parts:
send the modem the command to dial the telephone
wait until the telephone connection is established
send the data
hang up the telephone
The following discussion demonstrates the use of each of these parts.
The Main Function. The following function sends a command to a modem to dial
a telephone number, calls a function that waits until the telephone connection is
established, runs the H_Timing measurement, obtains its results, sends the
results over the telephone line, then hangs up the phone:
control ATDT123-4567^M
delay 10
playback waitforCD
execute H_Timing
getresults
spool H_Timing
playback hangup
4–36
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation and Modem Control
Note that the control command does not delimit the sequence of characters it
sends by a carriage return or line feed. Therefore, a carriage return (^M) had to
be appended to the string sent by the control command.
Note also that the spool command sends the contents of the H_Timing
measurement results file out the Copy port. Thus, the Copy port and the Control
port must be configured to the same physical port if this function is to work.
The waitforCD Function. The Main function shown above called a function called
“waitforCD” immediately after sending the command to the modem to dial the
telephone. The waitforCD function simply consists of a test to see if Carrier
Detect is high, followed by an immediate return from the function if the test
returns true, or a short delay and a loop back to the start if the test returns false:
?GCD0 return
delay 5
loop
The hangup Function. To disconnect a telephone connection, Hayes-compatible
modems must send three “attention” characters (by default, these are plus signs),
followed by the command ath, followed by a carriage return. A brief delay
between each attention character makes sure it is received properly and the
modem takes appropriate action.
Note that the ?GCD0 and ?GCD1 commands refer to physical and not logical ports.
Thus, if the Copy port is ever changed from 0 to 1 or 1 to 0, any functions using
the ?GCD0 or ?GCD1 commands will have to be changed as well.
control +
delay 4
control +
delay 4
control +
delay 20
control ath^M
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–37
Monitoring Auto-Mode Operation and Modem Control
4–38
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Functions
VM700T functions are user-defined sequences of commands. Functions can be
recorded as a sequence of front-panel actions, or edited with the VM700T
on-screen function editor.
Once a function is stored in the VM700T, it can be executed from the front panel
by pressing the Function button, followed by touching the soft key corresponding to the function. Functions can also be executed from remote operation.
Functions can be used to execute a sequence of commands repeatedly and
reliably.
They are also useful as programming aids. Sometimes, the best way to find out a
command sequence to send over remote control is to record a function that
performs the same action, and then examine the function to see how it works.
Lastly, functions can also be used as building blocks to be called from within
remote programs (or other functions). Programs are much smaller and easier to
write if they can simply play back a sequence of prerecorded functions.
The Function Keys Directory
The Function Keys directory (/nvram0/FunctionKeys) contains user-defined
functions, the Timed Events directory, and user-created directories that can
contain other functions. To display the Function Keys directory, do the
following:
1. If the VM700T is in Configure mode, press the Configure button to exit it.
2. Press the Configure button.
3. Touch the soft key. This displays the FunctionKeys
directory and the Function Keys menu (Figure 4–1).
Delete
Create
Directory
Create
Function
Rename
Print
File
Leave
Directory
Figure 4–1: Function Keys menu
You can use the Function Keys directory window and the main Function Keys
menu to create functions, view functions, edit functions, print functions, delete
functions, create subdirectories, delete subdirectories, and rename functions or
subdirectories. The rest of this section describes each of these operations.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–39
Functions
Creating Functions
To create a new function from the front panel, bring up the Function Keys
directory and main Function Keys menu. Then, touch the Create Function soft
key. This brings up an on-screen keyboard (see Figure 4–2) that you can use to
type in the name of the new function.
Please enter Function Key name (max 31 characters)
q
w
a
s
z
Cancel
e
r
d
x
Set1
t
f
c
Set2
y
g
v
u
h
b
Space Bar
i
o
j
n
k
p
l
Back
Space
Return
m
Shift
Done
Figure 4–2: VM700T on-screen keyboard
When you name the function to be created, keep the following rules in mind:
4–40
No spaces are allowed in the name; use an _ (underline) or . (dot) to separate
words in a name.
Use only upper and lower case letters, numerals, and the following special
characters: _ (underline), . (dot), – (minus sign), + (plus sign, : (colon), and
~ (tilde) in names.
Forward slash (/) and reverse slash (\) are not permitted in the function name.
Use the Return key to place a word on the second line of the name. The ‘~’
key also places a word on the second line of the name. For example, typing
“Transmitter~Functions” would place the word “Functions” below “Transmitter” when the icon for the function appears in the Function Keys
directory.
A maximum of 31 characters are allowed in a name.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Functions
When neither Set1 nor Set2 is highlighted, you can type lowercase and
uppercase English alphabet characters. The lowercase Set1 character set
allows you to enter numerals and punctuation characters. The uppercase
Set1 and the Set2 character set allow you to enter various special characters
and accented characters for use in non-English language function names.
Both the Set1 and Set2 character keys and the Shift soft key “lock” when
selected. Set1 and Set2 are unlocked by touching the same key again or
touching the unselected key of the pair. Shift is unlocked by touching
Shift again.
After typing the name, touch Done.
Press Cancel to quit the process without creating the function.
Learn Mode
If you entered a name for the function, the VM700T goes into learn mode. The
LED on the Configure button blinks while to indicate this. In learn mode, the
VM700T records all user interactions with the front panel. The VM700T
displays the Learn Mode menu (Figure 4–3), containing soft keys used in
recording functions. The learn mode soft keys are described below.
Pause
Insert
Message
End
Loop
Abort
Figure 4–3: Learn Mode menu
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Pause
Selecting the Pause soft key suspends function recording. This
allows you to press VM700T controls without making those
actions part of the recorded function. (The subsequent state of
the VM700T, however, is recorded.) When you want to resume
function recording, press the Configure button, touch Pause a
second time, and press the Configure button again.
Insert
Message
Selecting the Insert Message soft key displays the on-screen
keyboard, with which you can enter a message of up to four
lines of 76 characters each. When the function plays back, the
message will be displayed in the lower left corner of the screen
at the appropriate point in the playback sequence. When the
message appears, function playback pauses and the message
“Press screen to continue” is also displayed. Touch any point
on the screen to continue function playback.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–41
Functions
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
End
Selecting the End soft key terminates function recording. The
VM700T remains in the Function Keys directory in Configure
mode. When executed, a Function Key terminated with End
plays back once and stops.
Loop
Selecting the Loop soft key terminates function recording. The
VM700T remains in the Function Keys directory in Configure
mode. When executed, a Function Key terminated with Loop
plays back continuously until halted by pressing the Function
button again.
Abort
Selecting the Abort soft key during function recording deletes
the function you were creating.
Editing Functions
To edit a function once it has been learned, bring up the Function Keys directory
and main Function Keys menu. Then, touch the icon corresponding to the
function you wish to edit. This brings up the Function Editing menu
(Figure 4–4).
Update &
Exit
Insert
Line
Delete
Line
No change
& Exit
Figure 4–4: Function editing menu
To edit a line:
1. Highlight the line to be edited, using the control knob (that is, rotate the
knob until the line you wish to edit appears in the center of the screen,
brighter than the surrounding lines).
2. Touch the line. The on-screen keyboard appears.
3. Use the knob, the backspace key, and other keys of the on-screen keyboard
to modify the line.
4. Touch Done when you have finished editing the line.
To insert a line:
1. Highlight the line following the insertion point, using the control knob (that
is, rotate the knob until the line after the insertion point appears in the center
of the screen, brighter than the surrounding lines).
2. Touch the Insert Line soft key. The on-screen keyboard appears.
4–42
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Functions
3. Enter the new line, using the on-screen keyboard.
4. Touch Done when the new line is completed.
To delete a line:
1. Highlight the line to be deleted, using the control knob (that is, rotate the
knob until the line to be deleted appears in the center of the screen, brighter
than the surrounding lines).
2. Touch the Delete Line soft key.
To save changes and exit:
Touch the Update & Exit soft key.
To exit without saving changes:
1. Touch the No Change & Exit soft key.
2. If you have made changes to the function, a message appears on the screen,
warning you that the function has been changed.
Adding Comments to a
Function
Annotating a Function
If you really don’t want to save the changes, touch the No Change & Exit
soft key again.
If you want to save the changes instead, touch the Update & Exit soft key.
You can add comments to a function by preceding the comment with a “#”
(pound sign) character. Any characters appearing on a line after a “#” character
are ignored.
You can annotate a function (that is, you can add descriptive text explaining what
the function does) with up to three lines of text. The annotation text appears
when you press the Function button on the front panel.
To annotate a function:
1. Bring up the function for editing. From the Function Keys directory, touch
the icon corresponding to the function to be edited.
2. Insert a line at the beginning of the function, by highlighting the first line of
the function and touching the Insert Line soft key.
3. Type the text of the annotation line, making sure that the first character is a
“#” (pound sign) character.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, if desired, to insert up to three annotation lines.
5. Touch the Update & Exit soft key to save changes to the function.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–43
Functions
The annotation text (that is, the first one, two, or three lines of comments,
inserted as defined above) will appear next to the icon for the function when you
press the Function button on the front panel.
Speeding Up or Slowing
Down a Function
When you record a function from the front panel, it plays back EXACTLY the
way you recorded it-including the delay time between actions. This time is
recorded in the form of commands that appear in the function. The
argument following each command is the amount of time, in tenths of
seconds, for the function to pause before continuing execution. Editing the
argument following each command, or deleting the command
altogether, is an easy way to speed up or slow down function playback.
Note, however, that some measurements take a certain amount of time to set up
before their results become valid (or, in some cases, before they can obtain
results at all). Therefore, it is a good idea to reduce, but not eliminate, the delay
time following most or commands.
Another useful way to modify the timing of a function is to change commands to commands. While commands only specify an amount
by which to turn the knob, commands specify both an amount to turn the
knob and a time over which to turn it continuously. Thus, while commands
execute near-instantaneously, commands execute over a user-specified
period of time (given in tenths of seconds). commands are most useful
when you want to watch the progress of the function while you are turning the
knob. commands, conversely, are most useful when you simply want to
turn the knob, then observe the result or perform another action.
Function Playback
Once recorded, functions can be played back from the front panel or from remote
operation. The following sections describe both kinds of function playback
operation.
Function Playback from
the Front Panel
To play back a function from the VM700T Front Panel:
1. Press the Function button.
2. Touch the icon corresponding to the function you wish to play back.
The VM700T performs the sequence of actions you recorded, taking almost
exactly the same amount of time as when it was recorded. (See Speeding Up or
Slowing Down a Function, on page 4–44, if you want to modify the time the
function takes to run.) The Function button LED flashes while a function is
being played back. Pressing the Function button during function playback
cancels the playback, and it leaves the VM700T in the state it was in when
function playback was cancelled.
4–44
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Functions
If there is a playback error, or if a disptext command is encountered, an
appropriate message is displayed on the bottom of the VM700T screen, along
with a request that the screen be touched to continue playback.
When you execute a function terminated with End, the function plays back once
and exits. When you execute a function terminated with Loop, the function loops
continuously until the Function button is pressed to cancel playback.
The restoreconfig command is added by default to functions create with the
Create Function soft key. This command restores various VM700T operating
parameters to the values contained in the configuration files. If you wish, you
can delete this command when editing the function.
When you abort a function, a restoreconfig command is always executed
automatically.
Function Playback from
Remote Operation
To play back a function from remote operation, send the playback command:
VMā700T> playback functionĆname
If the function is in a subdirectory, the directory name must be included in the
argument to the playback command. For example, if the function is named
TransDGDP and is stored in directory Special~Measurements within the
Function Keys directory, the playback command would be:
VMā700T> playback Special~Measurements/TransDGDP
When a function is playing back remotely, it can be terminated by pressing
Ctrl-C on the remote keyboard, or by pressing the Configure button on the front
panel (which also terminates the remote control session).
If the “Message Display:” line in the Communication~Setup file is set to
“VM700 Screen”, a message appears when the playback command is first
issued, telling you that function playback is in progress and how to stop it:
VMā700T> playback Special~Measurements/TransDGDP
Function playback in progress. Enter ^C to stop it.
If the function finishes normally, the following message appears:
Function playback completed
If function playback is terminated with a Ctrl-C, the following message appears:
Function playback terminated
If there is a playback error, or if a disptext command is encountered, an
appropriate message is displayed.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–45
Functions
If the Message Display line in the Communications~Setup file is set to VM700
Screen, error messages or text from disptext commands are displayed on the
VM700T screen. To continue function playback, touch the screen. If the
Message Display line in the Communications~Setup file is set to Remote, error
messages or text from disptext commands are displayed on the terminal screen,
followed by the message
Hit CR to continue
Pressing return on the remote terminal displays the following message:
Function playback continues...
Function Playback on
Power Up
There is a special function file that can be created for use on powering up the
VM700T. The Powerup function file is looked for by the VM700T as part of the
initialization process, and, if found, played back immediately after initialization
has finished. The powerup function file is created in exactly the same manner as
other function files. If there is a state or measurement mode you want the
VM700T to be in or series of measurements that needs to be done after power is
either turned on or restored after a power loss, the powerup function key file may
be used to perform the required steps.
Subdirectories
If you have many functions defined in the Function Keys directory, it is often
convenient to store them in subdirectories. This reduces clutter in the Function
Keys directory window, and makes it easier to find the function you want for a
specific task.
Creating Subdirectories
To create a new subdirectory in the Function Keys directory (or in any of its
subdirectories), use the following steps:
1. Bring up the Function Keys directory by pressing the Configure button, then
touching the Function Keys soft key.
If you wish to create a subdirectory within an existing subdirectory of the
Function Keys directory, touch the icon(s) of the sequence of subdirectories
until the VM700T screen displays the subdirectory in which you will create
the new subdirectory.
2. Touch the Create Directory soft key. The VM700T displays the on-screen
keyboard that you can use to type in the name for the new subdirectory.
When typing in a subdirectory name, follow the same rules as for typing in
function names (listed in Creating Functions on page 4–40).
4–46
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Functions
Traversing the Directory
Hierarchy
You can think of the Function Keys directory and its subdirectories as being
organized in a hierarchy, with the Function Keys directory at the top, any
subdirectories it contains on the next level below, any subdirectories contained in
the subdirectories on the next level below and so forth (see Figure 4–5).
Function
Keys
Function
Subdirectory
Function
Function
Subdirectory
Function
Function
Function
Function
Figure 4–5: Function Keys directory hierarchy
To travel down the hierarchy (that is, from a directory to one of its subdirectories), touch the icon corresponding to the directory you wish to see.
To travel up the hierarchy (that is, from a subdirectory to the directory the next
level above), touch the Leave Directory soft key at the bottom right of the
screen.
Deleting Functions and Subdirectories
To delete a function or empty subdirectory, bring up the main Function Key
menu, then touch the Delete soft key, followed by the icon corresponding to the
function or directory. The VM700T beeps at one-second intervals while the
selected icon slowly disintegrates on the screen. Once the disintegration starts,
you have six seconds to cancel the Delete command, either by touching the
Delete soft key again or by touching the screen anywhere inside the directory
window. Canceling the Delete process leaves the function or subdirectory intact
(nothing is deleted).
A directory that is not empty cannot be deleted. Its icon disintegrates, but
reappears after the disintegration process completes.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
4–47
Functions
Renaming Functions and Subdirectories
To rename a function or subdirectory, bring up the main Function Key menu,
then touch the Rename soft key, followed by the icon corresponding to the icon
or function to be renamed. The on-screen keyboard appears, allowing you to type
the new function or directory name. When typing in a new name, follow the
naming rules listed in Creating Functions starting on page 4–40.
Printing Function Contents
To print the contents of a function, bring up the main Function Key menu, then
touch the Print File soft key, followed by the icon corresponding to the
function to be printed.
You can cancel the print request by entering the main Configure menu (you may
have to press the Configure button twice), and then selecting the Cancel Copy
soft key.
4–48
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendices
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
This appendix documents the keywords used with the get and set commands.
For each get/set keyword letter-group, it gives the syntax of the set command
and the get result, an explanation of what the keywords in the letter-group do,
and one or more examples of the use of keywords from the group. This is
followed by an alphabetized table of all the keywords in the group and their
meaning.
For the Option 1S Get/Set keywords, refer to page A–99.
NOTE. The remote commands and keywords are case sensitive. Option 1S
introduces lower case keywords to the VM700T measurement set. Be sure to
enter the commands and keywords exactly as they appear in this manual.
In the following descriptions, VM700T> is a prompt (which you can edit), not a
required input.
“A” Group: Audio Configuration
“A” keywords report on or set the values of Audio Option Configuration
parameters. These keywords can only be used on a VM700T equipped with
Option 40 (Audio).
Get commands used with the “A” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channel-letter>
Set commands used with “A” group keywords take different arguments,
depending on the keyword. The form of each Set command used with “A” group
keywords is documented in the pages that follow.
Table A–1: “A” keywords: Audio Configuration
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Keyword
Description
A33T
0.33 test level
ALEM
Level Meter
ADAA
Dead Air Alarm
ALIL
Lineup level
AERR
Error reporting
ALIM
Audio Limit File
AEXT
External termination
ALIS
Lissajous display
AHPT
Audio Printout Title
ARIA
Report in Auto
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–1
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
A33T
A33T specifies the 0.33 Test Level in dBu. The set command takes one
argument after the channel letter. Legal values are integers from –6 to
14.
VM700T> get A33T A
0
VM700T> set A33T A 1
VM700T>
ADAA
ADAA specifies the amount of time the VM700T waits before it
reports an error when it encounters a period of silence. The set
command takes one argument after the channel letter. Legal values are:
disabled, 15 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 30 min, or 60 min. Disabled is the default.
VM700T> get ADAA A
disabled
VM700T> set ADAA A 1 min
VM700T>
AERR
AERR specifies whether or not audio errors for the specified audio
source should be added to the video error report. The set command
takes one argument after the channel letter. Legal values are enabled or
disabled. Disabled is the default.
VM700T> get AERR A
enabled
VM700T> set AERR A disabled
VM700T>
AEXT
AEXT informs the VM700T about the value of the VM700T’s external
termination. The set command takes one argument after the channel
letter. Legal values are: 50, 75, 125, 150, 300, 600, 10k.
VM700T> get AEXT A
600
VM700T> set AEXT 10k
AHPT
AHPT specifies the title that appears on audio report printouts. The set
command takes one argument after the channel letter. It consists of an
arbitrary string up to 50 characters in length. “#” is a comment character; all characters appearing in the string after a “#” are ignored. To
include a “#” in the string, precede it by a “\” character.
VM700T> get AHPT A
VM700T> Audio Measurements
VM700T> set AHPT A Fred's Audio Measurements
VM700T> get AHPT A
Fred's Audio Measurements
VM700T>
A–2
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
ALEM
ALEM specifies the meter ballistics for the bar-graph level meters in
the Audio Monitor display. The set command takes one argument after
the channel letter. Legal values are: PPM:DIN45406, PPM:NORDIC,
PPM:TEK7601, or VU. The default is PPM:DIN45406.
VM700T> get ALEM A
PPM:DIN4506
VM700T> set ALEM A PPM:TEK760
VM700T> get ALEM A
PPM:TEK760
VM700T>
ALIL
ALIL specifies the meter equivalency in dBu for the VU and dBu
scales used in the Audio Monitor display. The set command takes one
argument after the channel letter. Legal values are integers from –10 to
10. The default is 0.
VM700T> get ALIL A
0
VM700T> set ALIL A 1
VM700T>
ALIM
ALIM specifies the Audio Limit File used by the VM700T. The set
command takes one argument, the name of the file, after the channel
letter. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/
Audio_Limit~Files.
VM700T> get ALIM A
System~Default
VM700T> set ALIM A ShortHaul
VM700T> get ALIM A
ShortHaul
VM700T>
ALIS
ALIS specifies the type of Lissajous display used in the Audio Monitor. The set command takes one argument after the channel letter. Legal
values are x/y or soundstage. The default is soundstage.
VM700T> get ALIS A
soundstage
VM700T> set ALIS A x/y
VM700T> get ALIS A
x/y
VM700T>
1
Similar to the Tektronix 760 meter, but with its –8 dB tick mark labeled “TEST.” The
lineup level is at the TEST (–8 dB) tick on this meter. Ballistics are the same as for
the DIN 45406 meter.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–3
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
ARIA
ARIA tells the VM700T whether or not to display an audio report in
Video Auto mode. The set command takes one argument after the
channel letter. Legal values are enabled or disabled. Disabled is the
default.
VM700T> get ARIA A
disabled
VM700T> set ARIA A enabled
disabled
VM700T> get ARIA A
enabled
VM700T>
“B” Group: Audio Limit Files
“B” keywords report on or set the measurement limits for Audio auto Mode
measurements. These keywords can only be used on a VM700T equipped with
Option 40 (Audio).
Get commands used with the “B” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channelĆletter>
Set commands used with “B” group keywords take different arguments,
depending on the keyword. The form of each Set command used with “B” group
keywords is documented in this section.
A–4
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–2: “B” keywords: Audio Limit Files
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Keyword
Description
BARF
Amplitude response frequency breaks
BHDL3
Total harmonic distortion lower limit
BARL
Amplitude response lower limit
BHDU3
Total harmonic distortion upper limit
Amplitude response upper limit
BHHF2
THD + N, TEST greater than +14 dB frequency breaks
ANSI crosstalk plus noise limits
BHHL2
THD + N, TEST greater than +14 dB lower limit
Compandor error (fall)
BHHU2
THD + N, TEST greater than +14 dB upper limit
Compandor error (rise)
BHLF2
THD + N, TEST up to +9 dB frequency breaks
Crosstalk plus noise
BHLL2
THD + N, TEST up to +9 dB lower limit
Channel separation frequency breaks
BHLU2
THD + N, TEST up to +9 dB upper limit
THD + N, TEST +10 dB to +14 dB frequency breaks
BARU
BAXT1
BCEF
BCER
BCRT3
BCSF2
BCSL2
Channel separation lower limit
BHMF2
BCSU2
Channel separation upper limit
BHML2
THD + N, TEST +10 dB to +14 dB lower limit
BCTF2
Crosstalk plus noise frequency breaks
BHMU2
THD + N, TEST +10 dB to +14 dB upper limit
BCTL2
Crosstalk plus noise lower limit
BING
Insertion gain
BCTU2
Crosstalk plus noise upper limit
BSNR
Signal to noise ratio
BGDF
Stereo gain difference frequency breaks
BSPF
Stereo phase difference frequency breaks
BGDL
Stereo gain difference lower limit
BSPL
Stereo phase difference lower limit
BGDU
Stereo gain difference upper limit
BSPU
Stereo phase difference upper limit
BHDF3
Total harmonic distortion frequency breaks
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1
Valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.04 and above only.
2
Valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.01 and above only.
3
Valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware version 1.00 only.
BARF
BARF sets the frequencies of the break points for the amplitude
response vs. frequency measurement. The set command takes eight
arguments after the channel letter, each representing the frequency (in
Hz) of a break point. Each argument must be an integer between 20 and
20000, inclusive.
VM700T>
20 50
VM700T>
VM700T>
30 60
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
get BARF A
250 251 1000 10000 10001 20000
set BARF A 30 60 300 301 1500 15000 15001 20000
get BARF A
300 301 1500 15000 15001 20000
A–5
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
BARL
BARL sets the lower amplitude limits of the break points for the
amplitude response vs. frequency measurement. The set command
takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the
lower limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between
–100 and 100, inclusive.
VM700T> get BARL A
-1.00 -1.00 -1.00 -0.30 -0.30 -0.30 -1.00 -1.00
VM700T> set BARL A -0.5 -0.5 -0.5 0 0 0 -0.5 -0.5
VM700T> get BARL A
-0.5 -0.5 -0.5 0 0 0 -0.5 -0.5
VM700T>
BARU
BARU sets the upper amplitude limits of the break points for the
amplitude response vs. frequency measurement. The set command
takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the
upper limit (in dB) of each break point. Each number must be between
–100 and 100, inclusive.
VM700T> get
0.30 0.30
VM700T> set
VM700T> get
0.50 0.50
VM700T>
BAXT
BARU A
0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30
BARU A 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
BARU A
0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
The BAXT command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.04 and above only. BAXT sets the upper and lower limits of
the ANSI crosstalk plus noise measurement. The set command takes
two arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower and
upper limit (in dB). Each number can be between 0.00 and 5.00, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get BAXT A
0.00 5.00
VM700T> set BAXT A 1.00 4.00
VM700T> get BAXT A
VM700T> 1.00 4.00
VM700T>
A–6
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
BCEF
BCEF specifies the lower and upper limits in decibels for the difference between the measured compandor response of the signal and the
expected response on a high-to-low transition. The set command takes
two arguments after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper
limits, respectively. Legal values are floating point numbers in the
range –120 to 120, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get BCEF A
--- 0.50
VM700T> set BCEF A undef
VM700T> get BCEF A
--- 0.75
VM700T>
BCER
BCER specifies the lower and upper limits in decibels for the difference between the measured compandor response of the signal and the
expected response on a low-to-high transition. The set command takes
two arguments after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper
limits, respectively. Legal values are floating point numbers in the
range –120 to 120, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get BCER A
--- 0.50
VM700T> set BCER A undef
VM700T> get BCER A
--- 0.75
VM700T>
BCRT
0.75
0.75
The BCRT command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.00 only. BCRT specifies the lower and upper limits in decibels for the crosstalk plus noise measurement. The set command takes
two arguments after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper
limits, respectively. Legal values are floating point numbers in the
range –120 to 0, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get BCRT A
--- -50.00
VM700T> set BCRT A undef
VM700T> get BCRT A
--- -75.00
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
-75.00
A–7
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
BCSF
The BCSF command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.01 and above only. BCSF sets the frequency break points of
the Channel Separation measurement. The set command takes eight
arguments after the channel letter, each representing the frequency (in
Hz) of a break point. Each argument must be an integer between 20 and
20000, inclusive.
VM700T> get BCSF A
20 100 200 400 2000 7500 12000 20000
VM700T> set BCSF A 50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000
VM700T> get BCSF A
50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000
VM700T>
BCSL
The BCSL command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.01 and above only. BCSL sets the lower limits of the Channel Separation break points. The set command takes eight arguments
after the channel letter, each representing the lower limit (in dB) of a
break point. Each number must be between –140 dB and 0.00 dB, inclusive.
VM700T> get BCSL A
-80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00
VM700T> set BCSL A -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20
VM700T> get BCSL A
-20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00
VM700T>
BCSU
The BCSU command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.01 and above only. BCSU sets the upper limits of the Channel Separation break points. The set command takes eight arguments
after the channel letter, each representing the upper limit (in dB) of a
break point. Each number must be between –140 dB and 0.00 dB, inclusive.
VM700T> get BCSU A
-80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00
VM700T> set BCSU A -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20
VM700T> get BCSU A
-20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00
VM700T>
A–8
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
BCTF
The BCTF command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.01 and above only. BCTF sets the frequency break points of
the Crosstalk plus noise measurement. The set command takes eight
arguments after the channel letter, each representing the frequency (in
Hz) of a break point. Each argument must be an integer between 20 and
20000, inclusive.
VM700T> get BCTF A
20 100 200 400 2000 7500 12000 20000
VM700T> set BCTF A 50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000
VM700T> get BCTF A
50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000
VM700T>
BCTL
The BCTL command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.01 and above only. BCTL sets the lower limits of the Crosstalk plus noise measurement break points. The set command takes
eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower
limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between –120 dB
and 0.00 dB, inclusive.
VM700T> get BCTL A
-80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00
VM700T> set BCTL A -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20
VM700T> get BCTL A
-20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00
VM700T>
BCTU
The BCTU command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.01 and above only. BCTU sets the upper limits of the Crosstalk plus noise break points. The set command takes eight arguments
after the channel letter, each representing the upper limit (in dB) of a
break point. Each number must be between –120 dB and 0.00 dB, inclusive.
VM700T> get BCTU A
-80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00 -80.00
VM700T> set BCTU A -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20
VM700T> get BCTU A
-20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00 -20.00
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–9
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
BGDF
BGDF sets the frequencies of the break points for the stereo gain
difference measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after
the channel letter, each representing the frequency (in Hz) of a break
point. Each argument must be an integer between 20 and 20000, inclusive.
VM700T>
20 50
VM700T>
VM700T>
20 50
VM700T>
BGDL
get BGDF A
250 251 1000 10000 10001 20000
set BGDF A 20 50 300 301 1500 15000 15001 20000
get BGDF A
300 301 1500 15000 15001 20000
BGDL sets the lower amplitude limits of the break points for the stereo
gain difference measurement. The set command takes eight arguments
after the channel letter, each representing the lower limit (in dB) of a
break point. Each number must be between –60 and 60, inclusive.
VM700T> get BGDL A
-1.00 -1.00 -1.00 -0.30 -0.30 -0.30 -1.00 -1.00
VM700T> set BGDL A -1 -0.5 -0.5 -0.3 -0.3 -0.3 -0.5 -1
VM700T> get BGDL A
-1.00 -0.5 -0.5 -0.30 -0.30 -0.30 -0.5 -1.00
VM700T>
BGDU
BGDU sets the upper amplitude limits of the break points for the stereo
gain difference measurement. The set command takes eight arguments
after the channel letter, each representing the upper limit (in dB) of a
break point. Each number must be between –60 and 60, inclusive.
VM700T> get
0.30 0.30
VM700T> set
VM700T> get
0.50 0.50
VM700T>
BHDF
The BHDF command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.00 only. BHDF sets the frequencies of the break points for
the harmonic distortion measurement. The set command takes eight
arguments after the channel letter, each representing the frequency (in
Hz) of a break point. Each argument must be an integer between 20 and
20000, inclusive.
VM700T>
20 50
VM700T>
VM700T>
20 50
A–10
BGDU A
0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30
BGDU A 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
BGDU A
0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
get BHDF A
200 400 1000 2000 4000 6000
set BHDF A 20 50 300 500 1200 2400 4800 9600
get BHDF A
300 500 1200 2400 4800 9600
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
BHDL
The BHDL command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.00 only. BHDL sets the lower amplitude limits of the break
points for the harmonic distortion measurement. The set command
takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the
lower limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between
–120 and 120, inclusive.
VM700T> get
0.00 0.00
VM700T> set
VM700T> get
-5.0 -5.0
VM700T>
BHDU
The BHDU command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.00 only. BHDU sets the upper amplitude limits of the break
points for the harmonic distortion measurement. The set command
takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the
upper limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between
–120 and 120, inclusive.
VM700T> get
0.30 0.30
VM700T> set
VM700T> get
0.50 0.50
VM700T>
BHHF
BHDL A
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
BHDL A -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5 -5
BHDL A
-5.0 -5.0 -5.0 -5.0 -5.0 -5.0
BHDU A
0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.50
BHDU A 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
BHDU A0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50
The BHHF command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.01 and above only. BHHF sets the frequency break points of
the THD + N, TEST greater than +14 dB measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing
the frequency (in Hz) of a break point. Each argument must be an integer between 20 and 20000, inclusive.
VM700T> get BHHF A
20 100 200 400 2000 7500 12000 20000
VM700T> set BHHF A 50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000
VM700T> get BHHF A
50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–11
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
BHHL
The BHHL command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.01 and above only. BHHL sets the lower limits of the
THD + N, TEST greater than +14 break points. The set command takes
eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower
limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between 0.00 dB
and 5.00 dB, inclusive.
VM700T> get
0.00 0.00
VM700T> set
VM700T> get
4.00 4.00
VM700T>
BHHU
The BHHU command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.01 and above only. BHHU sets the upper limits of the
THD + N, TEST greater than +14 break points. The set command takes
eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower
limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between 0.00 dB
and 5.00 dB, inclusive.
VM700T> get
0.00 0.00
VM700T> set
VM700T> get
4.00 4.00
VM700T>
BHLF
BHHL A
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
BHHL A 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
BHHL A
4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00
BHHU A
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
BHHU A 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
BHHU A
4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00
The BHLF command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.01 and above only. BHLF sets the frequency break points of
the THD + N, TEST up to +9 dB measurement. The set command
takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the frequency (in Hz) of a break point. Each argument must be an integer between 20 and 20000, inclusive.
VM700T> get BHLF A
20 100 200 400 2000 7500 12000 20000
VM700T> set BHLF A 50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000
VM700T> get BHLF A
50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000
VM700T>
A–12
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
BHLL
The BHLL command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.01 and above only. BHHL sets the lower limits of the
THD + N, TEST up to +9 break points. The set command takes eight
arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower limit (in
dB) of a break point. Each number must be between 0.00 dB and 5.00
dB, inclusive.
VM700T> get
0.00 0.00
VM700T> set
VM700T> get
4.00 4.00
VM700T>
BHLU
The BHLU command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.01 and above only. BHLU sets the upper limits of the
THD + N, TEST up to +9 dB break points. The set command takes
eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower
limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between 0.00 dB
and 5.00 dB, inclusive.
VM700T> get
0.00 0.00
VM700T> set
VM700T> get
4.00 4.00
VM700T>
BHMF
BHLL A
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
BHLL A 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
BHLL A
4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00
BHLU A
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
BHLU A 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
BHLU A
4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00
The BHMF command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.01 and above only. BHMF sets the frequency break points of
the THD + N, TEST +10 dB to +14dB measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing
the frequency (in Hz) of a break point. Each argument must be an integer between 20 and 20000, inclusive.
VM700T> get BHMF A
20 100 200 400 2000 7500 12000 20000
VM700T> set BHMF A 50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000
VM700T> get BHMF A
50 500 700 1000 5000 8000 15000 20000
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–13
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
BHML
The BHML command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.01 and above only. BHML sets the lower limits of the
THD + N, TEST +10 dB to +14 dB break points. The set command
takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the
lower limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between
0.00 dB and 5.00 dB, inclusive.
VM700T> get
0.00 0.00
VM700T> set
VM700T> get
4.00 4.00
VM700T>
BHMU
The BHMU command is valid for Option 40 and Option 41 firmware
version 1.01 and above only. BHMU sets the upper limits of the
THD + N, TEST +10 dB to +14 dB break points. The set command
takes eight arguments after the channel letter, each representing the
lower limit (in dB) of a break point. Each number must be between
0.00 dB and 5.00 dB, inclusive.
VM700T> get
0.00 0.00
VM700T> set
VM700T> get
4.00 4.00
VM700T>
BING
BHML A
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
BHML A 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
BHML A
4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00
BHMU A
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
BHMU A 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
BHMU A
4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.00
BING specifies the lower and upper limits in decibels for the difference
between the actual and the expected audio signal level. Legal values
are floating point numbers in the range
–120 to 120, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get BING A
-0.50 0.50
VM700T> get BING A -0.75 0.75
VM700T> get BING A
-0.75 0.75
VM700T>
A–14
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
BSNR
BSNR specifies the lower and upper limits in decibels for both the
weighted and unweighted signal-to-noise ratios. Legal values are
floating point numbers in the range –120 to 120, inclusive, or “undef”,
which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get BSNR A
70.00 --VM700T> set BSNR A 75.00 undef
VM700T> get BSNR A
75.00 --VM700T>
BSPF
BSPF sets the frequencies of the break points for the stereo phase measurement. The set command takes eight arguments after the channel
letter, each representing the frequency (in Hz) of a break point. Each
argument must be an integer between 20 and 20000, inclusive.
VM700T>
20 50
VM700T>
VM700T>
20 50
VM700T>
BSPL
get BSPF A
200 400 1000 2000 4000 6000
set BSPF A 20 50 300 500 1200 2400 4800 9600
get BSPF A
300 500 1200 2400 4800 9600
BSPL sets the amplitudes of the lower limits at the break points for the
stereo phase difference measurement. The set command takes eight
arguments after the channel letter, each representing the lower limit (in
dB) at a break point. Each number must be between –180 and 180,
inclusive.
VM700T> get
0.00 0.00
VM700T> set
VM700T> get
1.00 1.00
VM700T>
BSPU
BSPL A
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
BSPL A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
BSPL A
1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
0.00
0.00
1.00
1.00
BSPU sets the amplitudes of the upper limits at the break points for the
stereo phase difference measurement. The set command takes eight
arguments after the channel letter, each representing the upper limit (in
dB) at a break point. Each number must be between –180 and 180,
inclusive.
VM700T> get
6.00 6.00
VM700T> set
VM700T> get
6.00 6.00
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
BSPU A
3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 6.00
BSPU A 6 6 4.5 3 3 4.5 6 6
BSPU A
4.50 3.00 3.00 4.50 6.00
6.00
6.00
A–15
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“C” Group: Configuration File
“C” keywords report on or set the values of Configuration File parameters. These
keywords can only be used on VM700T’s equipped with Option 11 (PAL
standard).
Get commands used with the “C” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channelĆletter>
Set commands used with the “C” keywords have the following form:
set <keyword> <channelĆletter> <argument>
where <argument> is the text to which the setting associated with the keyword is
to be set.
Table A–3: “C” keywords: Configuration File (PAL)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Keyword
Description
CHAF
Auto Limits File
CHSN
Source Name
CHMF
Measure Limits File
CHSS
Sync Source
CHML
Measurements Location File
COCP
Component option config file for PAL
CHPT
Printout Title
COER
Echo & Rounding option config file for PAL
CHSM
Selected Measurements File
COTT
Teletext option config file for PAL
CHAF
CHAF specifies the Auto Limits File for PAL operation. This file is
found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Auto_Limit~Files/PAL.
VM700T> get CHAF A
System~Default
VM700T> set CHAF A My_Auto_Limits
VM700T> get CHAF A
My_Auto_Limits
VM700T>
CHMF
CHMF specifies the Measure Limits File for PAL operation. This file
is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Measure_Limit~Files/PAL.
VM700T> get CHMF A
System~Default
VM700T> set CHMF A My_Meas_Limits
VM700T> get CHMF A
My_Meas_Limits
VM700T>
A–16
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
CHML
CHML specifies the Measurements Location File for PAL operation.
This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Measurement~Locations/PAL.
VM700T> get CHML A
System~Default
VM700T> set CHML A My_Meas_Locs
VM700T> get CHML A
My_Meas_Locs
VM700T>
CHPT
CHPT specifies the title that appears on printouts generated by the
VM700T. It consists of an arbitrary string up to 50 characters in length.
“#” is a comment character; all characters appearing in the string after a
“#” are ignored. To include a “#” in the string, precede it by a “\” character.
VM700T>
VM700T>
VM700T>
VM700T>
Yahoo!
VM700T>
CHSM
get CHPT A
Video Measurement Set
set CHPT A Yahoo!
get CHPT A
CHSM specifies the Selected Measurements File for Auto Mode PALstandard operation. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/
Selected~Measurements/PAL.
VM700T> get CHSM A
System~Default
VM700T> set CHSM A My_Sel_Meas
VM700T> get CHSM A
My_Sel_Meas
VM700T>
CHSN
CHSN specifies the source name for PAL-standard operation. This
name is printed across the top of printouts generated by Auto mode or
by pressing the Copy button. It consists of an arbitrary string up to 32
characters in length. “#” is a comment character; all characters
appearing in the string after a “#” are ignored. To include a “#” in the
string, precede it by a “\” character.
VM700T> get CHSN A
System Default
VM700T> set CHSN A Our_Transmitter
VM700T> get CHSN A
Our_Transmitter
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–17
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
CHSS
CHSS specifies the synchronization source for PAL-standard operation.
This value can be set to one of the following strings (case-sensitive):
Channel A, Channel B, Channel C, External, or Locked to Source.
VM700T> get CHSS A
Locked to Source
VM700T> set CHSS A Channel A
VM700T> get CHSS A
Locked to Source
VM700T>
COCP
COCP specifies the configuration file for the Component option in
PAL-standard operation. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Component/PAL. This keyword is only valid for PAL-standard
VM700T’s with Option 30 (Component) installed.
VM700T> get COCP A
System Default
VM700T> set COCP A My_Comp_File
VM700T> get COCP A
My_Comp_File
VM700T>
COER
COER specifies the configuration file for the Echo & Rounding option
in PAL-standard operation. This file is found in directory /
nvram0/ConfigFiles/Echo_Rounding/PAL. This keyword is only valid
for PAL-standard VM700T’s with Option 1G (Echo/Rounding)
installed.
VM700T> get COER A
System Default
VM700T> set COER A My_ER_File
VM700T> get COER A
My_ER_File
VM700T>
COTT
COTT specifies the configuration file for the Teletext option in PALstandard operation. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/
Teletext/PAL. This keyword is only valid for PAL-standard VM700T’s
with Option 20 (Teletext) installed.
VM700T> get COTT A
System Default
VM700T> set COTT A My_TT_File
VM700T> get COTT A
My_TT_File
VM700T>
A–18
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“D” Group: Configuration File
“D” keywords report on or set the values of Configuration File parameters.
These keywords can only be used on VM700T’s equipped with Option 01
(NTSC standard).
Get commands used with the “D” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channelĆletter>
Set commands used with the “D” keywords have the following form:
set <keyword> <channelĆletter> <argument>
where <argument> is the text to which the setting associated with the keyword is
to be set.
Table A–4: “D” keywords: Configuration File (NTSC)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Keyword
Description
DHAF
Auto Limits File
DHSN
Source Name
DHMF
Measure Limits File
DHSS
Sync Source
DHML
Measurements Location File
DOCP
Component option config file for NTSC
DHPT
Printout Title
DOER
Echo & Rounding option config file for NTSC
DHSM
Selected Measurements File
DOTT
Teletext option config file for NTSC
DHAF
DHAF specifies the Auto Limits File for NTSC operation. This file is
found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Auto_Limit~Files/NTSC.
VM700T> get DHAF A
System~Default
VM700T> set DHAF A My_Auto_Limits
VM700T> get DHAF A
My_Auto_Limits
VM700T>
DHMF
DHMF specifies the Measure Limits File for NTSC operation. This file
is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Measure_Limit~Files/
NTSC.
VM700T> get DHMF A
System~Default
VM700T> set DHMF A My_Meas_Limits
VM700T> get DHMF A
My_Meas_Limits
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–19
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
DHML
DHML specifies the Measurements Location File for NTSC operation.
This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Measurement~Locations/NTSC.
VM700T> get DHML A
System~Default
VM700T> set DHML A My_Meas_Locs
VM700T> get DHML A
My_Meas_Locs
VM700T>
DHPT
DHPT specifies the title that appears on printouts generated by the
VM700T. It consists of an arbitrary string up to 50 characters in length.
“#” is a comment character; all characters appearing in the string after a
“#” are ignored. To include a “#” in the string, precede it by a “\” character.
VM700T>
VM700T>
VM700T>
VM700T>
Yahoo!
VM700T>
DHSM
get DHPT A
Video Measurement Set
set DHPT A Yahoo!
get DHPT A
DHSM specifies the Selected Measurements File for Auto Mode
NTSC-standard operation. This file is found in directory /
nvram0/ConfigFiles/Selected~Measurements/NTSC.
VM700T> get DHSM A
System~Default
VM700T> set DHSM A My_Sel_Meas
VM700T> get DHSM A
My_Sel_Meas
VM700T>
DHSN
DHSN specifies the source name for NTSC-standard operation. This
name is printed across the top of printouts generated by Auto mode or
by pressing the Copy button. It consists of an arbitrary string up to 32
characters in length. “#” is a comment character; all characters
appearing in the string after a “#” are ignored. To include a “#” in the
string, precede it by a “\” character.
VM700T> get DHSN A
System Default
VM700T> set DHSN A Our_Transmitter
VM700T> get DHSN A
Our_Transmitter
VM700T>
A–20
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
DHSS
DHSS specifies the synchronization source for NTSC-standard operation. This value can be set to one of the following strings (case-sensitive): Channel A, Channel B, Channel C, External, or Locked to
Source.
VM700T> get DHSS A
Locked to Source
VM700T> set DHSS A Channel A
VM700T> get DHSS A
Locked to Source
VM700T>
DOCP
DOCP specifies the configuration file for the Component option in
NTSC-standard operation. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Component/NTSC. This keyword is only valid for NTSC-standard VM700T’s with Option 30 (Component) installed.
VM700T> get DOCP A
System Default
VM700T> set DOCP A My_Comp_File
VM700T> get DOCP A
My_Comp_File
VM700T>
DOER
DOER specifies the configuration file for the Echo & Rounding option
in NTSC-standard operation. This file is found in directory /
nvram0/ConfigFiles/Echo_Rounding/NTSC. This keyword is only
valid for NTSC-standard VM700T’s with Option 1G (Echo/Rounding)
installed.
VM700T> get DOER A
System Default
VM700T> set DOER A My_ER_File
VM700T> get DOER A
My_ER_File
VM700T>
DOTT
DOTT specifies the configuration file for the Teletext option in NTSCstandard operation. This file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/
Teletext/NTSC. This keyword is only valid for NTSC-standard
VM700T’s with Option 20 (Teletext) installed.
VM700T> get DOTT A
System Default
VM700T> set DOTT A My_TT_File
VM700T> get DOTT A
My_TT_File
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–21
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“E” Group: Component Configuration (NTSC)
“E” keywords report on or set the values of Component Option Configuration
parameters. These keywords can only be used on an NTSC-standard VM700T
equipped with Option 30 (Component).
Get commands used with the “E” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channelĆletter>
Set commands used with “E” group keywords take different arguments,
depending on the keyword. The form of each Set command used with “E” group
keywords is documented in the pages that follow.
Table A–5: “E” keywords: Component Configuration (NTSC)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Keyword
Description
EBC1
Pb CB color #1 (mV)
ELCP
Lightning color pk-pk ampl error (%)
EBC2
Pb CB color #2 (mV)
ELPW
Lightning pk-white ampl error (%)
EBC3
Pb CB color #3 (mV)
EMKL
Marker field and line
EBC4
Pb CB color #4 (mV)
EPRI
Probe Input
EBC5
Pb CB color #5 (mV)
ERC1
Pr CB color #1 (mV)
EBC6
Pb CB color #6 (mV)
ERC2
Pr CB color #2 (mV)
EBC7
Pb CB color #7 (mV)
ERC3
Pr CB color #3 (mV)
EBC8
Pb CB color #8 (mV)
ERC4
Pr CB color #4 (mV)
EBHA
Pb K-Factor Pulse HAD
ERC5
Pr CB color #5 (mV)
EBKB
Pb K-PB Factor (%)
ERC6
Pr CB color #6 (mV)
EBKF
Pb K Factor (%)
ERC7
Pr CB color #7 (mV)
EBM1
Pb MB Packet #1 (dB)
ERC8
Pr CB color #8 (mV)
EBM2
Pb MB Packet #2 (dB)
ERCI
Stored Reference Channel Independent
EBM3
Pb MB Packet #3 (dB)
ERHA
Pr K-Factor Pulse HAD
EBM4
Pb MB Packet #4 (dB)
ERKB
Pr K-PB Factor (%)
EBM5
Pb MB Packet #5 (dB)
ERKF
Pr K Factor (%)
EBM6
Pb MB Packet #6 (dB)
ERM1
Pr MB Packet #1 (dB)
EBM7
Pb MB Packet #7 (dB)
ERM2
Pr MB Packet #2 (dB)
EBM8
Pb MB Packet #8 (dB)
ERM3
Pr MB Packet #3 (dB)
EBM9
Pb MB Packet #9 (dB)
ERM4
Pr MB Packet #4 (dB)
EBMB
Pb Multiburst Packets
ERM5
Pr MB Packet #5 (dB)
EBMF
Pb Multiburst flag (mV)
ERM6
Pr MB Packet #6 (dB)
EBNL
Pb Non-Linearity (%)
ERM7
Pr MB Packet #7 (dB)
EBNO
Pb Noise Level (dB rms)
ERM8
Pr MB Packet #8 (dB)
A–22
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–5: “E” keywords: Component Configuration (NTSC) (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Keyword
Description
EBPP
Pb P-P Amplitude (mV) (3 values)
ERM9
Pr MB Packet #9 (dB)
EBRD
Pb to Pr Delay (nsec) (3 values)
ERMB
Pr Multiburst Packets
EBWL
Bowtie field and line
ERMF
Pr Multiburst flag (mV)
EBWT
Bowtie interchannel delay (ns)
ERNL
Pr Non-Linearity (%)
EBYD
Pb to Y Delay (nsec) (3 values)
ERNO
Pr Noise Level (dB rms)
ECSD
Colorbar standard
ERPP
Pr P-P Amplitude (mV) (3 values)
ERYD
Pr to Y Delay (nsec) (3 values)
EYM2
Y MB Packet #2 (dB)
ETNM
T (nsec)
EYM3
Y MB Packet #3 (dB)
EYC1
Y CB color #1 (mV)
EYM4
Y MB Packet #4 (dB)
EYC2
Y CB color #2 (mV)
EYM5
Y MB Packet #5 (dB)
EYC3
Y CB color #3 (mV)
EYM6
Y MB Packet #6 (dB)
EYC4
Y CB color #4 (mV)
EYM7
Y MB Packet #7 (dB)
EYC5
Y CB color #5 (mV)
EYM8
Y MB Packet #8 (dB)
EYC6
Y CB color #6 (mV)
EYM9
Y MB Packet #9 (dB)
EYC7
Y CB color #7 (mV)
EYMB
Y Multiburst Packets
EYC8
Y CB color #8 (mV)
EYMF
Y Multiburst flag (mV)
EYHA
Y K-Factor Pulse HAD
EYNL
Y Non-Linearity (%)
EYKB
Y K-PB Factor (%)
EYNO
Y Noise Level (dB rms)
EYKF
Y K Factor (%)
EYPA
Y Peak Amplitude (mV) (3 values)
EYM1
Y MB Packet #1 (dB)
EYSA
Y Sync Amplitude (mV) (3 values)
EBC1 –
EBC8
Keywords EBC1 through EBC8 return or set the lower and upper
alarm limits for Pb CB colors in the Component ColorBar application.
The settings are in milliVolts. Legal values are floating point numbers
from –500 to 500, inclusive. The color ordering is as follows: 1, gray;
2, yellow; 3, cyan; 4, green; 5, magenta; 6, red; 7, blue; 8, black.
VM700T> get EBC1 A
-50.00 50.00
VM700T>
EBHA
EBHA returns or sets the half-amplitude duration for the Pb(B) K-Factor pulse, in T units. Legal values are integers from 2 to 8, inclusive.
VM700T> get EBHA A
7
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–23
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
EBKB
EBKB returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Pb K-PB
factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from –50 to 50, inclusive.
VM700T> get EBKB A
-5.00 1.00
VM700T>
EBKF
EBKF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Pb Kfactor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get EBKF A
0.00 5.00
VM700T>
EBM1 – Keywords EBM1 through EBM9 return or set the lower and upper
EBM9
alarm limits, in dB, for Pb(B) packets 1 through 9 in the Component
Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from
–40 to 40, inclusive.
VM700T> get EBM1 A
-1.00 1.00
VM700T>
EBMB
EBMB returns or sets the number of Pb (B) multiburst packets. Legal
values are integers from 3 to 9, inclusive.
VM700T> get EBMB A
5
VM700T>
EBMF
EBMF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits, in mV, for the
Pb (B) multiburst flag in the Component Multiburst application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get EBMF A
300.00 700.00
VM700T>
EBNL
EBNL returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for Pb (B) nonlinearity in the Component NonLinearity application. Legal values are
floating-point numbers from 0 to 50, inclusive.
VM700T> get EBNL A
0.00 5.00
VM700T>
A–24
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
EBNO
EBNO returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the rms Pb
(B) noise level, in dB, in the Component Noise application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from –100 to 0, inclusive.
VM700T> get EBNO A
--- -45.00
VM700T>
EBPP
EBPP returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow
setting for the Pb (B) Peak-to-Peak Amplitude, in mV, in the Component LevelMeter application. Legal values are floating point numbers
from 500 to 2000, inclusive.
VM700T> get EBPP A
665.00 735.00 700.00
VM700T>
EBRD
EBRD returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow
setting for the Pb (B) to Pr (R) Delay, in nsec, in the Component
Channel Delay application. Legal values are floating point values from
–400 to 400, inclusive.
VM700T> get EBRD A
-10.00 10.00 0.00
VM700T>
EBWL
EBWL specifies the field and line used for Bowtie measurements. The
set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing
the field number and line number, respectively.
VM700T> get EBWL A
1 45
VM700T> set EBWL A 1 50
VM700T> get EBWL A
1 50
VM700T>
EBWT
EBWT specifies the lower and upper alarm limits of interchannel delay
(in ns) for Bowtie measurements. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper limit,
respectively. Legal values are numbers from –100 to +100, inclusive,
or “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get EBWT A
-10.00 10.00
VM700T> set EBWT A -5 5
VM700T> get EBWT A
-5.00 5.00
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–25
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
EBYD
EBYD returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow
setting for the Pb (B) to Y (G) Delay, in nsec, in the Component
Channel Delay application. Legal values are floating point values from
–400 to 400, inclusive.
VM700T> get EBYD A
-50.00 50.00 0.00
VM700T>
ECSD
ECSD returns or sets the ColorBar standard used for the Component
ColorBar application. Legal values are: GBR 700, GBR 700 Setup,
GBR 714, GBR 714 Setup, YPbPr SMPTE/EBU, YPbPr 714 Betacam
Setup, YPbPr 714 Betacam, and YPbPr 700 MII Setup.
VM700T> get ECSD A
YPbPr SMPTE/EBU
VM700T>
ELCP
ELCP specifies the lower and upper alarm limits of color peak-to-peak
amplitude error, in percent. The set command takes two arguments
after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper limit, respectively. Legal values are numbers from –10 to +10, inclusive, or
“undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get ELCP A
-2.00 2.00
VM700T> set ELCP A -5 5
VM700T> get ELCP A
-5.00 5.00
VM700T>
ELPW
ELPW specifies the lower and upper alarm limits of peak-to-white
amplitude error, in percent. The set command takes two arguments
after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper limit, respectively. Legal values are numbers from –10 to +10, inclusive, or
“undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get ELPW A
-2.00 2.00
VM700T> set ELPW A -5 5
VM700T> get ELPW A
-5.00 5.00
VM700T>
A–26
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
EMKL
EMKL specifies the field and line location of the marker used in
Bowtie measurements. The set command takes two arguments after the
channel letter, representing the field number and line number, respectively.
VM700T> get EMKL A
1 164
VM700T> get EMKL A 1 140
VM700T> get EMKL A
1 140
VM700T>
EPRI
EPRI tells the VM700T whether or not to use special calibration
factors for a probe input. Legal values are “yes” and “no”. “Yes” tells
the VM700T to use the special calibration factors; “no” uses the standard factors.
NOTE. The EPRI setting applies to all measure-mode applications, not just the
component applications.
VM700T> get EPRI A
no
VM700T>
ERC1 –
ERC8
Keywords ERC1 through ERC8 return or set the lower and upper
alarm limits for Pr CB colors in the Component ColorBar application.
The settings are in milliVolts. Legal values are floating point numbers
from –500 to 500, inclusive. The color ordering is as follows: 1, gray;
2, yellow; 3, cyan; 4, green; 5, magenta; 6, red; 7, blue; 8, black.
VM700T> get ERC1 A
-50.00 50.00
VM700T>
ERCI
ERCI tells the VM700T whether or not stored reference values are
shared by all channels for each standard, or are stored independently
from channel to channel. Legal values are “yes” and “no”. “Yes” means
reference values are stored independently of each other; “no” means
reference values are shared by all channels for each standard.
NOTE. The ERCI setting applies to all measure-mode applications, not just the
component applications.
VM700T> get ERCI A
no
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–27
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
ERHA
ERHA returns or sets the half-amplitude duration for the Pr(R) K-Factor pulse, in T units. Legal values are integers from 2 to 8, inclusive.
VM700T> get ERHA A
7
VM700T>
ERKB
ERKB returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Pr K-PB
factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from –50 to 50, inclusive.
VM700T> get ERKB A
-5.00 1.00
VM700T>
ERKF
ERKF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Pr K-factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get ERKF A
0.00 5.00
VM700T>
ERM1 – Keywords ERM1 through ERM9 return or set the lower and upper
ERM9
alarm limits, in dB, for Pr (R) packets 1 through 9 in the Component
Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from
–40 to 40, inclusive.
VM700T> get ERM1 A
-1.00 1.00
VM700T>
ERMB
ERMB returns or sets the number of Pr (R) multiburst packets. Legal
values are integers from 3 to 9, inclusive.
VM700T> get ERMB A
5
VM700T>
ERMF
ERMF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits, in mV, for the
Pr (R) multiburst flag in the Component Multiburst application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get ERMF A
300.00 700.00
VM700T>
A–28
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
ERNL
ERNL returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for Pr (R) nonlinearity in the Component NonLinearity application. Legal values are
floating-point numbers from 0 to 50, inclusive.
VM700T> get ERNL A
0.00 5.00
VM700T>
ERNO
ERNO returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the rms Pr
(R) noise level, in dB, in the Component Noise application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from –100 to 0, inclusive.
VM700T> get ERNO A
--- -45.00
VM700T>
ERPP
ERPP returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow
setting for the Pr (R) Peak-to-Peak Amplitude, in mV, in the Component LevelMeter application. Legal values are floating point numbers
from 500 to 2000, inclusive.
VM700T> get ERPP A
665.00 735.00 700.00
VM700T>
ERYD
ERYD returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow
setting for the Pr (R) to Y (G) Delay, in nsec, in the Component
Channel Delay application. Legal values are floating point values from
–400 to 400, inclusive.
VM700T> get ERYD A
-50.00 50.00 0.00
VM700T>
ETNM
ETNM returns or sets the T duration, in nsec. Legal values are integers
from 50 to 150, inclusive.
VM700T> get ETNM A
125
VM700T>
EYC1 –
EYC8
Keywords EYC1 through EYC8 return or set the lower and upper
alarm limits for Y CB colors in the Component ColorBar application.
The settings are in milliVolts. Legal values are floating point numbers
from –500 to 500, inclusive. The color ordering is as follows: 1, gray;
2, yellow; 3, cyan; 4, green; 5, magenta; 6, red; 7, blue; 8, black.
VM700T> get EYC1 A
-50.00 50.00
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–29
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
EYHA
EYHA returns or sets the half-amplitude duration for the Y(G) K-Factor pulse, in T units. Legal values are integers from 2 to 8, inclusive.
VM700T> get EYHA A
2
VM700T>
EYKB
EYKB returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Y K-PB
factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from –50 to 50, inclusive.
VM700T> get EYKB A
-5.00 1.00
VM700T>
EYKF
EYKF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Y K-factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get EYKF A
0.00 5.00
VM700T>
EYM1 –
EYM9
Keywords EYM1 through EYM9 return or set the lower and upper
alarm limits, in dB, for Y (G) packets 1 through 9 in the Component
Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from
–40 to 40, inclusive.
VM700T> get EYM1 A
-1.00 1.00
VM700T>
EYMB
EYMB returns or sets the number of Y (G) multiburst packets. Legal
values are integers from 3 to 9, inclusive.
VM700T> get EYMB A
6
VM700T>
EYMF
EYMF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits, in mV, for the
Y (G) multiburst flag in the Component Multiburst application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get EYMF A
300.00 700.00
VM700T>
A–30
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
EYNL
EYNL returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for Y (G) nonlinearity in the Component NonLinearity application. Legal values are
floating-point numbers from 0 to 50, inclusive.
VM700T> get EYNL A
0.00 5.00
VM700T>
EYNO
EYNO returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the rms Y
(G) noise level, in dB, in the Component Noise application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from –100 to 0, inclusive.
VM700T> get EYNO A
--- -45.00
VM700T>
EYPA
EYPA returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow
setting for the Y (G) Peak Amplitude, in mV, in the Component LevelMeter application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 500 to
2000, inclusive.
VM700T> get EYPA A
678.60 750.00 714.30
VM700T>
EYSA
EYSA returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow
setting for the Y (G) Sync Amplitude, in mV, in the Component LevelMeter application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 500 to
2000, inclusive.
VM700T> get EYSA A
271.40 300.00 285.70
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–31
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“F” Group: Component Configuration (PAL)
“F” keywords report on or set the values of Component Option Configuration
parameters. These keywords can only be used on a PAL-standard VM700T
equipped with Option 30 (Component).
Get commands used with the “F” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channelĆletter>
Set commands used with “F” group keywords take different arguments,
depending on the keyword. The form of each Set command used with “F” group
keywords is documented in the pages that follow.
Table A–6: “F” keywords: Component Configuration (PAL)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Keyword
Description
FBC1
Pb CB color #1 (mV)
FLCP
Lightning color pk-pk ampl error (%)
FBC2
Pb CB color #2 (mV)
FLPW
Lightning pk-white ampl error (%)
FBC3
Pb CB color #3 (mV)
FMKL
Marker line
FBC4
Pb CB color #4 (mV)
FPRI
Probe Input
FBC5
Pb CB color #5 (mV)
FRC1
Pr CB color #1 (mV)
FBC6
Pb CB color #6 (mV)
FRC2
Pr CB color #2 (mV)
FBC7
Pb CB color #7 (mV)
FRC3
Pr CB color #3 (mV)
FBC8
Pb CB color #8 (mV)
FRC4
Pr CB color #4 (mV)
FBHA
Pb K-Factor Pulse HAD
FRC5
Pr CB color #5 (mV)
FBKB
Pb K-PB Factor (%)
FRC6
Pr CB color #6 (mV)
FBKF
Pb K Factor (%)
FRC7
Pr CB color #7 (mV)
FBM1
Pb MB Packet #1 (dB)
FRC8
Pr CB color #8 (mV)
FBM2
Pb MB Packet #2 (dB)
FRCI
Stored Reference Channel Independent
FBM3
Pb MB Packet #3 (dB)
FRHA
Pr K-Factor Pulse HAD
FBM4
Pb MB Packet #4 (dB)
FRKB
Pr K-PB Factor (%)
FBM5
Pb MB Packet #5 (dB)
FRKF
Pr K Factor (%)
FBM6
Pb MB Packet #6 (dB)
FRM1
Pr MB Packet #1 (dB)
FBM7
Pb MB Packet #7 (dB)
FRM2
Pr MB Packet #2 (dB)
FBM8
Pb MB Packet #8 (dB)
FRM3
Pr MB Packet #3 (dB)
FBM9
Pb MB Packet #9 (dB)
FRM4
Pr MB Packet #4 (dB)
FBMB
Pb Multiburst Packets
FRM5
Pr MB Packet #5 (dB)
FBMF
Pb Multiburst Flag (mV)
FRM6
Pr MB Packet #6 (dB)
FBNL
Pb Non-Linearity (%)
FRM7
Pr MB Packet #7 (dB)
FBNO
Pb Noise Level (dB rms)
FRM8
Pr MB Packet #8 (dB)
A–32
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–6: “F” keywords: Component Configuration (PAL) (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Keyword
Description
FBPP
Pb P-P Amplitude (mV) (3 values)
FRM9
Pr MB Packet #9 (dB)
FBRD
Pb to Pr Delay (nsec) (3 values)
FRMB
Pr Multiburst Packets
FBWL
Bowtie line
FRMF
Pr Multiburst Flag (mV)
FBWT
Bowtie interchannel delay (ns)
FRNL
Pr Non-Linearity (%)
FBYD
Pb to Y Delay (nsec) (3 values)
FRNO
Pr Noise Level (dB rms)
FCSD
Colourbar standard
FRPP
Pr P-P Amplitude (mV) (3 values)
FRYD
Pr to Y Delay (nsec) (3 values)
FYM2
Y MB Packet #2 (dB)
FTNM
T (nsec)
FYM3
Y MB Packet #3 (dB)
FYC1
Y CB color #1 (mV)
FYM4
Y MB Packet #4 (dB)
FYC2
Y CB color #2 (mV)
FYM5
Y MB Packet #5 (dB)
FYC3
Y CB color #3 (mV)
FYM6
Y MB Packet #6 (dB)
FYC4
Y CB color #4 (mV)
FYM7
Y MB Packet #7 (dB)
FYC5
Y CB color #5 (mV)
FYM8
Y MB Packet #8 (dB)
FYC6
Y CB color #6 (mV)
FYM9
Y MB Packet #9 (dB)
FYC7
Y CB color #7 (mV)
FYMB
Y Multiburst Packets
FYC8
Y CB color #8 (mV)
FYMF
Y Multiburst Flag (mV)
FYHA
Y K-Factor Pulse HAD
FYNL
Y Non-Linearity (%)
FYKB
Y K-PB Factor (%)
FYNO
Y Noise Level (dB rms)
FYKF
Y K Factor (%)
FYPA
Y Peak Amplitude (mV) (3 values)
FYM1
Y MB Packet #1 (dB)
FYSA
Y Sync Amplitude (mV) (3 values)
FBC1 –
FBC8
Keywords FBC1 through FBC8 return or set the lower and upper alarm
limits for Pb CB colors in the Component ColorBar application. The
settings are in milliVolts. Legal values are floating point numbers from
–500 to 500, inclusive. The color ordering is as follows: 1, gray; 2,
yellow; 3, cyan; 4, green; 5, magenta; 6, red; 7, blue; 8, black.
VM700T> get FBC1 A
-50.00 50.00
VM700T>
FBHA
FBHA returns or sets the half-amplitude duration for the Pb(B) K-Factor pulse, in T units. Legal values are integers from 2 to 8, inclusive.
VM700T> get FBHA A
7
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–33
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
FBKB
FBKB returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Pb K-PB
factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from –50 to 50, inclusive.
VM700T> get FBKB A
-5.00 1.00
VM700T>
FBKF
FBKF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Pb Kfactor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get FBKF A
0.00 5.00
VM700T>
FBM1 –
FBM9
Keywords FBM1 through FBM9 return or set the lower and upper
alarm limits, in dB, for Pb(B) packets 1 through 9 in the Component
Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from
–40 to 40, inclusive.
VM700T> get FBM1 A
-1.00 1.00
VM700T>
FBMB
FBMB returns or sets the number of Pb (B) multiburst packets. Legal
values are integers from 3 to 9, inclusive.
VM700T> get FBMB A
5
VM700T>
FBMF
FBMF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits, in mV, for the
Pb (B) multiburst flag in the Component Multiburst application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get FBMF A
300.00 700.00
VM700T>
FBNL
FBNL returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for Pb (B) nonlinearity in the Component NonLinearity application. Legal values are
floating-point numbers from 0 to 50, inclusive.
VM700T> get FBNL A
0.00 5.00
VM700T>
A–34
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
FBNO
FBNO returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the rms Pb
(B) noise level, in dB, in the Component Noise application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from –100 to 0, inclusive.
VM700T> get FBNO A
--- -45.00
VM700T>
FBPP
FBPP returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow
setting for the Pb (B) Peak-to-Peak Amplitude, in mV, in the Component LevelMeter application. Legal values are floating point numbers
from 500 to 2000, inclusive.
VM700T> get FBPP A
665.00 735.00 700.00
VM700T>
FBRD
FBRD returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow
setting for the Pb (B) to Pr (R) Delay, in nsec, in the Component
Channel Delay application. Legal values are floating point values from
–400 to 400, inclusive.
VM700T> get FBRD A
-10.00 10.00 0.00
VM700T>
FBWL
FBWL specifies the line used for Bowtie measurements. The set
command takes one argument after the channel letter, representing the
line number.
VM700T> get FBWL A
45
VM700T> set FBWL A 50
VM700T> get FBWL A
50
VM700T>
FBWT
FBWT specifies the lower and upper alarm limits of interchannel delay
(in ns) for Bowtie measurements. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper limit,
respectively. Legal values are numbers from –100 to +100, inclusive,
or “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get FBWT A
-10.00 10.00
VM700T> set FBWT A -5 5
VM700T> get FBWT A
-5.00 5.00
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–35
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
FBYD
FBYD returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow
setting for the Pb (B) to Y (G) Delay, in nsec, in the Component
Channel Delay application. Legal values are floating point values from
–400 to 400, inclusive.
VM700T> get FBYD A
-50.00 50.00 0.00
VM700T>
FCSD
FCSD returns or sets the ColorBar standard used for the Component
ColorBar application. Legal values are: GBR 700, GBR 700 Setup,
GBR 714, GBR 714 Setup, YPbPr SMPTE/EBU, YPbPr 714 Betacam
Setup, YPbPr 714 Betacam, and YPbPr 700 MII Setup.
VM700T> get FCSD A
YPbPr SMPTE/EBU
VM700T>
FLCP
FLCP specifies the lower and upper alarm limits of color peak-to-peak
amplitude error, in percent. The set command takes two arguments
after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper limit, respectively. Legal values are numbers from –10 to +10, inclusive, or
“undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get FLCP A
-2.00 2.00
VM700T> set FLCP A -5 5
VM700T> get FLCP A
-5.00 5.00
VM700T>
FLPW
FLPW specifies the lower and upper alarm limits of peak-to-white
amplitude error, in percent. The set command takes two arguments
after the channel letter, representing the lower and upper limit, respectively. Legal values are numbers from –10 to +10, inclusive, or
“undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get FLPW A
-2.00 2.00
VM700T> set FLPW A -5 5
VM700T> get FLPW A
-5.00 5.00
VM700T>
A–36
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
FMKL
FMKL specifies the line location of the marker used in Bowtie measurements. The set command takes one argument after the channel
letter, representing the line number.
VM700T> get FMKL A
164
VM700T> get FMKL A 140
VM700T> get FMKL A
140
VM700T>
FPRI
FPRI tells the VM700T whether or not to use special calibration
factors for a probe input. Legal values are “yes” and “no”. “Yes” tells
the VM700T to use the special calibration factors; “no” uses the standard factors.
NOTE. The FPRI setting applies to all measure-mode applications, not just the
component applications.
VM700T> get FPRI A
no
VM700T>
FRC1 –
FRC8
Keywords FRC1 through FRC8 return or set the lower and upper alarm
limits for Pr CB colors in the Component ColorBar application. The
settings are in milliVolts. Legal values are floating point numbers from
–500 to 500, inclusive. The color ordering is as follows: 1, gray; 2,
yellow; 3, cyan; 4, green; 5, magenta; 6, red; 7, blue; 8, black.
VM700T> get FRC1 A
-50.00 50.00
VM700T>
FRCI
FRCI tells the VM700T whether or not stored reference values are
shared by all channels for each standard, or are stored independently
from channel to channel. Legal values are “yes” and “no”. “Yes” means
reference values are stored independently of each other; “no” means
reference values are shared by all channels for each standard.
NOTE. The FRCI setting applies to all measure-mode applications, not just the
component applications.
VM700T> get FRCI A
no
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–37
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
FRHA
FRHA returns or sets the half-amplitude duration for the Pr(R) K-Factor pulse, in T units. Legal values are integers from 2 to 8, inclusive.
VM700T> get FRHA A
7
VM700T>
FRKB
FRKB returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Pr K-PB
factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from –50 to 50, inclusive.
VM700T> get FRKB A
-5.00 1.00
VM700T>
FRKF
FRKF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Pr K-factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get FRKF A
0.00 5.00
VM700T>
FRM1 –
FRM9
Keywords FRM1 through FRM9 return or set the lower and upper
alarm limits, in dB, for Pr (R) packets 1 through 9 in the Component
Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from
–40 to 40, inclusive.
VM700T> get FRM1 A
-1.00 1.00
VM700T>
FRMB
FRMB returns or sets the number of Pr (R) multiburst packets. Legal
values are integers from 3 to 9, inclusive.
VM700T> get FRMB A
5
VM700T>
FRMF
FRMF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits, in mV, for the
Pr (R) multiburst flag in the Component Multiburst application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get FRMF A
300.00 700.00
VM700T>
A–38
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
FRNL
FRNL returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for Pr (R) nonlinearity in the Component NonLinearity application. Legal values are
floating-point numbers from 0 to 50, inclusive.
VM700T> get FRNL A
0.00 5.00
VM700T>
FRNO
FRNO returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the rms Pr
(R) noise level, in dB, in the Component Noise application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from –100 to 0, inclusive.
VM700T> get FRNO A
--- -45.00
VM700T>
FRPP
FRPP returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow
setting for the Pr (R) Peak-to-Peak Amplitude, in mV, in the Component LevelMeter application. Legal values are floating point numbers
from 500 to 2000, inclusive.
VM700T> get FRPP A
665.00 735.00 700.00
VM700T>
FRYD
FRYD returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow
setting for the Pr (R) to Y (G) Delay, in nsec, in the Component
Channel Delay application. Legal values are floating point values from
–400 to 400, inclusive.
VM700T> get FRYD A
-50.00 50.00 0.00
VM700T>
FTNM
FTNM returns or sets the T duration, in nsec. Legal values are integers
from 50 to 150, inclusive.
VM700T> get FTNM A
125
VM700T>
FYC1 –
FYC8
Keywords FYC1 through FYC8 return or set the lower and upper
alarm limits for Y CB colors in the Component ColorBar application.
The settings are in milliVolts. Legal values are floating point numbers
from –500 to 500, inclusive. The color ordering is as follows: 1, gray;
2, yellow; 3, cyan; 4, green; 5, magenta; 6, red; 7, blue; 8, black.
VM700T> get FYC1 A
-50.00 50.00
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–39
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
FYHA
FYHA returns or sets the half-amplitude duration for the Y(G) K-Factor pulse, in T units. Legal values are integers from 2 to 8, inclusive.
VM700T> get FYHA A
2
VM700T>
FYKB
FYKB returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Y K-PB
factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from –50 to 50, inclusive.
VM700T> get FYKB A
-5.00 1.00
VM700T>
FYKF
FYKF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the Y K-factor, as a percentage, in the Component K-Factor application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get FYKF A
0.00 5.00
VM700T>
FYM1 –
FYM9
Keywords FYM1 through FYM9 return or set the lower and upper
alarm limits, in dB, for Y (G) packets 1 through 9 in the Component
Multiburst application. Legal values are floating point numbers from
–40 to 40, inclusive.
VM700T> get FYM1 A
-1.00 1.00
VM700T>
FYMB
FYMB returns or sets the number of Y (G) multiburst packets. Legal
values are integers from 3 to 9, inclusive.
VM700T> get FYMB A
6
VM700T>
FYMF
FYMF returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits, in mV, for the
Y (G) multiburst flag in the Component Multiburst application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get FYMF A
300.00 700.00
VM700T>
A–40
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
FYNL
FYNL returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for Y (G) nonlinearity in the Component NonLinearity application. Legal values are
floating-point numbers from 0 to 50, inclusive.
VM700T> get FYNL A
0.00 5.00
VM700T>
FYNO
FYNO returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits for the rms Y
(G) noise level, in dB, in the Component Noise application. Legal
values are floating point numbers from –100 to 0, inclusive.
VM700T> get FYNO A
--- -45.00
VM700T>
FYPA
FYPA returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow
setting for the Y (G) Peak Amplitude, in mV, in the Component LevelMeter application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 500 to
2000, inclusive.
VM700T> get FYPA A
678.60 750.00 714.30
VM700T>
FYSA
FYSA returns or sets the lower and upper alarm limits and the arrow
setting for the Y (G) Sync Amplitude, in mV, in the Component LevelMeter application. Legal values are floating point numbers from 500 to
2000, inclusive.
VM700T> get FYSA A
271.40 300.00 285.70
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–41
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“G” Group: Remote Configuration
“G” keywords report on or set the values of parameters that control the way the
VM700T communicates with a PC or remote terminal.
commands used with the “G” keywords have the following form:
commands used with “G” group keywords take different arguments,
depending on the keyword. The form of each command used with “G” group
keywords is documented in the pages that follow.
Table A–7: “G” keywords: Remote Configuration
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Range
Meaning or units
GACC
Clamp Coupling, Source A
0-3
0 = DC, 1 = AC, 2 = FAST, 3 = SLOW
GACL
Clamp Level, Source A
–128 - 127
mV
GACP
Clamp Position, Source A
GACW
Clamp Width, Source A
0-3
0 = 0.5, 1 = 0.67, 2 = 1.0, 3 = 2.0 s
GAFA
Frame Algorithm, Source A
0-2
0 = normal synchronous frame pulse,
1 = block field mode (for VTRs),
2 = synthesized frame pulse, arbitrary
phase
GALM
Lock Mode, Source A
0-3
0 = TV line lock (phase locked to video),
1 = phase locked to crystal,
2 = external strobe, 3 = 20.25 MHz strobe
GASS
Sound-In-Sync, Source A
0, 1
0 = Off, 1 = On
GBCC
Clamp Coupling, Source B
0-3
0 = DC, 1 = AC, 2 = FAST, 3 = SLOW
GBCL
Clamp Level, Source B
–128 – 127
mV
GBCP
Clamp Position, Source B
GBCW
Clamp Width, Source B
0-3
0 = 0.5, 1 = 0.67, 2 = 1.0, 3 = 2.0 s
GBFA
Frame Algorithm, Source B
0-2
see GAFA (above)
GBLM
Lock Mode, Source B
0-3
see GALM (above)
GBSS
Sound-In-Sync, Source B
0, 1
0 = Off, 1 = On
GCCC
Clamp Coupling, Source C
0-3
0 = DC, 1 = AC, 2 = FAST, 3 = SLOW
GCCL
Clamp Level, Source C
–128 - 127
mV
GCCP
Clamp Position, Source C
GCCW
Clamp Width, Source C
0-3
0 = 0.5, 1 = 0.67, 2 = 1.0, 3 = 2.0 s
GCFA
Frame Algorithm, Source C
0-2
see GAFA (above)
GCLM
Lock Mode, Source C
0-3
see GALM (above)
GCSS
Sound-In-Sync, Source C
0, 1
0 = Off, 1 = On
A–42
s
s
s
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–7: “G” keywords: Remote Configuration (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Range
Meaning or units
GLN6
System Line Number
1 - 625
current line number
GSNC
Sync
0-3
0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C, 3 = External
GSRC
Source
0-7
0 = Source A, 1 = B, 2 = C, 3 = A - B,
4 = B - C, 5 = A -C, 6 = -A, 7= -B.
GSSR
Locked to Source
0, 1
0 = Off; 1 = On
GSYI
Sync Inverted
0, 1
0 = normal sync; 1 = inverted sync
Table A–8: Option 1S “G” keywords: Remote Configuration
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Range
Meaning or units
GDSR
Sets the digital active video source
0, 1
0 = A; 1 = B
GMMO
Sets major operation mode
0, 1
0 = Analog; 1 = Digital
“G” Group Keyword
Descriptions
The following “G” Group: Remote Configuration keywords are available:
GACC,
GBCC,
GCCC
GACC, GBCC, and GCCC specify the clamp coupling mode for
sources A, B, and C, respectively. The set command takes one
argument, an integer from 0 to 3, inclusive.
A setting of 0 indicates DC coupling (no clamping) is in effect.
A setting of 1 indicates AC coupling is in effect.
A setting of 2 indicates that fast clamp coupling is in effect. This
removes DC offset, hum, and bounce from the signal.
A setting of 3 indicates that slow clamp coupling is in effect. This still
allows hum effects to be visible, but is useful in coping with large DC
offsets on an input signal.
VM700T> get GACC
GACL,
GBCL,
GCCL
GACL, GBCL, and GCCL specify the clamping level for sources A, B,
and C, respectively. The set command takes one argument, representing
the clamping level in milliVolts.
VM700T> get GACL
GACP,
GBCP,
GCCP
GACP, GBCP, and GCCP specify the clamping position for sources A,
B, and C, respectively.. The set command takes one argument,
representing the clamping position in msec.
VM700T> get GACP
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–43
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
GACW,
GBCW,
GCCW
GACW, GBCW, and GCCW specify the clamp width for sources A, B,
and C, respectively. The set command takes one argument , an integer
from 0 to 3, inclusive. A value of 0 sets the clamp width to 0.5 msec. A
value of 1 sets the clamp width to 0.67 msec. A value of 2 sets the
clamp width to 1.0 msec. A value of 3 sets the clamp width to 2.0 msec.
VM700T> get GACW
GAFA,
GBFA,
GCFA
GAFA, GBFA, and GCFA specify the frame algorithm used for sources
A, B, and C, respectively. The set command takes one argument , an
integer from 0 to 2, inclusive. A value of 0 sets the frame algorithm to
a normal synchronous frame pulse. A value of 1 sets the frame algorithm to block field mode. A value of 2 sets the frame algorithm to an
arbitrary-phase, synthesized frame pulse.
VM700T> get GAFA
GALM,
GBLM,
GCLM
GALM, GBLM, and GCLM specify the lock mode for sources A, B,
and C, respectively. The set command takes one argument , an integer
from 0 to 3, inclusive. A value of 0 sets the lock mode to TV line lock
(phase locked to video). A value of 1 sets the lock mode to “phaselocked to crystal.” A value of 2 sets the lock mode to external strobe. A
value of 3 sets the lock mode to a 20.25-MHz strobe.
VM700T> get GALM
GASS,
GBSS,
GCSS
GASS, GBSS, and GCSS turns Sound-in-Sync off or on for sources A,
B, and C, respectively. The set command takes one argument , 0 or 1.
A value of 0 turns Sound-In-Sync off. A value of 1 turns Sound-InSync on.
VM700T> get GASS
GAST
The GAST flag is similar to the GOOL flag, but it will be set TRUE if
an Audio Auto Measurement starts (in other words, when it detects the
first FSK preamble of the audio test sequence). So, a function can be
played back at the same time as an Audio Measurement starts. The
state of the GAST flag may be found by using the get GAST
command, and it may be set using the set GAST command. The arguments are 0 and 1.
The flag is useful for triggering the audio and the video measurements
at the same time from a remote site, and when the video has to start a
specific timing such as VTR playback testing. The GAST flag must be
reset by the user to the state needed for the conditional testing.
set GAST 0
?GAST return
delay 10
loop
A–44
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
GLN5
GLN5 specifies the system line number for NTSC. The set command
takes one argument , an integer from 1 to 525, representing the line
number. Lines in field 1 are numbered from 1 to 263. Lines in field 2
are numbered from 264 to 525.
VM700T> get GLN5
GLN6
GLN6 specifies the system line number for PAL. The set command
takes one argument , an integer from 1 to 625, representing the line
number.
VM700T> get GLN6
GOOL
GOOL specifies the value of the global out-of-limits flag. The set
command takes one argument , 0 (false) or 1 (true). This parameter is
set to 1 whenever a measurement application finds a value outside of
its lower-to-upper limit range. The status of the global out-of-limits
flag can be tested with the ?GOOL command. The global out-of-limits
flag must be reset to 0 explicitly within a function; it does not return to
0 when tested. See the description of the ?GOOL command in
Appendix A for an example showing the use of the GOOL keyword
within a function.
GRLY
The ALARM connector on the rear panel of the VM700T (located
between the two serial ports connectors) is not active. The internal
relay that controls the contact closure is accessible through a set
command.
set GRLY 0 opens the relay and set GRLY 1 closes the relay.
The set may be used in a Function Key in conjunction with the GOOL
(global-out-of-limits) flag in a Function Key to turn on an alarm
indicator.
A second application for a program to monitor some condition for the
out-of-limits to occur and use set GRLY 1 to close the relay for a
period of time to sound an alarm, then open it again with set GRLY 0
to shut the alarm off.
VM700T> get GSNC
GSNC
GSNC specifies the sync source. The set command takes one argument, an integer from 0 to 3, inclusive. Values of 0, 1, 2, and 3 set the
sync source to A, B, C, and external, respectively.
VM700T> get GSNC
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–45
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
GSRC
GSRC specifies the signal source. The set command takes one argument , an integer from 0 to 7, inclusive. Values of 0, 1, and 2 set the
signal source to A, B, or C, respectively. A value of 3 sets the signal
source to A-B. A value of 4 sets the signal source to B-C. A value of 5
sets the signal source to A-C. A value of 6 sets the signal source to -A.
A value of 7 sets the signal source to -B.
VM700T> get GSRC
GSSR
GSSR turns Locked to Source off or on. The set command takes one
argument, 0 or 1. A value of 0 turns Locked to Source off. A value of 1
turns Locked to Source on.
VM700T> get GSSR
GSYI
GSYI controls sync inversion. The set command takes one argument, 0
or 1. A value of 0 sets sync to normal. A value of 1 inverts the sync.
VM700T> get GSYI
Option 1S “G” Group
Keyword Descriptions
The following “G” Group: Remote Configuration keywords are only available
with Option 1S:
GDSR
GDSR sets the active channel (A or B) for the measured digital video
source. The argument is an integer value of 0 or 1. A value of 0 sets the
digital active video source to Channel A. A value of 1 sets the digital
active video source to Channel B.
VM700T> get GDSR
GMMO
GMMO sets major operation mode of the VM700T measurement set to
either Analog or Digital. The argument is an integer value of 0 or 1.
A value of 0 sets the operation mode to Analog. A value of 1 sets the
operation mode to Digital.
VM700T> get GMMO
A–46
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“H” Group: Echo/Rounding Configuration (NTSC)
“H” keywords report on or set the values of Echo/Rounding Option Configuration parameters. These keywords can only be used on an NTSC-standard
VM700T equipped with Option 1G (Echo/Rounding).
Get commands used with the “H” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channelĆletter>
The form of each Set command used with “H” group keywords is documented
below.
Table A–9: “H” keywords: Echo/Rounding Configuration (NTSC)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Range
HROB
NTSC Rounding of black (%)
–50.00 to 50.00
HROW
NTSC Rounding of white (%)
–50.00 to 50.00
HROB
HROB specifies the lower and upper limits, in percent, for the
Rounding of the Black measurement. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the values of the lower and
upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers between –50 and
50, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get HROB A
-1.00 1.00
VM700T> set HROB A undef 1
VM700T> get HROB A
--- 1.00
VM700T>
HROW
HROW specifies the lower and upper limits, in percent, for the
Rounding of the White measurement. The set command takes two
arguments after the channel letter, representing the values of the lower
and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers between –50
and 50, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get HROW A
-1.00 1.00
VM700T> set HROW A undef 1
VM700T> get HROW A
--- 1.00
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–47
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“I” Group: Echo/Rounding Configuration (PAL)
“I” keywords report on or set the values of Echo/Rounding Option Configuration
parameters. These keywords can only be used on a PAL-standard VM700T
equipped with Option 1G (Echo/Rounding).
Get commands used with the “I” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channelĆletter>
The form of each Set command used with “I” group keywords is documented in
the pages that follow.
Table A–10: “I” keywords: Echo/Rounding Configuration (PAL)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Range
IROB
PAL Rounding of black (%)
–50.00 to 50.00
IROW
PAL Rounding of white (%)
–50.00 to 50.00
IROB
IROB specifies the lower and upper limits, in percent, for the
Rounding of the Black measurement. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, representing the values of the lower and
upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers between –50 and
50, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get IROB A
-1.00 1.00
VM700T> set IROB A undef 1
VM700T> get IROB A
--- 1.00
VM700T>
IROW
IROW specifies the lower and upper limits, in percent, for the
Rounding of the White measurement. The set command takes two
arguments after the channel letter, representing the values of the lower
and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers between –50
and 50, inclusive, or “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get IROW A
-1.00 1.00
VM700T> set IROW A undef 1
VM700T> get IROW A
--- 1.00
VM700T>
A–48
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“J” Group: Teletext Configuration (NTSC)
“J” keywords report on or set the values of Teletext Option Configuration
parameters. These keywords can only be used on an NTSC-standard VM700T
equipped with Option 20 (Teletext).
Get commands used with the “J” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channelĆletter>
Set commands used with “J” group keywords take different arguments,
depending on the keyword. The form of each Set command used with “J” group
keywords is documented in the pages that follow.
Table A–11: “J” keywords: Teletext Configuration (NTSC)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Keyword
Description
J0LV
Level (mV)
JPPM
P-P Amplitude (mV)
J1LV
Level (mV)
JPPP
P-P Amplitude (%)
JDES
Data End to Sync (sec)
JRIA
Run In Amplitude (mV)
JDLW
Data Line Width (sec)
JRIB
Run In Bits (bits)
JEHM
Eye Height (mV)
JRIS
Run In Start (sec)
JEHP
Eye Height (%)
JTTL
Teletext field and line
JEWP
Eye Width (%)
JTUN
Timing Unit
J0LV
J0LV specifies the lower and upper limits of the ‘0’ level in milliVolts
for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set
command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the
lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from
–50 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T>
-18.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
-20.00
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
get J0LV A
18.00
set J0LV A -20 20
get J0LV A
20.00
A–49
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
J1LV
J1LV specifies the lower and upper limits of the ‘1’ level in milliVolts
for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set
command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the
lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0
to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T>
482.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
475.00
VM700T>
JDES
get J1LV A
518.00
set J1LV A 475 525
get J0LV A
525.00
JDES specifies the lower and upper limits for data-end-to-sync in
microseconds for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard
VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel
letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values
are numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no
limit set.
VM700T> get JDES A
1.00 3.00
VM700T> set JDES A 0.5 5
VM700T> get JDES A
0.5 5.00
JDLW
JDLW specifies the lower and upper limits for data line width in microseconds for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T.
The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are
numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no
limit set.
VM700T> get JDLW A
52.00 59.00
VM700T> set JDLW A 50 60
VM700T> get JDLW A
50.00 60.00
VM700T>
A–50
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
JEHM
JEHM specifies the lower and upper limits for eye height in milliVolts
for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set
command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the
lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0
to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T>
350.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
300.00
VM700T>
JEHP
get JEHM A
500.00
set JEHM A 300 600
get JEHM A
600.00
JEHP specifies the lower and upper limits for eye height in percent for
the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set
command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the
lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0
to 100, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get JEHP A
70.00 100.00
VM700T> set JEHP A 75 undef
VM700T> get JEHP A
75.00 --VM700T>
JEWP
JEWP specifies the lower and upper limits for eye width in percent for
the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set
command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the
lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0
to 100, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get JEWP A
70.00 100.00
VM700T> set JEWP A 75 undef
VM700T> get JEWP A
75.00 --VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–51
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
JPPM
JPPM specifies the lower and upper limits for peak-to-peak amplitude
in milliVolts for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard
VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel
letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values
are numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates
no limit set.
VM700T>
500.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
550.00
VM700T>
JPPP
JPPP specifies the lower and upper limits for peak-to-peak amplitude
in percent for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard
VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel
letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values
are numbers from 100 to 200, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates
no limit set.
VM700T>
100.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
105.00
VM700T>
JRIA
get JPPP A
130.00
set JPPP A 105 150
get JPPP A
150.00
JRIA specifies the lower and upper limits for run-in amplitude in milliVolts for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T.
The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are
numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no
limit set.
VM700T>
482.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
480.00
VM700T>
A–52
get JPPM A
650.00
set JPPM A 550 undef
get JPPM A
---
get JRIA A
518.00
set JRIA A 480 520
get JRIA A
520.00
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
JRIB
JRIB specifies the lower and upper limits of the number of run-in bits
for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set
command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the
lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 6
to 25, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get JRIB A
14.00 18.00
VM700T> set JRIB A 6 25
VM700T> get JRIB A
6.00 25.00
VM700T>
JRIS
JRIS specifies the lower and upper limits for run-in start time in microseconds for the Teletext measurement on an NTSC-standard VM700T.
The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are
numbers from 7 to 15, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit
set.
VM700T> get JRIS A
9.00 11.00
VM700T> get JRIS A 8.5 12
VM700T> get JRIS A
8.50 12.00
VM700T>
JTTL
JTTL specifies the field and line location for the Teletext measurement
on an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the field and line number,
respectively.
VM700T> get JTTL A
1 15
VM700T> set JTTL A 1 10
VM700T> get JTTL A
1 10
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–53
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
JTUN
JTUN specifies the display timing unit for the Teletext measurement on
an NTSC-standard VM700T. The set command takes one argument
after the channel letter, indicating the current timing unit. Legal values
are usec (for microseconds) and Tc (for “clock periods”, equal to
0.1746 msec).
VM700T> get JTUN A
usec
VM700T> set JTUN A Tc
VM700T> get JTUN A
Tc
VM700T>
A–54
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“K” Group: Teletext Configuration (PAL)
“K” keywords report on or set the values of Teletext Option Configuration
parameters. These keywords can only be used on a PAL-standard VM700T
equipped with Option 20 (Teletext).
Get commands used with the “K” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channelĆletter>
Set commands used with “K” group keywords, shown in Table A–12 take
different arguments, depending on the keyword. The form of each Set command
used with “K” group keywords is documented following the table.
Table A–12: “K” keywords: Teletext Configuration (PAL)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Keyword
Description
K0LV
Level (mV)
KRIS
Run In Start (sec)
K1LV
Level (mV)
KS0L
SIS ’0’ Level (mV)
KDES
Data End to Sync (sec)
KS1L
SIS ’1’ Level (mV)
KDLW
Data Line Width (sec)
KS2L
SIS ’2’ Level (mV)
KDTM
Data Timing (sec)
KS3L
SIS ’3’ Level (mV)
KEHM
Eye Height (mV)
KSHM
SIS Eye Height (mV)
KEHP
Eye Height (%)
KSHP
SIS Eye Height (%)
KEWP
Eye Width (%)
KSPM
SIS P-P Amplitude (mV)
KPPM
P-P Amplitude (mV)
KSPP
SIS P-P Amplitude (%)
KPPP
P-P Amplitude (%)
KSWP
SIS Eye Width (%)
KRIA
Run In Amplitude (mV)
KTTL
Teletext line
KRIB
Run In Bits (bits)
K0LV
K0LV specifies the lower and upper limits of the ‘0’ level in milliVolts
for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set
command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the
lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from
–50 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T>
-18.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
-20.00
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
get K0LV A
18.00
set K0LV A -20 20
get K0LV A
20.00
A–55
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
K1LV
K1LV specifies the lower and upper limits of the ‘1’ level in milliVolts
for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set
command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the
lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0
to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T>
482.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
475.00
VM700T>
KDES
get K1LV A
518.00
set K1LV A 475 525
get K1LV A
525.00
KDES specifies the lower and upper limits for data-end-to-sync in
microseconds for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard
VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel
letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values
are numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no
limit set.
VM700T> get KDES A
1.00 3.00
VM700T> set KDES A 0.5 5
VM700T> get KDES A
0.5 5.00
KDLW
KDLW specifies the lower and upper limits for data line width in
microseconds for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard
VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel
letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values
are numbers from 0 to 99.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no
limit set.
VM700T> get KDLW A
52.00 59.00
VM700T> set KDLW A 50 60
VM700T> get KDLW A
50.00 60.00
VM700T>
A–56
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
KDTM
KDTM specifies the lower and upper limits for data timing in microseconds for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The
set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating
the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers
from 10 to 15, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get KDTM A
11.00 13.00
VM700T> set KDTM A 10 15
VM700T> get KDTM A
10.00 15.00
VM700T>
KEHM
KEHM specifies the lower and upper limits for eye height in milliVolts
for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set
command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the
lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0
to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T>
350.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
300.00
VM700T>
KEHP
get KEHM A
500.00
set KEHM A 300 600
get KEHM A
600.00
KEHP specifies the lower and upper limits for eye height in percent for
the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set
command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the
lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0
to 100, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get KEHP A
70.00 100.00
VM700T> set KEHP A 75 undef
VM700T> get KEHP A
75.00 --VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–57
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
KEWP
KEWP specifies the lower and upper limits for eye width in percent for
the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set
command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the
lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0
to 100, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get KEWP A
70.00 100.00
VM700T> set KEWP A 75 undef
VM700T> get KEWP A
75.00 --VM700T>
KPPM
KPPM specifies the lower and upper limits for peak-to-peak amplitude
in milliVolts for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard
VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel
letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values
are numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates
no limit set.
VM700T>
500.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
550.00
VM700T>
KPPP
KPPP specifies the lower and upper limits for peak-to-peak amplitude
in percent for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T.
The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are
numbers from 100 to 200, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no
limit set.
VM700T>
100.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
105.00
VM700T>
A–58
get KPPM A
650.00
set KPPM A 550 undef
get KPPM A
---
get KPPP A
130.00
set KPPP A 105 150
get KPPP A
150.00
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
KRIA
KRIA specifies the lower and upper limits for run-in amplitude in
milliVolts for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T.
The set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are
numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no
limit set.
VM700T>
482.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
480.00
VM700T>
KRIB
get KRIA A
518.00
set KRIA A 480 520
get KRIA A
520.00
KRIB specifies the lower and upper limits of the number of run-in bits
for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set
command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the
lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 6
to 25, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get KRIB A
14.00 18.00
VM700T> set KRIB A 6 25
VM700T> get KRIB A
6.00 25.00
VM700T>
KRIS
KRIS specifies the lower and upper limits for run-in start time in
microseconds for the Teletext measurement on a PAL-standard
VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel
letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values
are numbers from 7 to 15, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no
limit set.
VM700T> get KRIS A
9.00 11.00
VM700T> get KRIS A 8.5 12
VM700T> get KRIS A
8.50 12.00
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–59
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
KS0L
KS0L specifies the lower and upper limits of the ‘0’ level in milliVolts
for the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The
set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating
the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers
from –999.9 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit
set.
VM700T>
-330.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
-350.00
VM700T>
KS1L
KS1L specifies the lower and upper limits of the ‘1’ level in milliVolts
for the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The
set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating
the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers
from –999.9 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit
set.
VM700T>
-97.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
-100.00
VM700T>
KS2L
get KS1L A
-37.00
set KS1L A -100 -30
get KS1L A
-30.00
KS2L specifies the lower and upper limits of the ‘2’ level in milliVolts
for the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The
set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating
the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers
from –999.9 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit
set.
VM700T>
137.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
130.00
VM700T>
A–60
get KS0L A
-270.00
set KS0L A -350 -250
get KS0L A
-250.00
get KS2L A
197.00
set KS2L A 130 200
get KS2L A
200.00
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
KS3L
KS3L specifies the lower and upper limits of the ‘3’ level in milliVolts
for the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The
set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating
the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers
from –999.9 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit
set.
VM700T>
370.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
350.00
VM700T>
KSHM
KSHM specifies the lower and upper limits of eye height in milliVolts
for the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The
set command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating
the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers
from 0 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T>
163.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
160.00
VM700T>
KSHP
get KS3L A
430.00
set KS3L A 350 450
get KS3L A
450.00
get KSHM A
233.00
set KSHM A 160 240
get KSHM A
240.00
KSHP specifies the lower and upper limits of eye height in percent for
the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set
command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the
lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0
to 100, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get KSHP A
70.00 100.00
VM700T> set KSHP A 75 undef
VM700T> get KSHP A
75.00 undef
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–61
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
KSPM
KSPM specifies the lower and upper limits of peak-to-peak amplitude
in milliVolts for the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard
VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel
letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values
are numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates
no limit set.
VM700T>
700.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
650.00
VM700T>
KSPP
KSPP specifies the lower and upper limits of peak-to-peak amplitude
in percent for the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard
VM700T. The set command takes two arguments after the channel
letter, indicating the lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values
are numbers from 100 to 200, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates
no limit set.
VM700T>
100.00
VM700T>
VM700T>
110.00
VM700T>
KSWP
get KSPM A
910.00
set KSPM A 650 950
get KSPM A
950.00
get KSPP A
130.00
set KSPP A 110 undef
get KSPP A
undef
KSWP specifies the lower and upper limits of eye width in percent for
the SoundInSync measurement on a PAL-standard VM700T. The set
command takes two arguments after the channel letter, indicating the
lower and upper limits, respectively. Legal values are numbers from 0
to 100, inclusive, and “undef”, which indicates no limit set.
VM700T> get KSWP A
70.00 100.00
VM700T> set KSWP A 75 undef
VM700T> get KSWP A
75.00 undef
VM700T>
A–62
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
KTTL
KTTL specifies the line location for the Teletext measurement on a
PAL-standard VM700T. The set command takes one argument after the
channel letter, indicating the line number.
VM700T> get KTTL A
17
VM700T> set KTTL A 16
VM700T> get KTTL A
16
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–63
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“L” Group: Measurement Locations (PAL)
“L” keywords report on or set the measurement locations for Measure Mode
measurements on a PAL-standard VM700T.
Get commands used with the “L” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channelĆletter>
Set commands used with the “L” keywords have the following form:
set <keyword> <channelĆletter> <argument>
Table A–13 lists the legal and default values for the Set command used with
each “L” group keyword.
Table A–13: “L” keywords: Measurement Locations (PAL)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal values
Default
L2TC
2T Sine-Squared Pulse (B1) center
location
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
26.0
L2TL
2T Sine-Squared Pulse (B1) line
line
integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive)
17
LBAL
Luminance bar line
line
integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive)
17
LBAR
Black Level Reference (b1)
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
36.0
LBAS
Luminance bar start location
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
12.0
LBAW
Luminance bar width (B2)
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
10.0
LCBL
Color Bar Line
line
integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive)
100
LLBR
Luminance Bar Reference (b2)
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
17.0
LLSL
5-Riser Luminance Staircase (D1) line
line
integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive)
17
LLSS
5-Riser Luminance Staircase (D1) start
location
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
40.0
LMBL
Multiburst line
line
integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive)
18
LMC1
3-Level Mod. Pedestal (G2) packet 1
center
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
16.0
LMC2
3-Level Mod. Pedestal (G2) packet 2
center
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
20.0
LMC3
3-Level Mod. Pedestal (G2) packet 3
center
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
25.0
LMCL
3-Level Mod. Pedestal (G2) line
line
integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive)
331
LMFS
Multiburst flag start
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
12.0
LMFW
Multiburst flag width
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
8.0
LMMS
Measure Mode Sampling
---
asynchronous, synchronous
asynchronous
LMP1
Multiburst packet #1 center location
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
14.5
A–64
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–13: “L” keywords: Measurement Locations (PAL) (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal values
Default
LMP2
Multiburst packet #2 center location
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
20.5
LMP3
Multiburst packet #3 center location
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
26.5
LMP4
Multiburst packet #4 center location
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
32.5
LMP5
Multiburst packet #5 center location
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
38.5
LMP6
Multiburst packet #6 center location
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
44.5
LMPR
3-Level Mod. Pedestal (G2) reference
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
30.0
LMRE
Modulated Bar (G1) chroma end
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
28.0
LMRL
Modulated Bar (G1) line
line
integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive)
331
LMRR
Modulated Bar Lum-Reference (b6)
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
30.0
LMRS
Modulated Bar (G1) chroma start
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
14.0
LMSL
5-Riser Modulated Staircase (D2) line
line
integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive)
330
LMSS
5-Riser Modulated Staircase (D2) start
location
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
40.0
LMUC
Modulated Pulse (F) center location
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
32.0
LMUH
Modulated Pulse (F) HAD
multiples of
100ns
20T, 10T
20T
LMUL
Modulated Pulse (F) line
line
integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive)
17
LQLL
Quiet line
line
integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive)
22
LSCA
5-Riser Chroma Amplitude
% of bar amplitude
40%, 20%
40%
LSID
Source ID line
line
integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive)
16
LSIL
Source ID start
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
26.0
LSIS
SIS present
---
yes, no
no
LSXX
Sin X/X Line
line
integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive)
100
LTBL
T Bar Start (SD) line
line
integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive)
17
LTBS
T Bar Start (SD) location
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
12.0
LTBW
T Bar Width (SD)
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
10.0
LZCC
Zero Carrier Pulse center location
sec
number, 0 to 64 (inclusive)
35.0
LZCL
Zero Carrier Pulse line
sec
integer, 1 to 625 (inclusive)
13
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–65
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“M” Group: Measurement Locations (NTSC)
“M” keywords report on or set the measurement locations for Measure Mode
measurements on an NTSC-standard VM700T.
All Get and Set commands used with the “M” keywords are channel-specific.
Get commands used with the “M” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channelĆletter>
Set commands used with the “M” keywords have the following form:
set <keyword> <channelĆletter> <argument> [<argument>]
Set commands used with “M” group keywords have either one or two arguments,
depending on the keyword. Table A–14 lists the legal and default values for the
Set command used with each “M” group keyword.
Table A–14: “M” keywords: Measurement Locations (NTSC)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal Values
Default
MAMU
Amplitude units
IRE or volts
IRE, volts
IRE
MBNC
Bounce
Field and Line
1,2 / 10 to 262
1 30
MCBF
Color Bars
Field
1, 2
2
MCBL
Color Bars
Line
10 to 262
17
MCBT
ColorBar
Field and Line
1,2 / 10 to 262
2 17
MCFT
Chroma Freq Resp
Field and Line
1,2 / 10 to 262
1 15
MCIF
VIRS
Field
1, 2
1
MCIL
VIRS
Line
10 to 262
19
MCLG
ChromLum GainDelay
Field and Line
1,2 / 10 to 262
1 18
MCNT
Chrominance NonLinearity
Field and Line
1,2 / 10 to 262
1 17
MCVF
Composite VITS
Field
1, 2
1
MCVL
Composite VITS
Line
10 to 262
18
MDGT
DGDP
Field and Line
1,2 / 10 to 262
1 18
MEGD
GroupDelay SinX_X
Field and Line
1,2 / 10 to 262
2 18
MFGR
Fix 0 IRE to
---
Back Porch, 0 volts
Back Porch
MHTL
H Timing
Field and Line
1,2 / 10 to 262
1 100
MIRR
IRE bar reference
---
yes, no
no
MKFL
K Factor
Field and Line
1,2 / 10 to 262
1 18
MLNT
Luminance NonLinearity
Field and Line
1,2 / 10 to 262
1 18
MMBF
Multiburst
Field
1, 2
1
MMBL
Multiburst
Line
10 to 262
17
A–66
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–14: “M” keywords: Measurement Locations (NTSC) (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal Values
Default
MMBT
MultiBurst
Field and Line
1,2 / 10 to 262
1 18
MNLF
Noise Line (Quiet)
Field
1, 2
1
MNLL
Noise Line (Quiet)
Line
10 to 262
12
MNSL
Noise Spectrum
Field and Line
1,2 / 10 to 262
1 12
MNVF
NTC-7 Combination
Field
1, 2
1
MNVL
NTC-7 Combination
Line
10 to 262
17
MPBT
Bar LineTime
Field and Line
1,2 / 10 to 262
1 18
MSAM
Sampling
---
synchronous, asynchronous
asynchronous
MTBL
T Bar (SD)
Field and Line
1,2 / 10 to 262
1 18
MZCA
Zero Carrier Pulse Ref
---
yes, no
no
MZCC
Zero Carrier Pulse
Center Location
(sec)
0 to 64
25.5
MZCF
Zero Carrier Pulse
Field
1, 2
1
MZCL
Zero Carrier Pulse
Line
10 to 262
16
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–67
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“N” Group: Video Wander Configuration (NTSC)
“N” keywords report on or set the values of the Drift Rate and Frequency Offset
application configuration parameters on an NTSC-standard VM700T.
All Get and Set commands used with the “N” keywords are channel-specific.
Get commands used with the “N” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channelĆletter>
Set commands used with the “N” keywords have the following form:
set <keyword> <channelĆletter> <argument> [<argument>]
Set commands used with “N” group keywords have either one or two arguments,
depending on the keyword. Table A–15 lists the legal and default values for the
Set command used with each “N” group keyword.
Table A–15: “N” keywords: Video Wander Limits (NTSC)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal values
Default
NDRT
Drift-rate limits
ppb/s
–999.0 to 999.0
–28.0 to 28.0
NFRO
Frequency-offset limits
ppb
–99990.0 to 99990.0
–2800.0 to 2800.0
A–68
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“O” Group: Video Wander Configuration (PAL)
“O” keywords report on or set the values of the Drift Rate and Frequency Offset
application configuration parameters on an PAL-standard VM700T.
All Get and Set commands used with the “O” keywords are channel-specific.
Get commands used with the “O” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channelĆletter>
Set commands used with the “O” keywords have the following form:
set <keyword> <channelĆletter> <argument> [<argument>]
Set commands used with “O” group keywords have either one or two arguments,
depending on the keyword. Table A–16 lists the legal and default values for the
Set command used with each “O” group keyword.
Table A–16: “O” keywords: Video Wander Limits (PAL)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal values
Default
ODRT
Drift-rate limits
ppb/s
–999.0 to 999.0
–22.6 to 22.6
OFRO
Frequency-offset limits
ppb
–9999.0 to 9999.0
–226.0 to 226.0
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–69
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“P” Group: Auto Mode Limits (PAL)
“P” keywords report on or set the limits for Auto Mode measurements on a
PAL-standard VM700T.
Get commands used with the “P” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channel letter>
Set commands used with the “P” keywords have the following form:
set <keyword> <channel letter> <arg1> <arg2> <arg3> <arg4>
where <arg1> is the lower caution limit, <arg2> is the upper caution limit,
<arg3> is the lower alarm limit, and <arg4> is the upper alarm limit.
Table A–17 lists the legal ranges and default values for the Set command used
with each “P” group keyword.
Table A–17: “P” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (PAL)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal range
Default
P2CW
S/N.2 Chr-wgtd
dB
0 to 999.9
52.0, - - -, 42.0, - - -
P2LW
S/N.2 Lum-wgtd (567)
dB
0 to 999.9
58.0, - - -, 48.0, - - -
P2U9
S/N.2 Un-wgtd (569)
dB
0 to 999.9
58.0, - - -, 48.0, - - -
P2UN
S/N.2 Un-wgtd (567)
dB
0 to 999.9
60.0, - - -, 50.0, - - -
P2W9
S/N.2 Lum-wgtd (569)
dB
0 to 999.9
58.0, - - -, 48.0, - - -
PAPL
Ave. Picture Level
%
0 to 150
---
PBAA
Luminance Bar Amp
mv
0 to 999.9
650,750,600,800
PBAC
Luminance Bar Amp
% Carr
0 to 999.9
60,68,55,73
PBAE
Burst Ampl Error
%
–50 to 50
–3, 3 –10, 10
PBAM
Bar Ampl Error
%
–50 to 50
–5, 5 –10, 10
PBAT
Residual Carrier
% Carr
0 to 100
10, 12.5, 7.5, 15
PBAV
Burst Amplitude
mV
0 to 999.9
285, 315, 270, 330
PBDF
Peak Differential Gain
%
–50 to 50
- - -, 10, - - -, 20
PBLD
Baseline Distortion
% Bar
–50 to 50
–1, 1, –2, 2
PBLL
Blanking Level
% Carr
0 to 100
72, 76, 69, 79
PBPS
Broad Pulse Sep
sec
0 to 20
4.5, 4.9, 4.4, 5.0
PBQD
Burst Quadrature Error
deg
–90 to 90
–2, 2, –5, 5
PBRT
Bar Rise Time
nsec
0 to 999.9
180, 220, 160, 240
PBTE
Bar Tilt (Rec 569)
% Bar
–40 to 40
–5, 5, –10, 10
PCBC
Burst Duration
Cycles
0 to 100
9, 11, 7.5, 12.5
PCBD
Burst Duration
sec
0 to 20
2, 2.5, 1.7, 2.8
A–70
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–17: “P” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (PAL) (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal range
Default
PCEP
number of consecutive errors before
printing
---
integer, 1 to 3
2
PCGP
Chr/Lum Gn (Mod Bar)
% Bar
–90 to 90
–10, 10, –20, 20
PCHW
S/N Chr-wgtd
dB
0 to 999.9
52, - - -, 42, - - -
PCLD
Chr/Lum Delay Ineq
%
–500 to 500
–40, 40, –50, 50
PCLI
Chr/Lum Intermod
% Bar
–50 to 50
–5, 5, –10, 10
PCRA
Chrom Ref Ampl Err
%
–50 to 50
–3, 3, –10, 10
PDGD
Pk-Pk Diff Gain
%
0 to 100
- - -, 10, - - -, 20
PDPD
Pk-Pk Diff Phase
Deg
0 to 100
- - -, 10, - - -, 20
PEPD
Equalizing Pulse
sec
0 to 20
2.34, 2.36, 2.3, 2.4
PFPD
Front Porch
sec
0 to 20
1.2, 1.8, 0.5, 3.0
PFTD
Field Time Distortion
%
–50 to 50
–1.0, 1.0, –2.0, 2.0
PGNP
Chr/Lum Gn (Mod Pls)
% Bar
–90 to 90
–10, 10, –20, 20
PICP
ICPM (Absolute)
deg
–50 to 50
–10, 10, –20, 20
PICR
ICPM (Rel Blanking)
deg
–50 to 50
–10, 10, –20, 20
PLBI
Line Blanking
sec
0 to 20
11.7, 12.3, 9.1, 16.0
PLF1
10–1000 Hz LF Error
% Bar
0 to 50
0.0, 2.0, 0.0, 5.0
PLF5
50–550 Hz LF Error
% Bar
0 to 50
0.0, 2.0, 0.0, 5.0
PLFC
CCIR LF Error
% Bar
0 to 50
0.0, 2.0, 0.0, 5.0
PLND
Lum Nonlin Dist
%
0 to 50
- - -, 5.0, - - -, 10.0
PLSD
Sync Duration
sec
0 to 20
4.6, 4.8, 4.5, 4.9
PLTD
Line Time Distortion
% Bar
0 to 40
0.0, 5.0, 0.0, 10.0
PLW9
S/N Lum-wgtd (569)
dB
0 to 999.9
58.0, - - -, 48.0, - - -
PMB1
MB Packet #1
% Flag
0 to 999.9
90, 110, 80, 120
PMB2
MB Packet #2
% Flag
0 to 999.9
90, 110, 80, 120
PMB3
MB Packet #3
% Flag
0 to 999.9
90, 110, 80, 120
PMB4
MB Packet #4
% Flag
0 to 999.9
90, 110, 80, 120
PMB5
MB Packet #5
% Flag
0 to 999.9
90, 110, 80, 120
PMB6
MB Packet #6
% Flag
0 to 999.9
90, 110, 80, 120
PMBB
Multiburst Flag
% Bar
0 to 999.9
55, 65, 50, 70
PMBM
Multiburst Flag
mV
0 to 999.9
385, 455, 350, 490
PPBR
Pulse/Bar Ratio Err
% Bar
–90 to 90
–10, 10, –20, 20
PPDG
Peak Diff Gain
%
–50 to 50
- - -, 10, - - -, 20
PPDP
Peak Diff Phase
Deg
–50 to 50
- - -, 10, - - -, 20
PSAV
Sync Amplitude
mV
0 to 999.9
285, 315, 270, 330
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–71
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–17: “P” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (PAL) (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal range
Default
PSBR
Sync/Bar Ratio
%
0 to 999.9
90, 110, 80, 120
PSBT
Sync to Bar Top
mV
0 to 2000
935, 1065, 870, 1130
PSCH
SCH Phase
deg
–90 to 90
–10, 10, –15, 15
PSFT
Sync Fall Time
nsec
0 to 999.9
170, 300, 140, 330
PSNP
S/N Periodic
dB
0 to 999.9
45.0, - - -, 40.0, - - -
PSNU
S/N Unweighted (567)
dB
0 to 999.9
60.0, - - -, 50.0, - - -
PSNW
S/N Lum-weighted (567)
dB
0 to 999.9
58.0, - - -, 48.0, - - -
PSRT
Sync Rise Time
nsec
0 to 999.9
170, 300, 140, 330
PSTB
Sync-to-Burst Start
sec
0 to 20
5.5, 5.7, 5.4, 5.8
PSYA
Sync Amplitude Error
%
–50 to 100
–5, 5, –10, 10
PTTK
2T Pulse K-factor
% Kf
0 to 40
0, 1, 0, 4
PUN9
S/N Unweighted (569)
dB
0 to 999.9
60.0, - - -, 50.0, - - -
A–72
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“R” Group: Auto Mode Limits (NTSC)
“R” keywords report on or set the limits for Auto Mode measurements on an
NTSC-standard VM700T.
Get commands used with the “R” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channel letter>
Set commands used with the “R” keywords have the following form:
set <keyword> <channel letter> <arg1> <arg2> <arg3> <arg4>
where <arg1> is the lower caution limit, <arg2> is the upper caution limit,
<arg3> is the lower alarm limit, and <arg4> is the upper alarm limit.
The RFCB keyword is the only exception to these rules in the “R” group. get
RFCB followed by a channel letter returns eighteen sets of limits, divided into
three groups: amplitude error in percent for yellow, cyan, green, magenta, red,
and blue; phase error in degrees for yellow, cyan, green, magenta, red, and blue;
and chrominance/luminance ratio error in percent for yellow, cyan, green,
magenta, red, and blue.
set RFCB is followed by a channel letter and 72 values (separated by spaces or
tabs), specifying lower and upper caution limits and lower and upper alarm
limits for each measurement listed in the previous paragraph.
Table A–18 lists the legal ranges and default values for each “R” group keyword
used with the Set command.
Table A–18: “R” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (NTSC)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal range
Default
R2LW
S/N.2 NTC7 Unwgtd
dB
0 to 100.0
- - -, - - -, 67.0, - - -
R2PR
2T Pulse K-Factor
% Kf
0 to 25
-.-.-, -.-.-, 0, 2.5
R2SU
S/N.2 Unif. Unwgtd
dB
0 to 100.0
- - -, - - -, 67.0, - - -
R2SW
S/N.2 Unif. Lum-wgtd
dB
0 to 100.0
- - -, - - -, 67.0, - - -
R2UW
S/N.2 NTC7 Lum-wgtd
dB
0 to 100.0
- - -, - - -, 67.0, - - -
RAPL
Average Picture Level
%
0 to 150
-.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-
RBAA
Bar Amplitude
IRE
50 to 150
-.-.-, -.-.-, 96, 104
RBAP
Burst Amplitude
% sync
50 to 200
-.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-
RBAT
Bar Top
% carr
0 to 50
10, 15 10 15
RBLL
Blanking Level
% carr
50 to 100
74, 76, 72.5, 77.5
RBVI
Blanking Variation
% Bar/IRE
0 to 40
-.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-
RBVP
Blanking Variation
% carr
0 to 25
-.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-
RBWC
(FCC) Burst Width
cycles
5 to 20
-.-.-, -.-.-, 8, 11
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–73
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–18: “R” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (NTSC) (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal range
Default
RBZU
(FCC) Breezeway
sec
0 to 5
0.28, - - -, 0.4, - - -
RCEP
number of consecutive error(s) before
printing
---
1 to 3
2
RCGP
Chroma-Lum Gain
%
50 to 200
95, 105, 93, 107
RCLD
Chroma-Lum Delay
nsec
–200 to 200
–45, 45, –60, 60
RDGD
Differential Gain
%
0 to 25
0, 7, 0, 10
RDPD
Differential Phase
deg
0 to 50
0, 2.2, 0, 3
REEE
IEEE–511 ST Dist
% SD
0 to 25
0, 2, 0, 3
REWP
(FCC) Equalizer Width
% S.W.
20 to 80
46, 54, 45, 55
RFCB
FCC Color Bars Measurement
(18 sets of results)
% (6 sets)
Deg (6 sets)
%(6 sets)
–50 to 100
–15, 15, –20, 20 (6 sets)
–7.5, 7.5, –10, 10 (6 sets)
–15, 15, –20, 20 (6 sets)
RFM1
FCC MB Packet #1
% flag
20 to 100
- - -, - - -, 57.1, 63
RFM2
FCC MB Packet #2
% flag
20 to 100
- - -, - - -, 56.2, 64.2
RFM3
FCC MB Packet #3
% flag
20 to 100
- - -, - - -, 54.8, 65.6
RFM4
FCC MB Packet #4
% flag
20 to 100
- - -, - - -, 53.5, 67.3
RFM5
FCC MB Packet #5
% flag
20 to 100
- - -, - - -, 56, 64.3
RFM6
FCC MB Packet #6
% flag
20 to 100
- - -, - - -, - - -, - - -
RFMI
FCC Multiburst Flag
% Bar/IRE
50 to 150
92.5, 107.5, 90, 110
RFMP
FCC Multiburst Flag
% carr
0 to 50
10.6, 14.4, 10, 15
RFPU
(FCC) Front Porch
sec
0 to 5
1.4, - - -, 1.3, - - -
RFTD
Field Time Distortion
–20 to 20
- - -, - - -, –3, 3
RHB4
(FCC) H Blank 4 IRE
sec
5 to 20
10.85, 11.35, 10.5, 11.5
RICP
ICPM
deg
–50 to 50
–2, 2, –3, 3
RLND
Lum NL Dist DY
%
0 to 25
0, 7, 0, 10
RLTD
Line Time Dist
%
0 to 25
0, 1.4, 0, 2
RN2C
NTC7 20 IRE Chroma
IRE
0 to 50
- - -, - - -, 15, 25
RN8C
NTC7 80 IRE Chroma
IRE
40 to 120
- - -, - - -, 75, 85
RNCI
NTC7 Chr-Lum Intmd
IRE
–50 to 50
- - -, - - -, –4, 4
RNCP
NTC7 Chr NL Phase
deg
0 to 25
- - -, - - -, 0, 5
RNM1
NTC7 MB Packet #1
% flag
20 to 100
- - -, - - -, 47.6, 52.5
RNM2
NTC7 MB Packet #2
% flag
20 to 100
- - -, - - -, 46.8, 53.5
RNM3
NTC7 MB Packet #3
% flag
20 to 100
- - -, - - -, 45.7, 54.7
RNM4
NTC7 MB Packet #4
% flag
20 to 100
- - -, - - -, 44.6, 56.1
RNM5
NTC7 MB Packet #5
% flag
20 to 100
- - -, - - -, 46.7, 53.6
A–74
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–18: “R” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (NTSC) (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal range
Default
RNM6
NTC7 MB Packet #6
% flag
20 to 100
- - -, - - -, 43.6, 57.4
RNMI
NTC7 Multiburst Flag
% Bar/IRE
50 to 150
92.5, 107.5, 90, 110
RNMP
NTC7 Multiburst Flag
% carr
0 to 50
10.6, 14.4, 10,15
RPBR
Pulse/Bar Ratio
%
50 to 200
95.5, 104.5, 94, 106
RRBG
Rel Burst Gain
%
–50 to 100
–15, 15, –20, 20
RRBP
Rel Burst Phase
deg
–50 to 50
–7.5, 7.5, –10, 10
RRBW
RS–170A Burst Width
cycles
5 to 20
-.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-
RREU
RS–170A Equalizer
sec
0 to 5
2.21, 2.39, 2.18, 2.42
RRFP
RS–170A Front Porch
sec
0 to 5
1.41, 1.59, 1.38, 1.62
RRHB
RS–170A H Blanking
sec
5 to 20
10.71, 11.09, 10.65, 11.15
RRSS
RS–170A Sync-Setup
sec
5 to 20
9.31, 9.49, 9.28, 9.52
RRSU
RS–170A Serration
sec
2 to 10
4.61, 4.79, 4.58, 4.82
RRSW
RS–170A Sync Width
sec
2 to 10
4.61, 4.79, 4.58, 4.82
RSBE
(FCC) Sync-to-Burst-End
sec
5 to 20
5, 7.8, 5, 7.9
RSBS
Sync-to-Burst Start
sec
0 to 25
5.21, 5.39, 5.18, 5.42
RSCH
SCH Phase
deg
–90 to 90
–45, 45, - - -, - - -
RSFN
(FCC) Sync Fall Time
nsec
0 to 999.9
0, 190, 0, 250
RSNP
S/N Periodic
dB
0 to 100
- - -, - - -, 57, - - -
RSNU
S/N Unified Unweighted
dB
0 to 100
- - -, - - -, 57, - - -
RSNW
S/N Unified Lum-Weighted
dB
0 to 100
- - -, - - -, 54, - - -
RSRN
(FCC) Sync Rise Time
nsec
0 to 999.9
0, 190, 0, 250
RSSU
(FCC) Sync-to-Setup
sec
5 to 20
9.4, - - -, 9.2, - - -
RSVI
Sync Variation
% Bar/IRE
0 to 40
-.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-, -.-.-
RSVP
Sync Variation
% carr
0 to 25
-.-.-, -.-.-, 0, 5
RSWU
(FCC) Serration Width
sec
2 to 10
3.98, 4.92, 3.8, 5.1
RSYA
Sync Amplitude
% Bar/IRE
20 to 80
37, 43, 36, 44
RSYU
(FCC) Sync Width
sec
2 to 10
4.5, 5, 4.4, 5.1
RULW
S/N NTC7 Lum-Weighted
dB
0 to 100
- - -, - - -, 54, - - -
RUUW
S/N NTC7 Unweighted
dB
0 to 100
- - -, - - -, 57, - - -
RVAI
Burst Amplitude
% Bar/IRE
20 to 80
37, 43, 36, 44
RVB2
V Blank 20 IRE F1
lines
15 to 30
20.1, 20.9, 19.9, 21.1
RVB3
V Blank 20 IRE F2
lines
15 to 30
20.1, 20.9, 19.9, 21.1
RVB4
(FCC) V Blank 4 IRE F1
lines
15 to 30
18.5, 20.5, 18, 21
RVB5
(FCC) V Blank 4 IRE F2
lines
15 to 30
18.5, 20.5, 18, 21
RVCB
VIRS Chroma Ampl
% burst
50 to 200
95, 105, 90, 110
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–75
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–18: “R” keywords: Auto Mode Limits (NTSC) (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal range
Default
RVCI
VIRS Chroma Ampl
% Bar/IRE
20 to 80
38, 42, 36, 44
RVCP
VIRS Chroma Phase
deg
–50 to 50
–5, 5, –10, 10
RVLR
VIRS Luminance Ref
% Bar/IRE
20 to 80
47.5, 52.5, 45, 55
RVSU
VIRS Setup
% Bar/IRE
0 to 25
5.7, 9.3, 5, 10
“S” Group: Communication Setup
“S” keywords report on or set the values of VM700T communication parameters.
commands used with the “S” keywords have the following form:
commands used with “S” group keywords shown in Table A–19 take
different arguments, depending on the keyword. Some “S” group keywords are
“read-only” (they cannot be used with the set command). The form of each command used with “S” group keywords is documented following the table.
Table A–19: “S” keywords: Communication Setup
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Keyword
Description
SMSD
Remote Control Message Display
SP1P
Port 1 Parity
SP0A
Port 0 Protocol
SP1R
Port 1 Reset Character
SP0B
Port 0 Baud Rate
SPCF
Copy Format
SP0C
Port 0 Character Size
SPCO
Control Port
SP0D
Port 0 Carrier Detect
SPCP
Copy Port
SP0F
Port 0 Flow Control
SPLF
Log Format
SP0P
Port 0 Parity
SPLP
Log Port
SP0R
Port 0 Reset Character
SPRC
Remote Control Port
SP1A
Port 1 Protocol
SPRF
Report Format
SP1B
Port 1 Baud Rate
SPRO
Remote Control Prompt
SP1C
Port 1 Character Size
SPRP
Report Port
SP1D
Port 1 Carrier Detect
SRIM
Non SLIP Interfacing Mode
SP1F
Port 1 Flow Control
A–76
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
SMSD
SMSD specifies or reports on the destination for messages from the
VM700T. SMSD is channel-independent. SMSD takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are Remote or VM700T Screen.
VM700T>
Remote
VM700T>
VM700T>
VM700T>
VM700T>
SP0A
get SMSD
set SMSD VM700T> Screen
get SMSD
Screen
SP0A returns the communications protocol for port 0. SP0A is readonly (cannot be used with the set command). SP0A takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are None or SLIP.
VM700T> get SP0A
SLIP
VM700T>
SP0B
SP0B returns the baud rate for port 0. SP0B is read-only (cannot be
used with the set command). SP0B takes a single argument after the
keyword. Legal values are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or
19200.
VM700T> get SP0B
9600
VM700T>
SP0C
SP0C returns the character size (number of bits per character) for port
0. SP0C is read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SP0C
takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are 7 or 8.
VM700T> get SP0C
8
VM700T>
SP0D
SP0D returns the status of carrier detect for port 0. SP0D is read-only
(cannot be used with the set command). SP0D takes a single argument
after the keyword. Legal values are disabled or enabled.
VM700T> get SP0D
disabled
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–77
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
SP0F
SP0F returns the flow control setting for port 0. SP0F is read-only
(cannot be used with the set command). SP0F takes a single argument
after the keyword. Legal values are CTS/RTS, XON/XOFF, or None.
VM700T> get SP0F
CTS/RTS
VM700T>
SP0P
SP0P returns the flow control setting for port 0. SP0P is read-only
(cannot be used with the set command). SP0P takes a single argument
after the keyword. Legal values are None, Odd, Even, Zero, or One.
VM700T> get SP0P
None
VM700T>
SP0R
SP0R returns the flow control setting for port 0. SP0R is read-only
(cannot be used with the set command). SP0R takes a single argument
after the keyword. Legal values are None, Ctrl–A, Ctrl–B, Ctrl–C,
Ctrl–D, Ctrl–E, Ctrl–F, Ctrl–G, Ctrl–H, Ctrl–I, Ctrl–J, Ctrl–K, Ctrl–L,
Ctrl–M, Ctrl–N, Ctrl–O, Ctrl–P, Ctrl–Q, Ctrl–R, Ctrl–S, Ctrl–T,
Ctrl–U, Ctrl–V, Ctrl–W, Ctrl–X, Ctrl–Y, or Ctrl–Z.
VM700T> get SP0R
None
VM700T>
SP1A
SP1A returns the communications protocol for port 0. SP1A is readonly (cannot be used with the set command). SP1A takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are None or SLIP.
VM700T> get SP1A
SLIP
VM700T>
SP1B
SP1B returns the baud rate for port 0. SP1B is read-only (cannot be
used with the set command). SP1B takes a single argument after the
keyword. Legal values are 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or
19200.
VM700T> get SP1B
9600
VM700T>
A–78
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
SP1C
SP1C returns the character size (number of bits per character) for port
0. SP1C is read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SP1C
takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are 7 or 8.
VM700T> get SP1C
8
VM700T>
SP1D
SP1D returns the status of carrier detect for port 0. SP1D is read-only
(cannot be used with the set command). SP1D takes a single argument
after the keyword. Legal values are disabled or enabled.
VM700T> get SP1D
disabled
VM700T>
SP1F
SP1F returns the flow control setting for port 0. SP1F is read-only
(cannot be used with the set command). SP1F takes a single argument
after the keyword. Legal values are CTS/RTS, XON/XOFF, or None.
VM700T> get SP1F
CTS/RTS
VM700T>
SP1P
SP1P returns the flow control setting for port 0. SP1P is read-only
(cannot be used with the set command). SP1P takes a single argument
after the keyword. Legal values are None, Odd, Even, Zero, or One.
VM700T> get SP1P
None
VM700T>
SP1R
SP1R returns the flow control setting for port 0. SP1R is read-only
(cannot be used with the set command). SP1R takes a single argument
after the keyword. Legal values are None, Ctrl–A, Ctrl–B, Ctrl–C,
Ctrl–D, Ctrl–E, Ctrl–F, Ctrl–G, Ctrl–H, Ctrl–I, Ctrl–J, Ctrl–K, Ctrl–L,
Ctrl–M, Ctrl–N, Ctrl–O, Ctrl–P, Ctrl–Q, Ctrl–R, Ctrl–S, Ctrl–T,
Ctrl–U, Ctrl–V, Ctrl–W, Ctrl–X, Ctrl–Y, or Ctrl–Z.
VM700T> get SP1R
None
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–79
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
SPCF
SPCF returns or sets the copy format (this is the format used to format
output when the Copy button is pressed). SPCF takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are Epson LQ, PostScript, ASCII
Printer, or HP LaserJet.
VM700T> get SPCF
None
VM700T> set SPCF PostScript
VM700T> get SPCF
PostScript
VM700T>
SPCO
SPCO returns the name of the VM700T control port. The VM700T
uses the control port to send characters in response to a control command. SPCO is read-only (cannot be used with the set command).
SPCO takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal values are
None, Serial Port 0, or Serial Port 1.
VM700T> get SPCO
None
VM700T>
SPCP
SPCP returns or sets the name of the VM700T copy port. SPCP takes a
single argument after the keyword. Legal values are None, Serial Port
0, or Serial Port 1.
VM700T> get
None
VM700T> set
VM700T> get
Serial Port
VM700T>
SPLF
SPCP
SPCP Serial Port 0
SPCP
0
SPLF returns or sets the log format (this is the format in which data
logging information is sent ). SPLF takes a single argument after the
keyword. Legal values are Epson LQ, PostScript, ASCII Printer, or HP
LaserJet.
VM700T> get SPLF
None
VM700T> set SPLF Epson LQ
VM700T> get SPLF
Epson LQ
VM700T>
A–80
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
SPLP
SPLP returns or sets the name of the VM700T log port. SPLP takes a
single argument after the keyword. Legal values are None, Serial Port
0, or Serial Port 1.
VM700T> get
None
VM700T> set
VM700T> get
Serial Port
VM700T>
SPRC
SPLP Serial Port 0
SPLP
0
SPRC returns the name of the VM700T remote control port. SPRC is
read-only (cannot be used with the set command). SPRC takes a single
argument after the keyword. Legal values are None, Serial Port 0, or
Serial Port 1.
VM700T> get
None
VM700T> set
VM700T> get
Serial Port
VM700T>
SPRF
SPLP
SPRC
SPRC Serial Port 0
SPRC
0
SPRF returns or sets the report format (this is the format used to format
timed reports). SPRF takes a single argument after the keyword. Legal
values are Epson LQ, PostScript, ASCII Printer, or HP LaserJet.
VM700T> get SPRF
None
VM700T> set SPRF Epson LQ
VM700T> get SPRF
Epson LQ
VM700T>
SPRO
SPRO returns or sets the VM700T remote control prompt. SPRO takes
a single argument after the keyword. It consists of an arbitrary string up
to 32 characters in length. “#” is a comment character; all characters
appearing in the string after a “#” are ignored. To include a “#” in the
string, precede it by a “\” character.
VM700T> set SPRO Archimedes>
Archimedes>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–81
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
SPRP
SPRP returns or sets the name of the VM700T report port (this is the
port used to print timed reports). SPRP takes a single argument after
the keyword. Legal values are None, Serial Port 0, or Serial Port 1.
VM700T> get
None
VM700T> set
VM700T> get
Serial Port
VM700T>
SRIM
SPRP
SPRP Serial Port 1
SPRP
1
SRIM returns the non-SLIP interfacing mode. SRIM is read-only
(cannot be used with the set command). SRIM takes a single argument
after the keyword. Legal values are Computer or Terminal.
VM700T> get SRIM
Terminal
VM700T>
“T” Group: Measure Mode Limits (PAL)
“T” keywords report on or set the limits for Measure Mode measurements on a
PAL-standard VM700T.
Get commands used with the “T” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channel letter>
Set commands used with the “T” keywords have the following form:
set <keyword> <channel letter> <arg1> <arg2>
where <arg1> and <arg2> are the lower and upper limits.
The TSX keywords are the only exceptions to these rules. Keywords TSX1
through TSX7 each specify the frequency at which the limits defined by TGN1
through TGN7 and TDL1 through TDL7 apply. Thus, the get command for any
of the TSX keywords returns only one value, while the set command takes only
one argument after the channel letter.
Table A–20 lists the legal ranges and default values for each “T” group keyword
used with the Set command.
A–82
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–20: “T” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (PAL)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal range
Default
TAMN
Chrominance AM Noise
dB rms
–100 to 0
----- –40.0
TBFE
Burst Freq Error
Hz
–360 to 360
–50.0 50.0
TBLV
Burst Level
mV
100 to 999.9
250.0 310.0
TBTE
Bar Tilt (Rec 569)
% Bar
–40 to 40
–5.0 5.0
TBWD
Burst Width
sec
0 to 20
2.00 2.50
TCDL
Chrom Delay
nsec
–400 to 400
–40.0 40.0
TCGN
Chrom Gain
%
10 to 200
90.0 110.0
TCLB
Chrom Level Blue
mV
0 to 999.9
423.0 517.0
TCLC
Chrom Level Cyan
mV
0 to 999.9
598.0 730.0
TCLG
Chrom Level White
mV
0 to 999.9
0.0 10.0
TCLI
Chrom Lum Intermod
%
–50 to 50
–5.0 5.0
TCLK
Chrom Level Black
mV
–50 to 999.9
0.0 10.0
TCLM
Chrom Level Magenta
mV
0 to 999.9
558.0 682.0
TCLN
Chrom Level Green
mV
0 to 999.9
558.0 682.0
TCLR
Chrom Level Red
mV
0 to 999.9
598.0 730.0
TCLY
Chrom Level Yellow
mV
0 to 999.9
423.0 517.0
TCNL
Chrom Non Lin
%
–50 to 50
–5.0 5.0
TCPB
Chrom Phase Blue
deg
0 to 360
342.0 352.0
TCPC
Chrom Phase Cyan
deg
0 to 360
278.0 288.0
TCPM
Chrom Phase Magenta
deg
0 to 360
55.0 65.0
TCPN
Chrom Phase Green
deg
0 to 360
235.0 245.0
TCPR
Chrom Phase Red
deg
0 to 360
98.0 108.0
TCPY
Chrom Phase Yellow
deg
0 to 360
162.0 172.0
TDGN
Diff Gain
%
–50 to 50
–5.0 5.0
TDGP
Diff Gain (p-p)
%
0 to 50
0.0 10.0
TDL1
Sin X/X Group Delay
nsec
–500 to 500
–12.0 12.0
TDL2
Sin X/X Group Delay
nsec
–500 to 500
–12.0 12.0
TDL3
Sin X/X Group Delay
nsec
–500 to 500
–12.0 12.0
TDL4
Sin X/X Group Delay
nsec
–500 to 500
–12.0 12.0
TDL5
Sin X/X Group Delay
nsec
–500 to 500
–12.0 12.0
TDL6
Sin X/X Group Delay
nsec
–500 to 500
–12.0 12.0
TDL7
Sin X/X Group Delay
nsec
–500 to 500
–40.0 40.0
TDPH
Diff Phase
deg
–50 to 50
–5.0 5.0
TDPP
Diff Phase (p-p)
deg
0 to 50
0.0 10.0
TEFS
H Blanking End from Sync
sec
0 to 20
8.00 12.00
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–83
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–20: “T” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (PAL) (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal range
Default
TEP5
Equalizer Pulse Width (50% sync)
sec
0 to 20
2.10 2.80
TFES
Falling Edge SD
%
0 to 50
----- 1.0
TFTM
Fall Time
nsec
0 to 360
90.0 105.0
TGN1
Sin X/X Gain
dB
–50 to 200
-0.5 0.5
TGN2
Sin X/X Gain
dB
–50 to 200
-0.5 0.5
TGN3
Sin X/X Gain
dB
–50 to 200
-0.5 0.5
TGN4
Sin X/X Gain
dB
–50 to 200
-0.5 0.5
TGN5
Sin X/X Gain
dB
–50 to 200
-0.5 0.5
TGN6
Sin X/X Gain
dB
–50 to 200
-0.5 0.5
TGN7
Sin X/X Gain
dB
–50 to 200
–1.0 0.5
THAD
HAD
nsec
50 to 999.9
150.0 250.0
THBW
H Blanking Width
sec
0 to 20
9.00 14.00
TICP
ICPM
deg
–20 to 0 (argument 1)
0 to 20 (argument 2)
–5.0 5.0
TJIF
Peak-Peak Jitter in a Frame
sec
0 to 999.9
0.0 100.0
TK2T
K–2T
%Kf
0 to 99.9
0.0 5.0
TKPB
K-PB
%Kf
–50 to 50
–5.0 3.0
TLFE
Line Freq Error
%
–40 to 40
–1.0 1.0
TLLB
Lum Level Blue
mV
0 to 999.9
54.0 66.0
TLLC
Lum Level Cyan
mV
0 to 999.9
331.0 405.0
TLLG
Lum Level Grey
mV
0 to 999.9
630.0 770.0
TLLK
Lum Level Black
mV
–50 to 999.9
–10.0 10.0
TLLM
Lum Level Magenta
mV
0 to 999.9
195.0 234.0
TLLN
Lum Level Green
mV
0 to 999.9
277.0 339.0
TLLR
Lum Level Red
mV
0 to 999.9
141.0 173.0
TLLY
Lum Level Yellow
mV
0 to 999.9
419.0 512.0
TLNL
Lum Non Lin
%
0 to 50
0.0 5.0
TLTJ
Peak to Peak Long Time Jitter
sec
0 to 40
0.0 5.0
TMB1
MB Packet 1
dB
–40 to 40
–1.0 1.0
TMB2
MB Packet 2
dB
–40 to 40
–1.0 1.0
TMB3
MB Packet 3
dB
–40 to 40
–2.0 1.0
TMB4
MB Packet 4
dB
–40 to 40
–3.0 1.0
TMB5
MB Packet 5
dB
–40 to 40
–5.0 1.0
TMB6
MB Packet 6
dB
–40 to 40
----- 1.0
TMBF
Multiburst Flag
mV
0 to 999.9
400.0 750.0
A–84
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–20: “T” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (PAL) (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal range
Default
TMBL
Bar Level (Ref. B1)
mV
500 to 999.9
650.0 750.0
TMBT
Line Time Distortion
% Bar
0 to 40
0.0 5.0
TMSL
Sync Level
mV
100 to 999.9
288.0 315.0
TMVL
Bar Level
(Ref. Back Porch)
mV
500 to 999.9
650.0 750.0
TMVP
Sync-to-Bar-Top
mV
500 to 2000
950.0 1050.0
TNLV
Noise Level
dB rms
–100 to 0
----- –45.0
TPBR
PB Ratio
%
10 to 200
90.0 110.0
TPMN
Chrominance PM Noise
dB rms
–100 to 0
----- –40.0
TPNL
Chrom Phase Non Lin
deg
–50 to 50
–5.0 5.0
TRES
Rising Edge SD
%
0 to 50
----- 1.0
TRTM
Rise Time
nsec
0 to 360
90.0 105.0
TSBR
Sync/Bar Ratio
%
0 to 999.9
90.0 110.0
TSBS
Sync-Burst Start
sec
4 to 9.9
5.50 5.70
TSCH
SCH phase
deg
–360 to 360
–45.0 45.0
TSDC
SD at Cursor
%
0 to 50
----- 1.0
TSFT
Sync Fall Time
nsec
10 to 999.9
100.0 300.0
TSK1
Head SW Skew (Field 1)
sec
–40 to 40
–5.0 5.0
TSK2
Head SW Skew (Field 2)
sec
–40 to 40
–5.0 5.0
TSP5
Serration Pulse Width (50% sync)
sec
0 to 20
4.40 5.00
TSRT
Sync Rise Time
nsec
10 to 999.9
100.0 300.0
TSTS
H Blanking Start-Sync
sec
–10 to 0
–5.0 -0.5
TSWD
Sync Width
sec
2 to 9.9
4.5 4.9
TSX1
Sin X/X Freq
MHz
0.1 to 5.8
0.50
TSX2
Sin X/X Freq
MHz
0.1 to 5.8
1.00
TSX3
Sin X/X Freq
MHz
0.1 to 5.8
2.00
TSX4
Sin X/X Freq
MHz
0.1 to 5.8
3.00
TSX5
Sin X/X Freq
MHz
0.1 to 5.8
4.00
TSX6
Sin X/X Freq
MHz
0.1 to 5.8
4.30
TSX7
Sin X/X Freq
MHz
0.1 to 5.8
4.80
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–85
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“U” Group: Measure Mode Limits (NTSC)
“U” keywords report on or set the limits for Measure Mode measurements on an
NTSC-standard VM700T.
Get commands used with the “U” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channel letter>
Set commands used with the “U” keywords have the following form:
set <keyword> <channel letter> <arg1> <arg2>
where <arg1> and <arg2> are the lower and upper limits.
The USX keywords are the only exceptions to these rules. Keywords USX1
through USX7 each specify the frequency at which the limits defined by UGN1
through UGN7 and UDL1 through UDL7 apply. Thus, the get command for any
of the USX keywords returns only one value, while the set command takes only
one argument after the channel letter.
Table A–21 lists the legal ranges and default values for each “U” group keyword
used with the Set command.
Table A–21: “U” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (NTSC)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal range
Default
UAMN
Chrominance AM Noise
dB rms
–100 to 0
---- –40.0
UBFE
Burst Freq Error
Hz
–360 to 360
–50.0 50.0
UBLV
Burst Level
mV
100 to 999.9
250.0 310.0
UBTE
Bar Tilt (Rec 569)
% Bar
–40 to 40
–5.0 5.0
UBWD
Burst Width
cycles
0 to 20
8.50 9.50
UBZW
Breezeway
sec
0 to 20
0.30 0.80
UCDL
Chrom Delay
nsec
–400 to 400
–40.0 40.0
UCF1
CF Packet 1
dB
–40 to 40
–3.0 1.0
UCF2
CF Packet 2
dB
–40 to 40
–2.0 1.0
UCF3
CF Packet 3
dB
–40 to 40
–1.0 1.0
UCF4
CF Packet 4
dB
–40 to 40
–2.0 1.0
UCF5
CF Packet 5
dB
–40 to 40
–3.0 1.0
UCFF
Chroma Freq Resp Flag
mV
0 to 999.9
600.0 800.0
UCGN
Chrom Gain
%
10 to 200
90.0 110.0
UCLB
Chrom Level Blue
mV
0 to 999.9
400.0 489.0
UCLC
Chrom Level Cyan
mV
0 to 999.9
567.0 693.0
UCLG
Chrom Level Grey
mV
0 to 999.9
0.0 10.0
A–86
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–21: “U” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (NTSC) (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal range
Default
UCLI
Chrom Lum Intermod
%
–50 to 50
–5.0 5.0
UCLK
Chrom Level Black
mV
0 to 999.9
0.0 10.0
UCLM
Chrom Level Magenta
mV
0 to 999.9
530.0 647.0
UCLN
Chrom Level Green
mV
0 to 999.9
530.0 647.0
UCLR
Chrom Level Red
mV
0 to 999.9
567.0 693.0
UCLY
Chrom Level Yellow
mV
0 to 999.9
400.0 489.0
UCNL
Chrom Non Lin
%
–50 to 50
–5.0 5.0
UCPB
Chrom Phase Blue
deg
0 to 360
342.0 352.0
UCPC
Chrom Phase Cyan
deg
0 to 360
278.0 288.0
UCPM
Chrom Phase Magenta
deg
0 to 360
55.0 65.0
UCPN
Chrom Phase Green
deg
0 to 360
235.0 245.0
UCPR
Chrom Phase Red
deg
0 to 360
98.0 108.0
UCPY
Chrom Phase Yellow
deg
0 to 360
162.0 172.0
UDGN
Diff Gain
%
–50 to 50
–5.0 5.0
UDGP
Diff Gain (p-p)
%
0 to 50
0.0 10.0
UDL1
Sin X/X Group Delay
nsec
–500 to 500
–15.0 15.0
UDL2
Sin X/X Group Delay
nsec
–500 to 500
–15.0 15.0
UDL3
Sin X/X Group Delay
nsec
–500 to 500
–15.0 15.0
UDL4
Sin X/X Group Delay
nsec
–500 to 500
–15.0 15.0
UDL5
Sin X/X Group Delay
nsec
–500 to 500
–15.0 15.0
UDL6
Sin X/X Group Delay
nsec
–500 to 500
–15.0 15.0
UDL7
Sin X/X Group Delay
nsec
–500 to 500
–15.0 15.0
UDPH
Diff Phase
deg
–50 to 50
–5.0 5.0
UDPP
Diff Phase (p-p)
deg
0 to 50
0.0 10.0
UEFS
H Blanking End from Sync
sec
0 to 20
8.00 12.00
UEP1
Equalizer Pulse Width (10% sync)
sec
0 to 20
2.10 2.80
UEP5
Equalizer Pulse Width (50% sync)
sec
0 to 20
2.10 2.80
UFES
Falling Edge SD
%
0 to 50
----- 1.0
UFPR
Front Porch
sec
0 to 20
0.50 2.50
UFTM
Fall Time
nsec
0 to 360
120.0 130.0
UGN1
Sin X/X Gain
dB
–50 to 20
-0.5 0.5
UGN2
Sin X/X Gain
dB
–50 to 20
-0.5 0.5
UGN3
Sin X/X Gain
dB
–50 to 20
-0.5 0.5
UGN4
Sin X/X Gain
dB
–50 to 20
-0.5 0.5
UGN5
Sin X/X Gain
dB
–50 to 20
-0.5 0.5
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–87
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–21: “U” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (NTSC) (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal range
Default
UGN6
Sin X/X Gain
dB
–50 to 20
-0.5 0.5
UGN7
Sin X/X Gain
dB
–50 to 20
–6.0 0.5
UHAD
HAD
nsec
50 to 999
200.0 300.0
UHBW
H Blanking Width
sec
0 to 20
9.00 12.00
UICP
ICPM
deg
–20 to 0 (argument 1)
0 to –20 (argument 2)
–5.0 5.0
UJIF
Peak-Peak Jitter in a Frame
sec
0 to 999.9
0.0 100.0
UK2T
K–2T
%Kf
0 to 99.9
0.0 5.0
UKPB
K-PB
%Kf
–50 to 50
–5.0 3.0
ULFE
Line Freq Error
%
–40 to 40
–1.0 1.0
ULLB
Lum Level Blue
mV
0 to 999.9
97.0 119.0
ULLC
Lum Level Cyan
mV
0 to 999.9
360.0 440.0
ULLG
Lum Level Grey
mV
0 to 999.9
494.0 786.0
ULLK
Lum Level Black
mV
–50 to 999.9
48.0 59.0
ULLM
Lum Level Magenta
mV
0 to 999.9
231.0 282.0
ULLN
Lum Level Green
mV
0 to 999.9
311.0 380.0
ULLR
Lum Level Red
mV
0 to 999.9
182.0 222.0
ULLY
Lum Level Yellow
mV
0 to 999.9
445.0 544.0
ULNL
Lum Non Lin
%
0 to 50
0.0 5.0
ULTJ
Peak to Peak Long Time Jitter
sec
0 to 40
0.0 5.0
UMB1
MB Packet 1
dB
–40 to 40
–1.0 1.0
UMB2
MB Packet 2
dB
–40 to 40
–1.0 1.0
UMB3
MB Packet 3
dB
–40 to 40
–2.0 1.0
UMB4
MB Packet 4
dB
–40 to 40
–3.0 1.0
UMB5
MB Packet 5
dB
–40 to 40
–5.0 1.0
UMB6
MB Packet 6
dB
–40 to 40
–10.0 1.0
UMBF
Multiburst Flag
mV
0 to 999.9
400.0 750.0
UMBL
Bar Level
mV
500 to 999.9
679.0 750.0
UMBT
Line Time Distortion
% Bar
0 to 40
0.0 5.0
UMSL
Sync Level
mV
100 to 999.9
271.0 300.0
UMVL
Video Level
mV
500 to 999.9
679.0 750.0
UMVP
Video Pk-Pk
mV
500 to 2000
950.0 1050.0
UNLV
Noise Level
dB rms
–100 to 0
----- –45.0
UPBR
PB Ratio
%
10 to 200
90.0 110.0
UPMN
Chrominance PM Noise
dB rms
–100 to 0
----- –40.0
A–88
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–21: “U” keywords: Measure Mode Limits (NTSC) (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Units
Legal range
Default
UPNL
Chrom Phase Non Lin
deg
–50 to 50
–5.0 5.0
URES
Rising Edge SD
%
0 to 50
----- 1.0
URTM
Rise Time
nsec
0 to 360
120.0 130.0
USBE
Sync-Burst End
sec
0 to 20
7.50 8.50
USBR
Sync/Bar Ratio
%
0 to 999.9
90.0 110.0
USBS
Sync-Burst Start
sec
4 to 9.9
5.30 5.32
USCH
SCH phase
deg
–360 to 360
–40.0 40.0
USDC
SD at Cursor
%
0 to 50
----- 1.0
USFT
Sync Fall Time
nsec
10 to 999.9
100.0 300.0
USK1
Head SW Skew Field 1
sec
–40 to 40
–5.0 5.0
USK2
Head SW Skew Field 2
sec
–40 to 40
–5.0 5.0
USP1
Serration Pulse Width (10% sync)
sec
0 to 20
4.40 5.00
USP5
Serration Pulse Width (50% sync)
sec
0 to 20
4.40 5.00
USRT
Sync Rise Time
nsec
10 to 999.9
100.0 300.0
USSU
Sync to Setup
sec
0 to 20
8.00 11.00
USTS
H Blanking Start-Sync
sec
–10 to 0
–5.0 -0.5
USWD
Sync Width
sec
2 to 9.9
4.5 4.9
USX1
Sin X/X Freq
MHz
0.15 to 5.8
0.50
USX2
Sin X/X Freq
MHz
0.15 to 5.8
1.00
USX3
Sin X/X Freq
MHz
0.15 to 5.8
2.50
USX4
Sin X/X Freq
MHz
0.15 to 5.8
3.00
USX5
Sin X/X Freq
MHz
0.15 to 5.8
3.58
USX6
Sin X/X Freq
MHz
0.15 to 5.8
4.00
USX7
Sin X/X Freq
MHz
0.15 to 5.8
4.18
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–89
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“V” Group: Video Source Selection
“V” keywords report on or set the active video source selection files.
Get commands used with the “V” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword>
Set commands used with the “V” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <fileĆname>
Table A–22 lists the “V” group keywords and their meanings.
Table A–22: “V” keywords: Video Source Selection
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Keyword
Description
VNCA
Source A NTSC Config File
VSCC
Source C PAL Config File
VNCB
Source B NTSC Config File
VSTA
Source A Video Standard
VNCC
Source C NTSC Config File
VSTB
Source B Video Standard
VSCA
Source A PAL Config File
VSTC
Source C Video Standard
VSCB
Source B PAL Config File
VSTE
Timed Events file
VNCA
VNCA returns or sets the NTSC Video_Source File for Source A. This
file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Video_Source~Files/
NTSC.
VM700T> get VNCA
NewMeas
VM700T>
VNCB
VNCB returns or sets the NTSC Video_Source File for Source B. This
file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Video_Source~Files/
NTSC.
VM700T> get VNCB
System~Default
VM700T>
VNCC
VNCC returns or sets the NTSC Video_Source File for Source C. This
file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Video_Source~Files/
NTSC.
VM700T> get VNCC
System~Default
VM700T>
A–90
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
VSCA
VSCA returns or sets the PAL Video_Source File for Source A. This
file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/
Video_Source~Files/PAL.
VM700T> get VSCA
NewMeas
VM700T>
VSCB
VSCB returns or sets the PAL Video_Source File for Source B. This
file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/
Video_Source~Files/PAL.
VM700T> get VSCB
System~Default
VM700T>
VSCC
VSCC returns or sets the PAL Video_Source File for Source C. This
file is found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/
Video_Source~Files/PAL.
VM700T> get VSCC
System~Default
VM700T>
VSTA
VSTA returns or sets the video standard for Source A. Legal values are
NTSC and PAL.
VM700T> get VSTA
NTSC
VM700T> set VSTA PAL
VM700T> get VSTA
PAL
VM700T>
VSTB
VSTA returns or sets the video standard for Source B. Legal values are
NTSC and PAL.
VM700T> get VSTB
NTSC
VM700T> set VSTB PAL
VM700T> get VSTB
PAL
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–91
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
VSTC
VSTC returns or sets the video standard for Source C. Legal values are
NTSC and PAL.
VM700T> get VSTC
NTSC
VM700T> set VSTC PAL
VM700T> get VSTC
PAL
VM700T>
VSTE
VSTE returns or sets the current Timed Events File. This file is found
in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Timed~Events.
VM700T> get VSTE
System~Default
VM700T> set VSTE My_Events
VM700T> get VSTE
My_Events
VM700T>
“W” Group: Audio Source Selection
“W” keywords report on or set the active video source selection files.
Get commands used with the “W” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword>
Set commands used with the “W” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <fileĆname>
Table A–23 lists the “W” group keywords and their meanings.
Table A–23: “W” keywords: Audio Source Selection
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Keyword
Description
WACA
Source A Audio Config File
WACC
Source C Audio Config File
WACB
Source B Audio Config File
WACA
WACA returns or sets the Audio_Source File for Source A. This file is
found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Audio_Source~Files.
VM700T> get WACA
O.33:00TEST
VM700T>
A–92
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
WACB
WACB returns or sets the Audio_Source File for Source B. This file is
found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Audio_Source~Files.
VM700T> get WACB
O.33:00TEST
VM700T>
WACC
WACC returns or sets the Audio_Source File for Source C. This file is
found in directory /nvram0/ConfigFiles/Audio_Source~Files.
VM700T> get WACC
O.33:00TEST
VM700T>
“X” Group: Camera Testing (NTSC)
“X” keywords report on or set the values of Camera Testing Option Configuration parameters. These keywords can only be used on an NTSC-standard
VM700T equipped with Option 21 (Camera Testing).
Get commands used with the “X” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channelĆletter>
Set commands used with “X” group keywords take different arguments,
depending on the keyword. The form of each Set command used with “X” group
keywords is documented in the pages that follow.
Table A–24 lists the “X” group keywords and their meanings.
Table A–24: “X” keywords: Camera Testing (NTSC)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Range
XCOS
Camera Output standard
Composite
Composite Setup
GBR 700 (system default)
GBR 700 Setup
GBR 714
GBR 714 Setup
YPbPr SMPTE/EBU
YPbPr 714 Betacam Setup
YPbPr 714 Betacam
YPbPr 700 MII Setup
XSWP
Frequency Response Packets
6 to 12
XB6F
Packets beyond 6 MHz –– From
1 to 12
XB6T
Packets beyond 6 MHz –– To
1 to 12
XSWL
Frequency Response field and line
Fields 1 or 2 Lines 1 to 262
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–93
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–24: “X” keywords: Camera Testing (NTSC) (Cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Range
XGDR
Reference (mV)
0 to 999.9 mV
XG01 to XG12
Y (G) Packet # 1 (dB) to Y (G) Packet #12 (dB)
–40 to +40 dB
XBDR
Reference (mV)
0 to 999.9 mV
XB01 to XB12
(B) Packet # 1 (dB) to (B) Packet #12 (dB)
–40 to +40 dB
XRDR
Reference (mV)
0 to 999.9 mV
XR01 to XR12
(R) Packet # 1 (dB) to (R) Packet #12 (dB)
–40 to +40 dB
XCOS
XCOS returns or sets the camera output standard. Legal values for
NTSC are: GBR 700, GBR 700 Setup, GBR 714, GBR 714 Setup,
YPbPr SMPTE/EBU, YPbPr 714 Betacam Setup, YPbPr 714
Betacam, YPbPr 700 MII Setup.
VM700T> get XCOS A
GBR 714
VM700T>
XSWP
XSWP returns or sets the number of frequency response packets. Legal
values are integers from 6 to 12, inclusive.
VM700T> get XSWP A
12
VM700T>
XB6F
XB6F returns or sets the number of the first frequency response packet
beyond 6 MHz. Legal values are integers from 1 to 12, inclusive.
VM700T> get XB6F A
4
VM700T>
XB6T
XB6T returns or sets returns or sets the number of the last frequency
response packet beyond 6 MHz. Legal values are integers from 1 to 12,
inclusive.
VM700T> get XB6T A
9
VM700T>
A–94
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
XSWL
XSWL returns or sets the frequency response field and line. XSWL
takes two arguments, a field number and a line number. Legal values
for the first argument are integers from 1 to 2, inclusive. Legal values
for the second argument are integers from 1 to 262, inclusive.
VM700T> get XSWL A
1 120
VM700T>
XGDR
XGDR returns or sets lower and upper limits in mV for the reference
on the Y (green) channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or
floating-point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get XGDR A
--- 700.00
VM700T>
XG01 –
XG12
Keywords XG01 through XG12 return or set the lower and upper
limits in dB for packets 1 through 12 on the Y channel. Legal values
for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from –40 to 40,
inclusive.
VM700T> get XG01 A
-1.00 0.00
VM700T>
XBDR
XBDR returns or sets lower and upper limits in mV for the reference
on the B (blue) channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get XBDR A
--- 700.00
VM700T>
XB01 –
XB12
Keywords XB01 through XB12 return or set the lower and upper limits
in dB for packets 1 through 12 on the B (blue) channel. Legal values
for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from –40 to 40,
inclusive.
VM700T> get XB01 A
-1.00 0.00
VM700T>
XRDR
XRDR returns or sets lower and upper limits in mV for the reference
on the R (red) channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get XRDR A
--- 700.00
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–95
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
XR01 –
XR12
Keywords XR01 through XR12 return or set the lower and upper limits
in dB for packets 1 through 12 on the R (red) channel. Legal values for
each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from –40 to 40, inclusive.
VM700T> get XR01 A
-1.00 0.00
VM700T>
“Y” Group: Camera Testing (PAL)
“Y” keywords report on or set the values of Camera Testing Option Configuration parameters. These keywords can only be used on a PAL-standard VM700T
equipped with Option 21 (Camera Testing).
Get commands used with the “Y” keywords have the following form:
get <keyword> <channelĆletter>
Set commands used with “Y” group keywords take different arguments,
depending on the keyword. The form of each Set command used with “Y” group
keywords is documented in the pages that follow.
Table A–25 lists the “Y” group keywords and their meanings.
Table A–25: “Y” keywords: Camera Testing (PAL)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Keyword
Description
Range
YCOS
Camera Output standard
Composite
GBR
YPbPr SMPTE/EBU
YSWP
Frequency Response Packets
6 to 12
YB6F
Packets beyond 6 MHz –– From
1 to 12
YB6T
Packets beyond 6 MHz –– To
1 to 12
YSWL
Frequency Response line
Lines 1 to 625
YGDR
Reference (mV)
0 to 999.9 mV
YG01 to YG12
Y (G) Packet # 1 (dB) to Y (G) Packet #12 (dB)
–40 to +40 dB
YBDR
Reference (mV)
0 to 999.9 mV
YB01 to YB12
(B) Packet # 1 (dB) to (B) Packet #12 (dB)
–40 to +40 dB
YRDR
Reference (mV)
0 to 999.9 mV
YR01 to YR12
(R) Packet # 1 (dB) to (R) Packet #12 (dB)
–40 to +40 dB
A–96
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
YCOS
YCOS returns or sets the camera output standard. Legal values for PAL
are: GBR and YPbPr SMPTE/EBU
VM700T> get YCOS A
GBR 714
VM700T>
YSWP
YSWP returns or sets the number of frequency response packets. Legal
values are integers from 6 to 12, inclusive.
VM700T> get YSWP A
12
VM700T>
YB6F
YB6F returns or sets the number of the first frequency response packet
beyond 6 MHz. Legal values are integers from 1 to 12, inclusive.
VM700T> get YB6F A
4
VM700T>
YB6T
YB6T returns or sets returns or sets the number of the last frequency
response packet beyond 6 MHz. Legal values are integers from 1 to 12,
inclusive.
VM700T> get YB6T A
9
VM700T>
YSWL
YSWL returns or sets the frequency response line. YSWL takes one
argument. Legal values are integers from 1 to 625, inclusive.
VM700T> get YSWL A
1 120
VM700T>
YGDR
YGDR returns or sets lower and upper limits in mV for the reference
on the Y (green) channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or
floating-point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get YGDR A
--- 700.00
VM700T>
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–97
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
YG01 –
YG12
Keywords YG01 through YG12 return or set the lower and upper
limits in dB for packets 1 through 12 on the Y channel. Legal values
for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from –40 to 40,
inclusive.
VM700T> get YG01 A
-1.00 0.00
VM700T>
YBDR
YBDR returns or sets lower and upper limits in mV for the reference
on the B (blue) channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get YBDR A
--- 700.00
VM700T>
YB01 –
YB12
Keywords YB01 through YB12 return or set the lower and upper limits
in dB for packets 1 through 12 on the B (blue) channel. Legal values
for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from –40 to 40,
inclusive.
VM700T> get YB01 A
-1.00 0.00
VM700T>
YRDR
YRDR returns or sets lower and upper limits in mV for the reference
on the R (red) channel. Legal values for each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from 0 to 999.9, inclusive.
VM700T> get YRDR A
--- 700.00
VM700T>
YR01 –
YR12
Keywords YR01 through YR12 return or set the lower and upper limits
in dB for packets 1 through 12 on the R (red) channel. Legal values for
each limit are integer or floating-point numbers from –40 to 40, inclusive.
VM700T> get YR01 A
-1.00 0.00
VM700T>
A–98
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Option 1S Get/Set Keywords
This section covers the keywords available with Option 1S.
NOTE. The remote commands and keywords are case sensitive. Option 1S
introduces lower case keywords to the VM700T measurement set. Be sure to
enter the commands and keywords exactly as they appear in this manual.
“d” Group Keywords
You can use the “d” group keywords to set the digital source selection parameters. Figure A–1 shows the relationship between the Source Selection Digital
configuration file and the “d” group keywords. Table A–26 lists the “d” group
keywords and shows application examples using the get and set commands.
Source_Selection~Digital
Digital Video Standard
Digital A:
Auto detect
143Mb
270Mb
270Mb
360Mb
Video Source File
NTSC:
525Ćline:
625Ćline:
Unspec:
Audio Limits:
Digital B:
dsta
Auto detect
143Mb
270Mb
270Mb
360Mb
NTSC:
525Ćline:
625Ćline:
Unspec:
Audio Limits:
Remote
Keywords
System~Default
System~Default
System~Default
System~Default
d1na
d25a
d26a
d3ua
System~Default
dada
Video Source File
dstb
System~Default
System~Default
System~Default
System~Default
d1nb
d25b
d26b
d3ub
System~Default
dadb
SDI Output: Selected Channel
dout
Startup In: Digital Mode
Hex Format: SMPTE
dmod
dhex
Figure A–1: Source Selection Digital configuration file relationship to remote commands
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–99
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–26: “d” keywords: Source Selection Digital configuration file
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
dsta
dsta sets the video format of the signal the measurement set will assume is being input on the SDI Ch. A input. The
Digital Source File set in the Source Selection Digital configuration file for that for video format will be used for
measurements. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: Auto detect, 143Mb NTSC,
270Mb 525-line, 270Mb 625-line, and 360Mb Unspec (unspecified). If you have selected the Auto detect setting, the
measurement set will determine the video format of the input signal.
VM700T> get dsta
270Mb 525Ćline
VM700T> set dsta Auto detect
d1na
d1na sets the name of the Digital Source File to be used for measurements by the 143Mb NTSC video format on the
SDI Ch. A input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied
with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Source File. This file must be in the following directory path:
nvram0/ConfigFiles/143Mb~NTSC/Digital_Source~Files.
VM700T> get d1na
System~Default
VM700T> set d1na Custom~File
d25a
d25a sets the name of the Digital Source File to be used for measurements by the 270Mb 525-line video format on the
SDI Ch. A input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied
with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Source File. This file must be in the following directory path:
nvram0/ConfigFiles/270Mb~525-line/Digital_Source~Files.
VM700T> get d25a
System~Default
VM700T> set d25a Custom~File
d26a
d26a sets the name of the Digital Source File to be used for measurements by the 270Mb 625-line video format on the
SDI Ch. A input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied
with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Source File. This file must be in the following directory path:
nvram0/ConfigFiles/270Mb~625-line/Digital_Source~Files.
VM700T> get d26a
System~Default
VM700T> set d26a Custom~File
d3ua
d3ua sets the name of the Digital Source File to be used for measurements by the 360Mb Unspec video format on the
SDI Ch. A input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied
with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Source File. This file must be in the following directory path:
nvram0/ConfigFiles/360Mb~Unspec/Digital_Source~Files.
VM700T> get d3ua
System~Default
VM700T> set d3ua Custom~File
dada
dada sets the name of the Digital Audio Setup file to be used for audio measurements on the SDI Ch. A input. You can
use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the
name of an existing Digital Audio Setup file. This file must be in the following directory path:
nvram0/ConfigFiles/Digital_Audio~Setup.
VM700T> get dada
System~Default
VM700T> set dada Custom~File
A–100
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–26: “d” keywords: Source Selection Digital configuration file (Cont.)
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
dstb
dstb sets the video format of the signal the measurement set will assume is being input on the SDI Ch. B input. The
Digital Source File set in the Source Selection Digital configuration file for that for video format will be used for
measurements. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: Auto detect, 143Mb NTSC,
270Mb 525-line, 270Mb 625-line, and 360Mb Unspec (unspecified). If you have selected the Auto detect setting, the
measurement set will determine the video format of the input signal.
VM700T> get dstb
270Mb 525Ćline
VM700T> set dstb Auto detect
d1nb
d1nb sets the name of the Digital Source File to be used for measurements by the 143Mb NTSC video format on the
SDI Ch. B input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied
with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Source File. This file must be in the following directory path:
nvram0/ConfigFiles/143Mb~NTSC/Digital_Source~Files.
VM700T> get d1nb
System~Default
VM700T> set d1nb Custom~File
d25b
d25b sets the name of the Digital Source File to be used for measurements by the 270Mb 525-line video format on the
SDI Ch. B input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied
with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Source File. This file must be in the following directory path:
nvram0/ConfigFiles/270Mb~525-line/Digital_Source~Files.
VM700T> get d25b
System~Default
VM700T> set d25b Custom~File
d26b
d26b sets the name of the Digital Source File to be used for measurements by the 270Mb 625-line video format on the
SDI Ch. B input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied
with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Source File. This file must be in the following directory path:
nvram0/ConfigFiles/270Mb~625-line/Digital_Source~Files.
VM700T> get d26b
System~Default
VM700T> set d26b Custom~File
d3ub
d3ub sets the name of the Digital Source File to be used for measurements by the 360Mb Unspec video format on the
SDI Ch. B input. You can use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied
with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Digital Source File. This file must be in the following directory path:
nvram0/ConfigFiles/360Mb~Unspec/Digital_Source~Files.
VM700T> get d3ub
System~Default
VM700T> set d3ub Custom~File
dadb
dadb sets the name of the Digital Audio Setup file to be used for audio measurements on the SDI Ch. B input. You can
use one of the following arguments with this command: System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the
name of an existing Digital Audio Setup file. This file must be in the following directory path:
nvram0/ConfigFiles/Digital_Audio~Setup.
VM700T> get dadb
System~Default
VM700T> set dadb Custom~File
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–101
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–26: “d” keywords: Source Selection Digital configuration file (Cont.)
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
dout
dout sets which one of the two SDI input signals will be output to the SDI Output connector. You can use one of the
following arguments with this command: Channel A, Channel B, Selected Channel, and None.
VM700T> get dout
Channel A
VM700T> set dout Channel B
dmod
This command is not used for remote programming. The command is included here for completeness. dmod sets the
mode (Analog or Digital) the measurement set starts up in. You can use one of the following arguments with this
command: Analog or Digital.
VM700T> get dmod
Analog
VM700T> set dmod Digital
dhex
dhex sets the hex format (SMPTE or EBU) used to display hexadecimal numbers in the measurement displays. You can
use one of the following arguments with this command: SMPTE or EBU.
VM700T> get dhex
SMPTE
VM700T> set dhex EBU
“w”, “m”,“r”, and “h”
Group Keywords
These four keyword groups are channel dependent. They are used to set the
parameters of the Digital Source File for the four video formats listed below:
The “w” group is used for the 143Mb NTSC format.
The “m” group is used for the 270Mb 525-line format.
The “r” group is used for the 270Mb 625-line format.
The “h” group is used for the 360Mb Unspec format.
Figure A–2 shows the relationship between the Digital Source Files configuration file and the group keywords. Table A–27 lists the “m” group keywords and
shows application examples using the get and set commands.
The “w”, “r”, and “h” group keywords use the same last three characters in the
keywords to perform the same function for the other three video formats.
Replace the “m” character in the listed keywords with one of the “w”, “r”, and
“h” group characters to set the parameters for the video format you want to edit.
A–102
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
270Mb~525Ćline/Digital_Source~Files/System~Default
Digital Channel Configuration 270Mb 525ĆLine System Defaults File
Eye Limits:
Wander Limits:
Format Setup:
System~Default
System~Default
System~Default
Source Name:
Video Printout Title:
System Default
Video Measurement Set
(Channel A only)
(Channel A only)
Remote
Keywords
-fel
-fdl
-ffs
-prt
Figure A–2: Digital Source Files configuration file relationship to remote commands
Table A–27: “m” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Digital Source Files configuration file
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
mfel
mfsl sets the name of the Eye Limits configuration file to be used for measurements by the 270 Mb 525-line video format
on the specified input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input channel),
System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Eye Limits configuration file. This file
must be in the following directory path:
nvram0/ConfigFiles/270Mb~525-line/Eye~Limits.
VM700T> get mfsl A
System~Default
VM700T> set mfsl A Custom~File
mfdl
mfdl sets the name of the Wander Limits configuration file to be used for measurements by the 270 Mb 525-line video
format on the specified input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input
channel), System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Wander Limits configuration
file. This file must be in the following directory path:
nvram0/ConfigFiles/270Mb~525-line/Wander~Limits.
VM700T> get mfdl A
System~Default
VM700T> set mfdl A Custom~File
mffs
mffs sets the name of the Format Setup configuration file to be used for measurements by the 270 Mb 525-line video
format on the specified input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input
channel), System~Default (file name supplied with Option 1S), or the name of an existing Format Setup configuration
file. This file must be in the following directory path:
nvram0/ConfigFiles/270Mb~525-line/Format~Setup.
VM700T> get mffs A
System~Default
VM700T> set mffs A Custom~File
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–103
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–27: “m” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Digital Source Files configuration file (Cont.)
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
msrc
msrc sets the Source Name for log report titles on the specified input channel. You can use the following arguments with
this command: A or B (SDI input channel), System Default (name supplied with Option 1S), or a Source Name title of
your choice.
VM700T> get msrc A
System Default
VM700T> set msrc A Custom~Title
mprt
mprt sets the Video Printout Title for log reports on the specified input channel. You can use the following arguments
with this command: A or B (SDI input channel), Video Measurement Set (name supplied with Option 1S), or a
Video Printout Title of your choice.
VM700T> get mprt A
Video Measurement Set
VM700T> set mprt A Custom Title
“y”, “o”,“t”, and “j” Group
Keywords
These four keyword groups are channel dependent. They are used to set the
parameters of the Eye Limits file for the four video formats listed below:
The “y” group is used for the 143Mb NTSC format.
The “o” group is used for the 270Mb 525-line format.
The “t” group is used for the 270Mb 625-line format.
The “j” group is used for the 360Mb Unspec format.
Figure A–3 shows the relationship between the Eye Limits configuration file and
the group keywords. Table A–28 lists the “o” group keywords and shows
application examples using the get and set commands.
The “y”, “t”, and “j” group keywords use the same last three characters in the
keywords to perform the same function for the other three video formats.
Replace the “o” character in the listed keywords with one of the “y”, “t”, and “j”
group characters to set the signal limits in the SDI Eye Diagram application for
the video format you want to edit.
A–104
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
270Mb~525Ćline/Eye~Limits/System~Default
Digital Eye Limits 270Mb 525Ćline System Default File
Limits
Remote
Keywords
Log?
Highlight?
Low
Amplitude:
RiseĆTime:
FallĆTime:
Rise/Fall Diff:
Rise Overshoot:
Fall Overshoot:
DC Offset:
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
720
400
400
-------------500
880
1500
1500
500
10
10
500
mV
pS
pS
pS
%
%
mV
-amp
-rst
-flt
-rfd
-rov
-fov
-dco
Jitter (10Hz):
Jitter (1KHz):
yes
yes
yes
yes
0
0
250
250
pS
pS
-j10
-j1k
Consecutive error(s) before reporting:
Activate Relay:
Never
High
2
-cep
-rly
Figure A–3: Eye Limits configuration file relationship to remote commands
Table A–28: “o” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Eye Limits configuration file
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
oamp
oamp sets the Amplitude signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video
signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command:
SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (mV), and High Limit (mV). The possible values for
the Low and High Limits are 0 mV through 2000 mV in increments of 1 mV, and Undefined.
VM700T> get oamp A
no yes 720 880
VM700T> set oamp A yes yes 700 900
orst
orst sets the Rise-Time signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal
on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input
channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (ps), and High Limit (ps). The possible values for the Low and
High Limits are 0 ps through 2000 ps in increments of 1 ps, and Undefined.
VM700T> get orst A
no yes 400 1500
VM700T> set orst A yes yes 300 1200
oflt
oflt sets the Fall-Time signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal
on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input
channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (ps), and High Limit (ps). The possible values for the Low and
High Limits are 0 ps through 2000 ps in increments of 1 ps, and Undefined.
VM700T> get oflt A
no yes 400 1500
VM700T> set oflt A yes yes 300 1200
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–105
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–28: “o” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Eye Limits configuration file (Cont.)
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
orfd
orfd sets the Rise/Fall-Diff signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video
signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command:
SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (ps), and High Limit (ps). The possible values for the
Low and High Limits are 0 ps through 2000 ps in increments of 1 ps, and Undefined.
VM700T> get orfd A
no yes 0 500
VM700T> set orfd A yes yes 100 800
orov
orov sets the Rise Overshoot signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video
signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command:
SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (%), and High Limit (%). The possible values for the
Low and High Limits are 0% through 10% in increments of 1%, and Undefined.
VM700T> get orov A
no yes 0 10
VM700T> set orov A yes yes 1 8
ofov
ofov sets the Fall Overshoot signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video
signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command:
SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (%), and High Limit (%). The possible values for the
Low and High Limits are 0% through 10% in increments of 1%, and Undefined.
VM700T> get ofov A
no yes 0 10
VM700T> set ofov A yes yes 1 8
odco
odco sets the DC Offset signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal
on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input
channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (mV), and High Limit (mV). The possible values for the Low
and High Limits are –1000 mV through 1000 mV in increments of 1 mV, and Undefined.
VM700T> get odco A
no yes -500 500
VM700T> set odco A yes yes -100 100
oj10
oj10 sets the 10 Hz Jitter signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video
signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command:
SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (ps), and High Limit (ps). The possible values for the
Low and High Limits are 0 ps through 1000 ps in increments of 1 ps, and Undefined.
VM700T> get oj10 A
no yes 0 250
VM700T> set oj10 A yes yes 10 500
oj1k
oj1k sets the 1 kHz Jitter signal-limit parameters to use for eye diagram measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video
signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–3. You can use the following arguments with this command:
SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (ps), and High Limit (ps). The possible values for the
Low and High Limits are 0 ps through 1000 ps in increments of 1 ps, and Undefined.
VM700T> get oj1k A
no yes 0 250
VM700T> set oj1k A yes yes 10 500
A–106
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–28: “o” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Eye Limits configuration file (Cont.)
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
ocep
ocep sets the number of consecutive errors before log reporting for the specified input channel. You can use the
following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input channel) and the number of errors. The range of values for
the number of errors is from 1 error to 9 errors in steps of 1 error.
VM700T> get ocep A
2
VM700T> set ocep A 4
orly
orly sets the state of the Activate Relay which allows you to signal outside the VM700T that a measurement limit was
violated for the selected input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input
channel), Never, On Highlight, and On Log.
VM700T> get orly A
Never
VM700T> set orly A On Highlight
“z”, “p”,“u”, and “k”
Group Keywords
These four keyword groups are channel dependent. They are used to set the
parameters of the Wander Limits file for the four video formats listed below:
The “z” group is used for the 143Mb NTSC format.
The “p” group is used for the 270Mb 525-line format.
The “u” group is used for the 270Mb 625-line format.
The “k” group is used for the 360Mb Unspec format.
Figure A–4 shows the relationship between the Wander Limits configuration file
and the group keywords. Table A–28 lists the “p” group keywords and shows
application examples using the get and set commands.
The “z”, “u”, and “k” group keywords use the same last three characters in the
keywords to perform the same function for the other three video formats.
Replace the “p” character in the listed keywords with one of the “z”, “u”, and “k”
group characters to set the signal limits for the video format you want to edit.
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–107
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
270Mb~525Ćline/Wander~Limits/System~Default
Remote
Keywords
Digital Wander Limits 270Mb 525ĆLine System Default File
Low
Drift Rate (peak):
Frequency Offset:
Consecutive error(s) before reporting:
Activate Relay:
Never
Limits
-28.0
-2800
High
28.0
2800
2
ppb/sec
ppb
-drt
-fro
-cep
-rly
Figure A–4: Wander Limits configuration file relationship to remote commands
Table A–29: “p” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Wander Limits configuration file
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
pdrt
pdrt sets the Drift Rate wander-limit parameters to use for measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the
specified input channel. See Figure A–4. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel
(A or B), Low Limit (ppb/sec), and High Limit (ppb/sec). The possible values for the Low Limits is –999.0 ppb/sec
through 0 ppb/sec in increments of 0.1 ppb/sec, and Undefined. The possible values for the High Limits is 0 ppb/sec
through 999.0 ppb/sec in increments of 0.1 ppb/sec, and Undefined.
VM700T> get pdrt A
-28 28
VM700T> set pdrt A -40 40
pfro
pfro sets the Frequency Offset wander-limit parameters to use for measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on
the specified input channel. See Figure A–4. You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input
channel (A or B), Low Limit (ppb), and High Limit (ppb). The possible values for the Low Limits is –99990 ppb through 0
ppb in increments of 10 ppb, and Undefined. The possible values for the High Limits is 0 ppb through 99990 ppb in
increments of 10 ppb, and Undefined.
VM700T> get pfro A
-2800 2800
VM700T> set pfro A -4000 4000
pcep
pcep sets the number of consecutive errors before log reporting for the specified input channel. You can use the
following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A or B) and the number of errors. The range of values for
the number of errors is from 1 error to 9 errors in steps of 1 error.
VM700T> get pcep A
2
VM700T> set pcep A 4
prly
prly sets the state of the Activate Relay which allows you to signal outside the VM700T that a measurement limit was
violated on the selected input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input
channel), Never, On Highlight, and On Log.
VM700T> get prly A
Never
VM700T> set prly A On Highlight
A–108
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“n” and “s” Group
Keywords
These two keyword groups are channel dependent. They are used to set the
parameters of the Format Setup file for the two video formats listed below:
The “n” group is used for the 270Mb 525-line format.
The “s” group is used for the 270Mb 625-line format.
Figure A–5 on page A–112 and Figure A–6 on page A–113 show the relationship
between the Format Setup configuration file and the group keywords.
Table A–30 lists the “n” group keywords and shows application examples using
the get and set commands.
The “s” group keywords use the same last three characters in the keywords to
perform the same function for the 270Mb 625-Line video format. Replace the
“n” character in the listed keywords with the “s” group character to set the
Format Setup for the 270Mb 625-Line video format.
Table A–30: “n” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup configuration file, part 1
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
nvwh
nvwh sets the High Luminance Warning and High Chrominance Warning limit parameters to use for measurements on a
270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel (A or B). See Figure A–5. Enter the warning limits in decimal
units. The possible values for the High Luminance Warning and High Chrominance Warning limits are 0 through 1023 in
increments of 1 decimal unit. The High Luminance Warning limit must be less than or equal to the High Chrominance
Warning limit due to an application limitation.
VM700T> get nvwh A
961 986
VM700T> set nvwh A 900 1000
nvwl
nvwl sets the Low Luminance Warning and Low Chrominance Warning limit parameters to use for measurements on a
270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel (A or B). See Figure A–5. Enter the warning limits in decimal
units. The possible values for the Low Luminance Warning and Low Chrominance Warning limits are 0 through 1023 in
increments of 1 decimal unit. The Low Luminance Warning limit must be greater than or equal to the Low Chrominance
Warning limit due to an application limitation.
VM700T> get nvwl A
63 63
VM700T> set nvwl A 100 50
nskp
nskp sets the number of active video lines to skip before starting the luminance and chrominance limit checks during
measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the
following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input channel) and the number of lines to skip. The possible values
for the number of video lines to skip is 0 lines through 14 lines, in increments of 1 line.
VM700T> get nskp A
2
VM700T> set nskp A 5
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–109
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–30: “n” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup configuration file, part 1 (Cont.)
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
nlss
nlss sets the format for error detection response to a loss-of-signal error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line
video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command:
SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nlss A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nlss A no yes yes
nlsa
nlsa sets the format for error detection response to a loss-of-TRS-alignment error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nlsa A
yes yes yes
VM700T> set nlsa A no yes no
nlnl
nlnl sets the format for error detection response to a line-length error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video
signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command:
SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nlnl A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nlnl A no yes yes
nlnb
nlnb sets the format for error detection response to a blanking-length error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line
video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command:
SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nlnb A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nlnb A no yes yes
nlnv
nlnv sets the format for error detection response to a vertical-interval-length error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nlnv A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nlnv A no yes yes
nlnf
nlnf sets the format for error detection response to a field-length error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line video
signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this command:
SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nlnf A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nlnf A no yes yes
nanh
nanh sets the format for error detection response to an ancillary-data-header error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nanh A
yes yes yes
VM700T> set nanh A no yes yes
A–110
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–30: “n” keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup configuration file, part 1 (Cont.)
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
nand
nand sets the format for error detection response to an ancillary-data data error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nand A
yes yes yes
VM700T> set nand A no yes yes
nanc
nanc sets the format for error detection response to an ancillary-data checksum error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nanc A
yes yes yes
VM700T> set nanc A no yes yes
nanp
nanp sets the format for error detection response to an ancillary-data placement error during measurements on a
270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with
this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nanp A
yes yes yes
VM700T> set nanp A no yes yes
naus
naus sets the format for error detection response to a block-out-of-sequence ancillary-audio error during measurements
on a 270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments
with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get naus A
yes yes yes
VM700T> set naus A no yes yes
naui
naui sets the format for error detection response to a broken-block ancillary-audio error during measurements on a
270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with
this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get naui A
yes yes yes
VM700T> set naui A no yes yes
naus
naus sets the format for error detection response to a samples-per-frame ancillary-audio error during measurements on a
270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with
this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get naus A
yes yes yes
VM700T> set naus A no yes yes
nau5
nau5 sets the format for error detection response to a 5/5-pattern-broken ancillary-audio error during measurements on a
270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with
this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nau5 A
yes yes yes
VM700T> set nau5 A no yes yes
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–111
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
270Mb~525Ćline/Format~Setup/System~Default
Digital Format Setup 270Mb 525ĆLine System Default File
10ĆBit Only Validation Rules
Luminance
Chrominance
3ff
3ff
3ff
3ff
8/10ĆBit Validation Rules
Luminance
Chrominance
3ff
3ff
3fc
3fc
Error
High
Warning
High
Valid
Video
Warning
Low
03f
004
Error
Low
003
000
3fb
3ad
< =
> =
3fb
3cl
3fe
3fe
<same as for 8/10 bit>
03f
004
<same as for 8/10 bit>
001
001
003
000
000
000
Remote
Keywords
-vwh
-vwl
000
000
Luminance warning range must enclose chrominance warning range
(as shown by the '<=' and '>=')
Skip
0 active video lines before starting Luma/Chroma warning limits checking.
-skp
General Errors
Log?
Highlight?
Capture?
Loss of
Signal
TRS Align
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
yes
-lss
-lsa
Length Errors
Line
Blanking
Vertical Interval
Field
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
-lnl
-lnb
-lnv
-lnf
Ancillary Data Errors
Header
Data
Checksum
Placement
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
-anh
-and
-anc
-anp
Ancillary Audio Errors
Block out of Sequence
Broken Block
Samples / Frame
5 / 5 Pattern Broken
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
-aus
-aui
-aus
-au5
Misc. Errors
XY(Z)
Unused Space
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
-mix
-miu
Figure A–5: Format Setup configuration file relationship to remote commands, part 1
A–112
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Video Errors
Log?
Highlight?
Capture?
Luminance
Low
High
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
-yel
-yeh
Chrominance
Low
High
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
-cel
-ceh
Log?
Highlight?
Capture?
Luminance
Low
High
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
-ywl
-ywh
Chrominance
Low
High
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
-cwl
-cwh
Log?
Highlight?
Capture?
EDH
Full Field
Active Picture
Anc. Data
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
-ehf
-ehp
-ehd
EDA
Full Field
Active Picture
Anc. Data
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
-eaf
-eap
-ead
IDH
Full Field
Active Picture
Anc. Data
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
-ihf
-ihp
-ihd
IDA
Full Field
Active Picture
Anc. Data
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
no
no
-iaf
-iap
-iad
UES
yes
yes
no
-ues
EDH Misplaced
EDH Missing
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
no
-ems
-epl
FIFO Overflow
yes
yes
no
-ues
Video Warnings
EDH Errors
Consecutive error(s) before logging: 2
Activate Relay:
On Capture
-lin
-rly
Figure A–6: Format Setup configuration file relationship to remote commands, part 2
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–113
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–31: “n” Group keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup configuration file, part 2
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
nmix
nmix sets the format for error detection response to an XY(Z) miscellaneous error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nmix A
yes no no
VM700T> set nmix A yes yes yes
nmiu
nmiu sets the format for error detection response to an unused-space miscellaneous error during measurements on a
270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–5. You can use the following arguments with
this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nmiu A
yes no no
VM700T> set nmiu A yes yes yes
nyel
nyel sets the format for error detection response to a video low-luminance error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nyel A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nyel A yes yes yes
nyeh
nyeh sets the format for error detection response to a video high-luminance error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nyeh A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nyeh A yes yes yes
ncel
ncel sets the format for error detection response to a video low-chrominance error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get ncel A
yes yes no
VM700T> set ncel A yes yes yes
nceh
nceh sets the format for error detection response to a video high-chrominance error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nceh A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nceh A yes yes yes
nywl
nywl sets the format for error detection response to a video low-luminance warning during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nywl A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nywl A yes yes yes
A–114
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–31: “n” Group keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup configuration file, part 2 (Cont.)
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
nywh
nywh sets the format for error detection response to a video high-luminance warning during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nywh A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nywh A yes yes yes
ncwl
ncwl sets the format for error detection response to a video low-chrominance warning during measurements on a
270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with
this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get ncwl A
yes yes no
VM700T> set ncwl A yes yes yes
ncwh
ncwh sets the format for error detection response to a video high-chrominance warning during measurements on a
270 Mb 525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with
this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get ncwh A
yes yes no
VM700T> set ncwh A yes yes yes
nehf
nehf sets the format for error detection response to an EDH full-field error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line
video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command:
SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nehf A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nehf A yes yes yes
nehp
nehp sets the format for error detection response to an EDH active-picture error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nehp A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nehp A yes yes yes
nehd
nehd sets the format for error detection response to an EDH ancillary-data error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nehd A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nehd A yes yes yes
neaf
neaf sets the format for error detection response to an EDA full-field error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line
video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command:
SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get neaf A
yes yes no
VM700T> set neaf A yes yes yes
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–115
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–31: “n” Group keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup configuration file, part 2 (Cont.)
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
neap
neap sets the format for error detection response to an EDA active-picture error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get neap A
yes yes no
VM700T> set neap A yes yes yes
nead
nead sets the format for error detection response to an EDA ancillary-data error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nead A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nead A yes yes yes
nihf
nihf sets the format for error detection response to an IDH full-field error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line
video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command:
SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nihf A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nihf A yes yes yes
nihp
nihp sets the format for error detection response to an IDH active-picture error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nihp A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nihp A yes yes yes
nihd
nihd sets the format for error detection response to an IDH ancillary-data error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nihd A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nihd A yes yes yes
niaf
niaf sets the format for error detection response to an IDA full-field error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line
video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command:
SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get niaf A
yes yes no
VM700T> set niaf A yes yes yes
niap
niap sets the format for error detection response to an IDA active-picture error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get niap A
yes yes no
VM700T> set niap A yes yes yes
A–116
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–31: “n” Group keywords: 270Mb 525-Line Format Setup configuration file, part 2 (Cont.)
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
niad
niad sets the format for error detection response to an IDA ancillary-data error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get niad A
yes yes no
VM700T> set niad A yes yes yes
nues
nues sets the format for error detection response to an UES EDH error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line
video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command:
SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nues A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nues A yes yes yes
nems
nems sets the format for error detection response to an EDH misplaced error during measurements on a 270 Mb
525-line video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this
command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nems A
yes yes yes
VM700T> set nems A yes yes no
nepl
nepl sets the format for error detection response to an EDH missing error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line
video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command:
SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nepl A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nepl A yes yes yes
nffo
nffo sets the format for error detection response to a FIFO overflow error during measurements on a 270 Mb 525-line
video signal on the specified input channel. See Figure A–6. You can use the following arguments with this command:
SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), and Capture (yes/no).
VM700T> get nlin A
yes yes no
VM700T> set nlin A yes yes yes
ncep
ncep sets the number of consecutive errors before log reporting for the specified input channel. You can use the
following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), and number of errors. The range of values for the
number of errors is from 1 error to 9 errors in steps of 1 error.
VM700T> get ncep A
2
VM700T> set ncep A 4
nrly
nrly sets the state of the Activate Relay which allows you to signal outside the VM700T that a measurement limit was
violated on the selected input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input
channel), Never, On Highlight, and On Log.
VM700T> get nrly A
Never
VM700T> set nrly A On Highlight
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–117
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“a” Group Keywords
“a” group keywords are channel dependent. They are used to set the digital audio
setup parameters. Figure A–7 shows the relationship between the Digital Audio
Setup configuration file and the “a” group keywords. Table A–32 lists the “a”
group keywords and shows application examples using the get and set
commands.
Digital_Audio~Setup/System~Default
Remote
Keywords
Digital Audio Limits System Default File
Highlight?
Level:
Frequency:
THD + N:
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
-------------
-------------
dBr
Hz
%
alvl
afrq
athd
Level Diff (L-R):
Phase
(L-R):
yes
yes
yes
yes
---------
---------
dB
degrees
alvd
aphd
dBr Reference:
-20 dBFS
Consecutive error(s) before logging:
Activate Relay:
Never
Low
Limits
Log?
High
adrf
acep
arly
2
Figure A–7: Digital Audio Setup configuration file relationship to remote commands
Table A–32: “a” keywords: Digital Audio Setup configuration file
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
alvl
alvl sets the audio level limits to be used for measurements on the specified input channel. See Figure A–7. You can use
the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no), Low Limit (dBr),
and High Limit (dBr). The possible values for the Low Level and High Level limits are –99 dBr through 99 dBr in
increments of 1 dBr, and Undefined.
VM700T> get alvl A
no yes -50 -ā-āVM700T> set alvl A yes yes undef 50
afrq
afrq sets the audio frequency limits to be used for measurements on the specified input channel. See Figure A–7.
You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no),
Low Limit (Hz), and High Limit (Hz). The possible values for the Low Frequency and High Frequency limits are 20 Hz
through 20000 Hz in increments of 1 Hz, and Undefined.
VM700T> get afrq A
no yes 0 -ā-āVM700T> set afrq A yes yes undef 1000
A–118
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
Table A–32: “a” keywords: Digital Audio Setup configuration file (Cont.)
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
athd
athd sets the audio THD + N limits to be used for measurements on the specified input channel. See Figure A–7.
You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no),
Low Limit (%), and High Limit (%). The possible values for the Low THD + N and High THD + N limits are 0% through
100% in increments of 0.01%, and Undefined. You need only enter a new value to the most significant decimal point of
the percentage you want to enter. Returned values are to two decimal places.
VM700T> get athd A
no yes 0.00 -ā-āVM700T> set athd A yes yes undef 10.1
alvd
alvd sets the audio level difference limits to be used for measurements on the specified input channel. See Figure A–7.
You can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no),
Low Limit (dB), and High Limit (dB). The possible values for the Low Level and High Level limits are –99 dB through
99 dB in increments of 1 dB, and Undefined.
VM700T> get alvd A
no yes -50 -ā-āVM700T> set alvd A yes yes undef 50
aphd
aphd sets the audio phase limits to be used for measurements on the specified input channel. See Figure A–7. You
can use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), Log (yes/no), Highlight (yes/no),
Low Limit (degrees), and High Limit (degrees). The possible values for the Low Phase and High Phase limits are
–180 degrees through 180 degrees in increments of 1 degree, and Undefined.
VM700T> get aphd A
no yes -50 -ā-āVM700T> set aphd A yes yes undef 50
adrf
adrf sets the audio dBr reference to be used for measurements on the specified input channel. See Figure A–7. You can
use the following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), and dBr reference. The range for the dBr
reference is –99 dBFS through 0 dBFS in increments of 1 dBFS.
VM700T> get adrf A
-20
VM700T> set adrf A -50
acep
acep sets the number of consecutive errors before log reporting for the specified input channel. You can use the
following arguments with this command: SDI input channel (A/B), and number of errors. The range of values for the
number of errors is from 1 error to 9 errors in steps of 1 error.
VM700T> get acep A
2
VM700T> set acep A 4
arly
arly sets the state of the Activate Relay which allows you to signal outside the VM700T that a measurement limit was
violated on the selected input channel. You can use the following arguments with this command: A or B (SDI input
channel), Never, On Highlight, and On Log.
VM700T> get arly A
Never
VM700T> set arly A On Highlight
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
A–119
Appendix A: Get/Set Keywords
“G” Group Keywords
Option 1S adds two commands to the existing “G” group keywords of the
VM700T measurement set. Table A–33 describes the function of the two new
“G” group keywords.
Table A–33: Option 1S “G” keywords: Remote configuration
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
GDSR
GDSR sets the active channel (A or B) for the measured digital video source. The argument is an integer value of 0 or 1.
Entering a 0 sets the digital active video source to Channel A, and entering a 1 sets the digital active video source to
Channel B.
VM700T> get GDSR
0
VM700T> set GDSR 1
GMMO
GMMO sets major operation mode of the VM700T measurement set to either analog or digital. The argument is an
integer value of 0 or 1. Entering a 0 sets the operation mode to Analog, and entering a 1 sets the operation mode to
Digital.
VM700T> get GMMO
0
VM700T> set GMMO 1
Table A–34 describes the function of two existing “G” group keywords (from the
analog VM700T) that can be used with Option 1S.
Table A–34: Analog “G” keywords: Remote configuration
Keyword
Description and get/set command examples
GOOL
GOOL sets the value of the global out-of-limits flag. The set command takes one argument, 0 (false) or 1 (true). This
parameter is set to 1 whenever a measurement application finds a value outside of its lower-to-upper limit range. You
can test the status of the global out-of-limits flag with the ?GOOL command. You must reset the global out-of-limits flag
to 0 explicitly within a function; it does not return to 0 when tested.
VM700T> get GOOL
0
VM700T> set GOOL 1
GRLY
GRLY sets the state of the Activate Relay which allows you to signal outside the VM700T that a measurement limit was
violated. You can use this command in conjunction with the GOOL command to activate the Alarm relay. You can use
the following arguments with this command: 0 (open relay) or 1 (close relay).
VM700T> get GRLY
0
VM700T> set GRLY 1
A–120
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
This chapter shows the results file produced by each VM700T application.
The sample files shown in this chapter are all produced by executing the
following sequence of commands:
execute application
getresults
show application
The VM700T applications are grouped as shown in Table B–1 through
Table B–8.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table B–1: NTSC/PAL measurements
Auto
GroupDelay~SinX_X
MultiBurst
Bar~LineTime
H_Blank
Noise~Spectrum
Bounce
H_Timing
SCH_Phase
Burst~Frequency
ICPM
ShortTime~Distortion
ChromLum~GainDelay
Jitter
TwoField
Chrominance~AMPM
Jitter~Long_Time
VITS~ID (NTSC only)
Chrominance~FreqResp
(NTSC only)
K_Factor
V_Blank
Chrominance~NonLinearity
Level~Meter
Video~Standard
ColorBar (NTSC)/
ColourBar (PAL)
Line~Frequency
DGDP
Luminance~NonLinearity
Table B–2: Echo/Rounding (Option 1G) measurements
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Echo
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Rounding~Errors
B–1
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table B–3: Serial Digital (Option 1S) measurements
SDI_AncData
SDI_EyeDiagram
SDI_Picture
SDI_AncDist
SDI_Format
SDI_Wander
SDI_AudioFormat
SDI_IC_Timing
SDI_Waveform
SDI_AudioMeas
SDI_Jitter
SDI_AV_Timing
SDI_Lightning
Table B–4: Teletext (Option 20) measurements
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Teletext
SoundInSync
Table B–5: Camera Testing (Option 21) measurements
Colorimetry
Defects
Fixed_Pattern~Noise
Frequency~Response
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table B–6: Video Wander (Option 22) measurement
Wander
Table B–7: Component (Option 30) measurements
Bowtie
Component~LevelMeter
Component~Vector
Component~Channel_Delay
Component~Multiburst
Lightning
Component~ColorBar
Component~Noise
Component~K_Factor
Component~NonLinearity
Table B–8: Audio (Option 40 and 41) measurements
B–2
Audio~Analyzer
Calibrate~AudioBoard
Audio~Monitor
Identify~Audio_Hardware
Audio~Spectrum
Multitone
View_Audio~Auto_Test
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
NTSC/PAL Results Files
Note that results files from NTSC measurements frequently contain a line in the
header that reads “Field = X Line = Y”. The corresponding line in results files
from PAL measurements reads simply “Line = Y”. Except for this line, NTSC
and PAL measurement results files do not differ, unless otherwise noted.
Auto (NTSC)
Channel A
Source System Default
Fri Aug 30 16:42:20 1996
VM700T Video Measurement Set
System Default
Violated Limits
Lower Upper
Source ID
---Not Found
Bar Top
------ % Carr **
10.0
15.0 ZC Pulse Unselected
Blanking Level
------ % Carr **
72.5
77.5 ZC Pulse Unselected
Bar Amplitude
100.5 IRE
Sync Amplitude
40.1 % Bar
Blanking Variation ------ % Carr
ZC Pulse Unselected
Blanking Variation
0.2 % Bar
Sync Variation
------ % Carr **
0.0
5.0 ZC Pulse Unselected
Sync Variation
0.1 % Bar
Burst Amplitude
100.3 % Sync
Burst Amplitude
40.2 % Bar
FCC H Blanking
11.24 us
FCC Sync Width
4.84 us
FCC Sync-Setup
9.66 us
FCC Front Porch
1.57 us
Sync to Burst End
7.86 us
*
5.00
7.80
Breezeway Width
0.54 us
FCC Burst Width
8.9 Cycles
Sync Risetime
141
ns
Sync Falltime
140
ns
RS-170A H Blanking
11.42 us
**
10.65 11.15
RS-170A Sync Width
4.70 us
RS-170A Sync-Setup
9.59 us
**
9.28
9.52
RS-170A Front Porch
1.65 us
**
1.38
1.62
Sync to Burst Start
5.31 us
RS-170A Burst Width
9.0 Cycles
V Blank 4 IRE F1
21.0 Lines
*
18.5
20.5
V Blank 4 IRE F2
21.0 Lines
*
18.5
20.5
V Blank 20 IRE F1
21.0 Lines
*
20.1
20.9
V Blank 20 IRE F2
21.1 Lines
*
20.1
20.9
FCC Equalizer
51.0 % S.W.
FCC Serration
4.51 us
RS-170A Equalizer
2.33 us
RS-170A Serration
4.66 us
VIRS Setup
7.5 % Bar
VIRS Luminance Ref
50.1 % Bar
VIRS Chroma Ampl
99.9 % Burst
VIRS Chroma Ampl
40.1 % Bar
VIRS Chroma Phase
-0.1 Deg
Line Time Distortion
0.1 %
Pulse/Bar Ratio
99.1 %
2T Pulse K-Factor
0.2 % Kf
IEEE-511 ST Dist
------ % SD
**
0.0
3.0 No NTC-7 Comp VITS
S/N NTC7 Unweighted
77.2 dB
RMS
S/N NTC7 Lum-Wghtd
80.6 dB
RMS
S/N Unif Unweighted
76.7 dB
RMS
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
B–3
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
S/N Unif Lum-Wghtd
80.7
S/N Periodic
-----S/N.2 NTC7 Unwghtd
78.0
S/N.2 NTC7 Lum-Wghtd 82.1
S/N.2 Unif Unwghtd
77.4
S/N.2 Unif Lum-Wghtd 82.3
Chroma-Lum Delay
1.7
Chroma-Lum Gain
100.3
Differential Gain
0.21
Differential Phase
0.09
Lum Non-Linearity
0.39
Relative Burst Gain
0.00
Relative Burst Phase -0.02
FCC Multiburst Flag -----FCC Multiburst Flag -----FCC MB Packet #1
-----FCC MB Packet #2
-----FCC MB Packet #3
-----FCC MB Packet #4
-----FCC MB Packet #5
-----FCC MB Packet #6
-----NTC7 Multiburst Flag -----NTC7 Multiburst Flag 100.0
NTC7 MB Packet #1
49.9
NTC7 MB Packet #2
49.8
NTC7 MB Packet #3
50.0
NTC7 MB Packet #4
50.2
NTC7 MB Packet #5
50.1
NTC7 MB Packet #6
50.1
NTC7 20 IRE Chroma
20.0
NTC7 80 IRE Chroma
79.9
NTC7 Chr NL Phase
0.2
NTC7 Chr-Lum Intmd
0.1
ICPM
-----SCH Phase
-3.1
Field Time Dist
------FCC Color Bars
Amplitude Error
( % )
Yellow
0.1
Cyan
0.2
Green
0.2
Magenta
-0.1
Red
0.1
Blue
0.3
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
ns
%
%
Deg
%
%
Deg
% Carr
% Bar
% Flag
% Flag
% Flag
% Flag
% Flag
% Flag
% Carr
% Bar
% Flag
% Flag
% Flag
% Flag
% Flag
% Flag
IRE
IRE
Deg
IRE
Deg
Deg
% Bar
RMS
57.0 ------ Random >> Periodic
RMS
RMS
RMS
RMS
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
10.0
90.0
57.1
56.2
54.8
53.5
56.0
15.0
110.0
63.0
64.2
65.6
67.3
64.3
**
10.0
15.0
At
At
At
At
At
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
ZC
48% APL
48% APL
48% APL
48% APL
48% APL
FCC Multiburst
FCC Multiburst
FCC Multiburst
FCC Multiburst
FCC Multiburst
FCC Multiburst
FCC Multiburst
FCC Multiburst
Pulse Unselected
(Ref 40 IRE Chr)
(Ref 40 IRE Chr)
**
-3.0
(Ref Lum Pedestal)
3.0 ZC Pulse Unselected
**
-3.00
3.00 Not Found
Phase Error
( Deg )
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.2
Chr/Lum Ratio Error
( % )
-0.1
-0.1
-0.0
-0.5
-0.2
-0.3
Auto (PAL)
Channel B
Source System Default
Fri Aug 30 16:45:12 1996
VM700T Video Measurement Set
System Default
Violated Limits
Lower Upper
Source ID
---Not Found
Luminance Bar Ampl ------ mV
**
600.0 800.0 Bar Not Found
Luminance Bar Ampl ------ % Carr **
55.0
73.0 Bar Not Found
Lum Bar Ampl Err
------ %
**
-10.0
10.0 Bar Not Found
Line Time Distortion ------ % Bar
**
0.0
10.0 Bar Not Found
Bar Tilt (Rec 569) ------ % Bar
**
-10.0
10.0 Bar Not Found
Bar Rise Time
------ ns
**
160.0 240.0 Bar Not Found
Baseline Distortion ------ % Bar
**
-2.0
2.0 Bar Not Found
Blanking Level
------ % Carr **
69.0
79.0 Bar Not Found
B–4
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
Sync/Bar (Rel 3/7)
Sync to Bar Top
Pulse/Bar Ratio Err
2T Pulse K-factor
C/L Gn Err (Mod Bar)
Chr/Lum Delay Ineq
C/L Gn Err (Mod Pls)
Lum. Nonlin. Dist.
Chrom Ref Ampl Err
Pk-Pk Diff Gain
Peak Diff Gain
Pk-Pk Diff Phase
Peak Diff Phase
Chr/Lum Intermod
Sync Amplitude
Sync Ampl Error
Residual Carrier
Sync-to-Burst Start
Burst Duration
Burst Duration
Burst Amplitude
Burst Ampl Error
Burst Ampl Diff
Burst Quad Error
SCH Phase
Sync Duration
Sync Rise Time
Sync Fall Time
Front Porch
Line Blanking
Broad Pulse Sep
Equalizing Pulse
Multiburst Flag
Multiburst Flag
MB Packet #1
MB Packet #2
MB Packet #3
MB Packet #4
MB Packet #5
MB Packet #6
CCIR LF Error
50-550 Hz LF Error
10-1000 Hz LF Error
S/N Unweighted (567)
S/N Lum-wgtd (567)
S/N Chr-wgtd
S/N Periodic
S/N Unweighted (569)
S/N Lum-wgtd (569)
S/N.2 Unwgtd (567)
S/N.2 Lum-wgtd (567)
S/N.2 Chr-wgtd
S/N.2 Unwgtd (569)
S/N.2 Lum-wgtd (569)
ICPM (Absolute)
ICPM (Rel Blanking)
Field Time Dist
----------------------------------------------------------------------302.2
0.7
-----5.51
2.18
9.7
307.7
2.6
0.5
-0.2
5.8
4.68
251.3
251.2
------------4.66
2.34
----------------------------------------0.1
0.2
0.1
79.2
84.9
83.6
72.0
80.7
88.2
75.0
78.4
72.6
76.9
84.0
----------------
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
%
mV
% Bar
% Kf
% Bar
ns
% Bar
%
%
%
%
Deg
Deg
% Bar
mV
%
% Carr
us
us
Cycles
mV
%
%
Deg
Deg
us
ns
ns
us
us
us
us
% Bar
mV
% Flag
% Flag
% Flag
% Flag
% Flag
% Flag
% Bar
% Bar
% Bar
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB
Deg
Deg
%
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
80.0 120.0 Bar Not Found
870.0 1130.0 Bar Not Found
-20.0
20.0 Pulse Not Found
0.0
4.0 Pulse Not Found
-20.0
20.0 Not Found
-50.0
50.0 Pulse Not Found
-20.0
20.0 Not Found
-----10.0 No Luminance Steps
-10.0
10.0 Not Found
-----20.0 Not Found
-----20.0 Not Found
-----20.0 Not Found
-----20.0 Not Found
-10.0
10.0 Not Found
**
7.5
15.0 Bar Not Found
**
**
0.50
9.10
3.00 No Blanking Edge
16.00 No Blanking Edge
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
**
50.0
350.0
80.0
80.0
80.0
80.0
80.0
80.0
**
**
**
-20.0
-20.0
-2.0
70.0
490.0
120.0
120.0
120.0
120.0
120.0
120.0
No Multiburst
No Multiburst
No Multiburst
No Multiburst
No Multiburst
No Multiburst
No Multiburst
No Multiburst
No Bar - Ref. 700 mV
No Bar - Ref. 700 mV
No Bar - Ref. 700 mV
No Bar - Ref. 700 mV
No Bar - Ref. 700 mV
No Bar - Ref. 700 mV
No Bar - Ref. 700 mV
No Bar - Ref. 700 mV
No Bar - Ref. 700 mV
No Bar - Ref. 700 mV
No Bar - Ref. 700 mV
No Bar - Ref. 700 mV
No Bar - Ref. 700 mV
No Bar - Ref. 700 mV
20.0 No Luminance Steps
20.0 No Luminance Steps
2.0 Not Found
B–5
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
Bar~LineTime (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:00:05
Bar & LineTime
Waveform->FCC Composite
Field = 1 Line = 18
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Bar Level(Ref. b1)
99.5 IRE
Bar Level(Back Porch)
99.6 IRE
Sync Level
40.0 IRE
Sync to Bar Top
139.6 IRE
Sync/Bar Ratio
100.5 %
LineTime Dist (Rec. 567) 0.1 %
Bar Tilt (Rec. 569)
0.1 %
Bar Width
18.0 u sec
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Bounce (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 21 08:52:53
Bounce
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------(High APL)
Settling Time
0.0 sec
Blanking Dev. (+)
0.2 %
Blanking Dev. (-)
-0.2 %
Blanking Dev. (P-P)
0.4 %
Sync Amplitude
40.0 IRE
Sync Amp. Dev. (+)
0.5 %
Sync Amp. Dev. (-)
-0.4 %
Sync Amp. Dev. (P-P)
0.9 %
Bounce Amplitude
100.1 IRE
Bounce Amp. Dev. (+)
0.1 %
Bounce Amp. Dev. (-)
-0.1 %
Bounce Amp. Dev. (P-P)
0.3 %
(Low APL)
Settling Time
0.0 sec
Blanking Dev. (+)
0.1 %
Blanking Dev. (-)
-0.2 %
Blanking Dev. (P-P)
0.3 %
Sync Amplitude
39.9 IRE
Sync Amp. Dev. (+)
0.6 %
Sync Amp. Dev. (-)
-0.6 %
Sync Amp. Dev. (P-P)
1.1 %
(High,Low APL)
Blank Level Diff.
0.1 %
Sync Amp. Diff
-0.1 %
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Burst~Frequency (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:03:45
Burst Frequency Measurement
(Ref. Ch-B Burst)
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Burst Frequency Error
-0.2 Hz
----------------------------------------------------------------------
B–6
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
ChromLum~GainDelay (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:04:22
Chrom/Lum Gain Delay
Waveform->FCC Composite
Field = 1 Line = 18
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Chroma Gain
92.5 %
Chroma Delay
-3.7 n sec
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Chrominance~AMPM (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:04:59
Chrominance AMPM
Waveform->appropriate
Full Field (Both Fields)
Band width 100Hz to 500kHz
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------AM Noise
-64.3 dB rms
PM Noise
-64.2 dB rms
---------------------------------------------------------------------(0 dB = 714 mV p-p with AGC for 100% Chrominance Level)
Chrominance~FreqResp (NTSC only)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:06:41
Chrominance Freq Resp
Waveform->FCC Multi Burst
Field = 1 Line = 50
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------0 dB = Packet #3
56.4 IRE
Packet #1 0.5 Mhz
0.15 dB
Packet #2 1.2 Mhz
0.10 dB
Packet #3 2.0 Mhz
0.00 dB
Packet #4 3.0 Mhz
-5.88 dB
*
-2.00
1.00
Packet #5 4.1 Mhz
-5.14 dB
*
-3.00
1.00
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Chrominance~NonLinearity (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:07:20
Chrominance NonLinearity
Waveform->Mod 3 Step
Field = 1 Line = 50
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Chroma Amp (Packet 1)
1.4 %
Chroma Amp (Packet 2)
0.0 Ref.
Chroma Amp (Packet 3)
-0.6 %
Chroma Phase (Packet 1)
-0.7 deg.
Chroma Phase (Packet 2)
0.0 Ref.
Chroma Phase (Packet 3)
-0.4 deg.
Chroma Intermod. (Packet 1)
0.2 %
Chroma Intermod. (Packet 2)
0.1 %
Chroma Intermod. (Packet 3)
-0.1 %
----------------------------------------------------------------------
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
B–7
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
ColorBar (NTSC & PAL)
Note that the name of this measurement (according to the results file) is
“ColorBar” for NTSC and “ColourBar” for PAL.
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:07:45
ColorBar
Waveform->FCC Color Bar
Field = 1 Line = 50
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Luma Level (Gray)
95.2 IRE
Luma Level (Yellow)
64.3 IRE
Luma Level (Cyan)
50.7 IRE
Luma Level (Green)
42.8 IRE
*
43.5
53.2
Luma Level (Magenta)
30.0 IRE
*
32.3
39.5
Luma Level (Red)
22.1 IRE
*
25.5
31.1
Luma Level (Blue)
8.2 IRE
*
13.6
16.7
Luma Level (Black)
0.1 IRE
*
6.7
8.3
Chroma Level (Gray)
0.1 IRE
Chroma Level (Yellow)
60.1 IRE
Chroma Level (Cyan)
86.3 IRE
Chroma Level (Green)
81.4 IRE
Chroma Level (Magenta)
81.7 IRE
Chroma Level (Red)
87.4 IRE
Chroma Level (Blue)
61.8 IRE
Chroma Level (Black)
0.0 IRE
Chroma Phase (Yellow)
166.7 deg
Chroma Phase (Cyan)
283.5 deg
Chroma Phase (Green)
240.9 deg
Chroma Phase (Magenta)
60.9 deg
Chroma Phase (Red)
103.5 deg
Chroma Phase (Blue)
347.0 deg
----------------------------------------------------------------------
DGDP (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:08:06
Differential Gain & Phase
Waveform->NTC-7 Composite
Field = 2 Line = 18
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Differential Gain (min) -6.10 %
*
-5.00
5.00
Differential Gain (max)
0.79 %
Differential Gain (p-p)
6.83 %
Differential Phase (min) -1.41 deg
Differential Phase (max) 1.02 deg
Differential Phase (p-p) 2.43 deg
----------------------------------------------------------------------
B–8
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
GroupDelay~SinX_X (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:08:52
Group Delay & Gain vs Frequency (SinX/X)
Waveform->Sin X/X
Field = 2 Line = 44
Reference Frequency at 0.20 MHz
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Amplitude (0.5 MHz)
-0.0 dB
Amplitude (1.0 MHz)
-0.1 dB
Amplitude (2.5 MHz)
-0.2 dB
Amplitude (3.0 MHz)
-0.2 dB
Amplitude (3.6 MHz)
-0.4 dB
Amplitude (4.0 MHz)
-0.6 dB
*
-0.5
0.5
Amplitude (4.2 MHz)
-0.6 dB
GroupDelay (0.5 MHz)
-5.5 n sec
GroupDelay (1.0 MHz)
15.9 n sec
*
-15.0
15.0
GroupDelay (2.5 MHz)
2.9 n sec
GroupDelay (3.0 MHz)
3.2 n sec
GroupDelay (3.6 MHz)
19.3 n sec
*
-15.0
15.0
GroupDelay (4.0 MHz)
13.8 n sec
GroupDelay (4.2 MHz)
-6.5 n sec
Cursor (3.58 MHz)
-0.4 dB
19.3 n sec
----------------------------------------------------------------------
H_Blank (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:09:28
H_Blank 4 IRE (Field 1) (Line 22 to 260)
---------------------------------------------------------------------H Blank Start
-1.69 u sec
H Blank End
9.47 u sec
H Blank Width
11.15 u sec
----------------------------------------------------------------------
H_Timing (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:09:50
H Timing (RS-170A)
Field = 2 Line = 44
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Sync Rise Time
148.8 n sec
Sync Fall Time
143.0 n sec
Sync Width
4.71 u sec
Sync Level
40.9 IRE
Burst Level
39.2 IRE
Sync to Burst Start
5.31 u sec
Burst Width
9.0 cycles
Front Porch
1.70 u sec
Sync to SetUp
9.48 u sec
----------------------------------------------------------------------
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
B–9
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
ICPM (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:10:27
ICPM
Field = 2 Line = 44
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Min Angle
= -67.71 degrees
*
-5.0
5.0
Max Angle
= 66.33 degrees
*
-5.0
5.0
Pk-Pk Angle
= 134.04 degrees
(Absolute)
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Jitter (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:10:50
Jitter Measurement (Line 20 to 250)
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Peak to Peak Jitter
4.2 n sec
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Jitter~Long_Time (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:11:20
Jitter Long Time Measurement Frequency Lock Speed
1 sec
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Peak to Peak Jitter
0.006 u sec
----------------------------------------------------------------------
K_Factor (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:11:49
2T Pulse K Factor
Waveform->FCC Composite
Field = 1 Line = 18
Graticule EIA-2T
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------K-2T
0.3 % KF
K-PB
-0.1 % KF
PB Ratio
99.6 %
HAD
254.9 n sec
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Level~Meter (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Dec 20 15:57:43
Level Meter
Waveform->FCC Multi Burst
Field = 1 Line = 100
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Level(b-a)
288.3 mV
---------------------------------------------------------------------a <-- 6.5 u sec
b <-- 35.5 u sec
B–10
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
Line~Frequency (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:12:03
Line Frequency Measurement
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Line Frequency Error
-0.007 %
Line Frequency
15.733 kHz
Field Frequency
59.94 Hz
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Luminance~NonLinearity (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:12:17
Luma Non Linearity
Waveform->FCC Composite
Field = 1 Line = 18
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------LumaNonLinearity (p-p)
3.3 %
----------------------------------------------------------------------
MultiBurst (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:12:40
Multi Burst
Waveform->FCC Multi Burst
Field = 1 Line = 17
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------0 dB = 60 % of Flag
101.9 IRE
Packet #1 0.50 MHz
0.15 dB
Packet #2 1.25 MHz
0.10 dB
Packet #3 2.00 MHz
0.04 dB
Packet #4 3.00 MHz
-0.06 dB
Packet #5 3.58 MHz
-0.24 dB
Packet #6 4.10 MHz
-0.37 dB
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Noise~Spectrum (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:13:50
Noise Spectrum
Waveform->Pedestal
Field = 1 Line = 10
Band width 100kHz to 5.0MHz (SC trap) (Tilt Null)
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Noise Level
-60.3 dB rms
Cursor 1
-70.0 dB p-p
at 1.96 MHz
Cursor 2
-107.2 dB p-p
at 3.58 MHz -37.2 dB Diff
Noise Area in Cursors
-66.3 dB rms
----------------------------------------------------------------------
SCH_Phase (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:14:36
SCH Phase
Average off
------------------------------------------------------------------------SCH Phase
-2.3 deg
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
B–11
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
ShortTime~Distortion (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:15:07
Short Time Distortion
Waveform->NTC-7 Composite
Field = 2 Line = 18
Graticule IEEE-511
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Rising Edge
0.7 % SD
Rise Time
131.5 nSec
*
120.0
130.0
Falling Edge
0.9 % SD
Fall Time
130.0 nSec
----------------------------------------------------------------------
TwoField (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:15:37
TwoField
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Field Time Dist
13.1 %
---------------------------------------------------------------------APL = 51.8 %
Slow Clamp at Back Porch
Luminance at (35.0 usec), Sync & Back Porch are displayed
VITS~ID (NTSC only)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:16:09
Signal ID (System Line)
Waveform->NTC-7 Composite
Field = 2 Line = 18
---------------------------------------------------------------------Field 1
Field 2
Line 15 --> GCR 8 Fields Seq.
Line 15 --> GCR 8 Fields Seq.
Line 16 --> VIRS
Line 16 --> Sin X/X
Line 17 --> FCC Multi Burst
Line 17 --> NTC-7 Combination
Line 18 --> FCC Composite
Line 18 --> NTC-7 Composite
Line 19 --> Pedestal
Line 19 --> Red Field
Line 20 --> Luminance Bar
Line 20 --> Mod Pedestal F-line
----------------------------------------------------------------------
V_Blank (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:16:49
V Timing Measurement
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Equalizer Pulse
2.33 u sec
Equalizer Pulse 10%
2.47 u sec
Serration Pulse
4.66 u sec
Serration Pulse 10%
4.51 u sec
----------------------------------------------------------------------
B–12
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
Video~Standard (NTSC & PAL)
Video Standard
Fri Aug 30 16:17:56
---------------------------------------------------------------------Source A: NTSC
Source B: NTSC
Source C: PAL
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Option 1G (Echo/Rounding) Results Files
Echo (NTSC & PAL)
Echo Application Results: Fri Aug 30 16:33:33
Channel A
---------------------------------------------------------------------Cursor Time
percent of Peak
dB rel Curve 1
1
406 nsec
0.14
-36.96
2
605 nsec
0.00
-129.50
Rounding~Errors (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:33:59
Rounding Errors
Waveform->Pulse
Line = 96
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------(From 0.40 uS to 1.00 uS)
Rounding of White
0.3 %
Rounding of Black
0.0 %
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Option 1S (Serial Digital) Results Files
SDI_AncData
Measurement Results
Channel A
Tue Mar 24 13:02:30
SDI_AncData
270Mb 525-line
Validate 8/10-Bit
Luminance Legal Range: 040-3ac
Chrominance Legal Range: 040-3c0
---------------------------------------------------------------------Line
17
----------------------------------------------------------------------
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
B–13
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
SDI_AncDist
Measurement Results
Channel A
Tue Mar 24 13:03:48
SDI_AncDist
270Mb 525-line
Samples
Show All
---------------------------------------------------------------------Frame Total
32
Maximum
16
Minimum
0
----------------------------------------------------------------------
SDI_AudioFormat
Measurement Results
Channel A
Tue Mar 24 13:11:54
SDI_AudioFormat
270Mb 525-line
Source Embedded, Group: 1, Channel: 1 & 2
Channel Status
Data Byte
Status
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Ch. 1 Channel use
1
0
professional
Ch. 1 Data use
0
0
audio
Ch. 1 Emphasis
110
0
50/15 us
Ch. 1 Locking of source
0
0
locked
Ch. 1 Sample frequency
01
0
48 kHz
Ch. 1 Channel mode
0001
1
2-channel
Ch. 1 User bits mode
0001
1 192-bit blocks
Ch. 1 AUX bits use
000
2
not indicated
Ch. 1 Audio word length
101
2
20 bits
Ch. 1 Reference signal
00
4
not a ref.
Ch. 1 Origin
80808080
6
Ch. 1 Destination
80808080
10
Ch. 1 Sample number
0000
14
0
Ch. 1 Time of day
0000
18
00:00:00
Ch. 1 Block CRC
01010101
23
is valid
Ch. 2 Channel use
1
0
professional
Ch. 2 Data use
0
0
audio
Ch. 2 Emphasis
110
0
50/15 us
Ch. 2 Locking of source
0
0
locked
Ch. 2 Sample frequency
01
0
48 kHz
Ch. 2 Channel mode
0001
1
2-channel
Ch. 2 User bits mode
0001
1 192-bit blocks
Ch. 2 AUX bits use
000
2
not indicated
Ch. 2 Audio word length
101
2
20 bits
Ch. 2 Reference signal
00
4
not a ref.
Ch. 2 Origin
80808080
6
Ch. 2 Destination
80808080
10
Ch. 2 Sample number
0000
14
0
Ch. 2 Time of day
0000
18
00:00:00
Ch. 2 Block CRC
01010101
23
is valid
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B–14
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
SDI_AudioMeas
Measurement Results
Channel A
Tue Mar 24 13:11:00
SDI_AudioMeas
270Mb 525-line
Source Embedded, Channel: 1 & 2, Group: 1, 0 dBr = -20 dBFS
Measurement
Cur
Min
Max
MinL
MaxL Units
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Left Level
-0.0
-0.0
-0.0
----- dBr
Right Level
-10.0
-10.0
-10.0
----- dBr
Left Frequency
800.0
800.0
800.0
----- Hz
Right Frequency
2000.0 2000.0 2000.0
----- Hz
Left THD + N
0.0017 0.0017 0.0017
----- %
Right THD + N
0.0044 0.0044 0.0044
----- %
Level Difference
10.0
10.0
10.0
----- dB
Phase
-72.0
-72.0
144.0
----- deg
Left Stuckbits (23-20)
---Left Stuckbits (19-16)
---Left Stuckbits (15-12)
---Left Stuckbits (11-08)
---Left Stuckbits (07-04)
---Left Stuckbits (03-00)
0000
Right Stuckbits (23-20)
---Right Stuckbits (19-16)
---Right Stuckbits (15-12)
---Right Stuckbits (11-08)
---Right Stuckbits (07-04)
---Right Stuckbits (03-00)
0000
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SDI_AV_Timing
Measurement Results
Channel A
Tue Mar 24 13:01:43
SDI_AV_Timing
270Mb 525-line
Source: Embedded, Group: 1, Channel: 1 & 2, TG2000 Mode
---------------------------------------------------------------------Audio delay
--------------- ms
----------------------------------------------------------------------
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
B–15
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
SDI_EyeDiagram
Measurement Results
Channel A
Tue Mar 24 13:04:53
SDI_EyeDiagram
270Mb 525-line
Measurement
Cur
Min
Max MinL MaxL Units
---------------------------------------------------------------------Amplitude
491
165
491 720.0 880.0 mv *
Rise-Time
965
0 1321 400.0 1500.0 ps *
Fall-Time
1013
0 1659 400.0 1500.0 ps *
Rise/Fall Diff.
48
0
367
--- 500.0 ps
Rise Overshoot
1.9
0.0 361.1
--- 10.0 % *
Fall Overshoot
1.6
0.0 19.1
--- 10.0 % *
DC Offset
2093.0
9.8 2093.0 -500.0 500.0 mv *
Alig. Jitter (1 kHz)
260
10 2971
--- 250.0 ps *
Cable Len (Bel. 8281)
0
meters
----------------------------------------------------------------------
SDI_Format
Measurement Results
Channel A
Tue Mar 24 13:15:29
SDI_Format
270Mb 525-line
Validate 8/10-Bit
Check Audio
BrokenBlk Ch: Off
Luminance Legal Range: 040-3ac
Chrominance Legal Range: 040-3c0
Error Type
Count
Status
---------------------------------------------------------------------Loss of Signal
0
display,log
Loss of TRS Align
0
display,log
Line Length
0
display,log
Horz. Blanking Length 0
display,log
Vert. Blanking Length 0
display,log
Length of Field
0
display,log
Ancillary Header
0
display,log
Ancillary Data
0
display,log
Ancillary Checksum
0
display,log
Ancillary Placement
0
display,log
Anc. Audio Sequence
0
display,log
Anc. Audio Broken Block 0
display,log
Anc. Audio Smpls/Frame 0
display,log
Anc. Audio 5/5 Pattern 0
display,log
Luma Warning Low
0
display,log
Luma Warning High
0
display,log
Luma Error Low
0
display,log
Luma Error High
0
display,log
Chroma Warning Low
0
display,log
Chroma Warning High
0
display,log
Chroma Error Low
0
display,log
Chroma Error High
0
display,log
XY(Z) Status Word
0
display,log
B–16
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
Blanking Empty Space
0
display,log
EDH FF
0
display,log
EDH AP
0
display,log
EDH AD
0
display,log
EDA FF
0
display,log
EDA AP
0
display,log
EDA AD
0
display,log
IDH FF
0
display,log
IDH AP
0
display,log
IDH AD
0
display,log
IDA FF
0
display,log
IDA AP
0
display,log
IDA AD
0
display,log
EDH Missing
0
display,log
EDH Placement
0
display,log
EDH UES
0
display,log
FIFO Overflow
0
display,log
Errored Seconds
0
display
Elapsed Seconds
5
display
----------------------------------------------------------------------
SDI_IC_Timing
Measurement Results
Channel A
Tue Mar 24 12:59:47
SDI_IC_Timing
270Mb 525-line
Relative to digital
---------------------------------------------------------------------Delta (from A)
---------------uSecs
----------------------------------------------------------------------
SDI_Jitter
Measurement Results
Channel A
Tue Mar 24 13:04:23
SDI_Jitter
270Mb 525-line
---------------------------------------------------------------------Display
Frame Rate
Filter
10
Hz
Timing Jitter
0.028 UI
Alignment Jitter
0.020 UI
----------------------------------------------------------------------
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
B–17
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
SDI_Lightning
Measurement Results
Channel A
Tue Mar 24 13:14:03
SDI_Lightning
270Mb 525-line
Field = 1 Line = 17
Reference
Colorbars: 75% SMPTE/EBU
Pk-white (100%) 700.0 mV, Color Pk-to-Pk 525.0 mV
---------------------------------------------------------------------Color Pk-to-Pk B-Y
0.0
mV
Color Pk-to-Pk R-Y
0.0
mV
Pk-white
0.0
mV
Delay B-Y
--------------- ns
Delay R-Y
--------------- ns
----------------------------------------------------------------------
SDI_Picture
Measurement Results
Channel A
Tue Mar 24 13:16:54
SDI_Picture
270Mb 525-line
---------------------------------------------------------------------Fld 1 Ln 22
24-Mar-98 13:16:54
Peak 781 mV
Black
0 mV
270Mb 525-line (Auto detect)
White 714 mV
----------------------------------------------------------------------
SDI_Wander
Measurement Results
Channel A
Tue Mar 24 12:58:26
SDI_Wander
270Mb 525-line
Drift Rate, LP Corner = 0.5 Hz
---------------------------------------------------------------------Maximum
15.45
ppb/sec
Minimum
-7.79
ppb/sec
Peak
0.06
Hz
----------------------------------------------------------------------
SDI_Waveform
Measurement Results
Channel A
Tue Mar 24 12:57:36
SDI_Waveform
270Mb 525-line
---------------------------------------------------------------------Line
17
----------------------------------------------------------------------
B–18
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
Option 20 (Teletext) Results Files
SoundInSync (PAL Only)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:37:29
SoundInSync
Line = 96 (SIS mode)
Accumulation 200 times
---------------------------------------------------------------------(Eye Threshold = 1/250)
Eye Height
86.2 %
201.0 mV
(At Clock)
Eye Width
77.5 %
(At Middle)
'3' Level
370.8 mV
'2' Level
147.1 mV
'1' Level
-86.1 mV
'0' Level
-310.9 mV
P-P Amplitude
106.0 %
722.5 mV
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Teletext (NTSC & PAL)
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 30 16:19:59
Teletext
Waveform->Teletext
Field = 1 Line = 15
Accumulation 400 times
Timing Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------(Eye Threshold = 1/250)
Eye Height
45.9 %
*
70.0
100.0
28.1 IRE
*
49.0
70.0
(At Clock)
Eye Width
58.1 %
*
70.0
100.0
(At Middle)
'1' Level
66.0 IRE
*
67.5
72.5
'0' Level
4.7 IRE
*
-2.5
2.5
P-P Amplitude
156.8 %
*
100.0
130.0
96.1 IRE
*
70.0
91.0
Run-In Start
9.91 u sec
Run-In Bits
16.0 bits
Data Line Width
50.32 u sec
*
52.00
59.00
Data End to Sync
3.32 u sec
*
1.00
3.00
Run-In Amplitude
52.7 IRE
*
67.5
72.5
----------------------------------------------------------------------
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
B–19
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
Option 21 (Camera Testing) Results Files
NOTE. These files show the types of results obtainable from the measurements.
The results shown were not obtained using camera signals.
Detail
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 21 08:19:06
Detail
Camera: cam1
Field = 1 Line = 22 (Synchronous)
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Detail (H Rising Edge) >>>>>> %
Detail (H Falling Edge) >>>>>> %
Detail (V Rising Edge) ------ %
Detail (V Falling Edge) ------ %
---------------------------------------------------------------------Field Rate Display Position 36.0 u sec
Gamma
Measurement Results
Channels A, B, and C
Fri Aug 21 08:27:08
Gamma
Camera: cam1
---------------------------------------------------------------------Gamma (A)
-----Gamma (B)
-----Gamma (C)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------(A)
(B)
(C)
step #1
172.3
171.5
171.0 mV
step #2
172.8
172.0
171.2 mV
step #3
172.8
172.8
172.2 mV
step #4
172.4
172.7
171.8 mV
step #5
71.7
72.0
71.6 mV
step #6
554.6
549.2
545.2 mV
step #7
643.1
641.1
639.4 mV
step #8
544.8
542.5
541.7 mV
step #9
544.9
542.5
541.8 mV
step #10
544.0
542.8
542.1 mV
step #11
544.0
542.5
541.8 mV
Geometry~Registration
Measurement Results
Channels A, B, and C
Fri Aug 21 08:21:06
Geometry/Registration
Camera: cam1
Porta-Pattern Chart
Averaged 0 Frames
---------------------------------------------------------------------Geometry (Ch A): Results Unavailable
Registration (Ch B): Results Unavailable
Registration (Ch C): Results Unavailable
B–20
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
Shading
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 21 08:20:21
Shading
Camera: cam1
Acquired 1 Frame
---------------------------------------------------------------------Ave. Video Level:
10.0 IRE
V. Shading:
0.5 %
H Shading (Averaged): 82.0 %
H. Shading @ F1 L 22: 81.8 %
Max. H. Sh @ F1 L 23: 82.2 %
---------------------------------------------------------------------Measurement Widthg
1.0 uSec
Measurement Position:
Center 35.0 uSec from sync
Vertical~Smear
Measurement Results
Channel A
Fri Aug 21 08:19:46
Vertical Smear
Camera: cam1
Reference White Level
98 IRE at f Stop Undefined
Smear Threshold Level
1 IRE at f Stop Undefined
Above aperture smear -21.1 IRE
Below aperture smear -20.9 IRE
Eq. :: 20 * log(Ref White / Threshold) + 20 * log((Ref Iris / Smr Iris) ^ 2)
---------------------------------------------------------------------Smear: ----- dB
---------------------------------------------------------------------Measurement Width
1.0 uSec
Measurement Positions:
Aperture Center 35.0 uSec from sync
Reference Center 20.0 uSec from sync
Reference White Level measured on F1 Line 102
Above aperture smear measured on F1 Line 9
Below aperture smear measured on F1 Line 189
Colorimetry
Measurement Results
Channels A, B, and C
Fri Sept 06 11:51:31
Colorimetry
Camera ID: Camera 1
Macbeth Chart, 24 Color Chips
3100K (Studio)
SMPTE Phosphors
Nominal Gamma
Default Ref.
---------------------------------------------------------------------DE
DH
Dk. Skin
= 46.0, 2.0
Lt. Skin
= 75.4, 1.4
Blue Sky
= 53.0, 16.9
Foliage
= 42.3, 13.0
Bl. Flower
= 54.5, 11.1
Bl. Green
= 82.4, 23.2
Orange
= 99.9, 5.3
Prpl. Blue
= 53.0, 19.2
Mod. Red
= 106.9, 0.4
Purple
= 35.9, 5.8
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
B–21
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
Yw. Green
= 77.1, 19.6
Or. Yellow
= 91.3, 6.1
Blue
= 52.0, 17.5
Green
= 75.2, 23.9
Red
= 122.0, 1.0
Yellow
= 92.3, 9.1
Magenta
= 98.1, 2.6
Cyan
= 75.0, 25.3
White
= 92.1, 2.9
Neutrl 8
= 77.0, 1.6
Neutrl 6.5
= 61.6, 2.0
Neutrl 5
= 46.4, 2.2
Neutrl 3.5
= 30.1, 2.5
Black
= 15.1, 0.1
Average Weighted DE = 69.0
Average Weighted DH = 8.9
---------------------------------------------------------------------Measurement Width: 8 cycles ( 2.2 uSec)
Measurement Positions:
Packet # 1, F1 L 50, Center 13.0 uSec from sync
Packet # 2, F1 L 50, Center 22.0 uSec from sync
Packet # 3, F1 L 50, Center 30.9 uSec from sync
Packet # 4, F1 L 50, Center 39.5 uSec from sync
Packet # 5, F1 L 50, Center 48.0 uSec from sync
Packet # 6, F1 L 50, Center 56.7 uSec from sync
Packet # 7, F1 L105, Center 13.0 uSec from sync
Packet # 8, F1 L105, Center 22.0 uSec from sync
Packet # 9, F1 L105, Center 30.9 uSec from sync
Packet #10, F1 L105, Center 39.5 uSec from sync
Packet #11, F1 L105, Center 48.0 uSec from sync
Packet #12, F1 L105, Center 56.7 uSec from sync
Packet #13, F1 L160, Center 13.0 uSec from sync
Packet #14, F1 L160, Center 22.0 uSec from sync
Packet #15, F1 L160, Center 30.9 uSec from sync
Packet #16, F1 L160, Center 39.5 uSec from sync
Packet #17, F1 L160, Center 48.0 uSec from sync
Packet #18, F1 L160, Center 56.7 uSec from sync
Packet #19, F1 L220, Center 13.0 uSec from sync
Packet #20, F1 L220, Center 22.0 uSec from sync
Packet #21, F1 L220, Center 30.9 uSec from sync
Packet #22, F1 L220, Center 39.5 uSec from sync
Packet #23, F1 L220, Center 48.0 uSec from sync
Packet #24, F1 L220, Center 56.7 uSec from sync
Defects
Measurement Results
Channel A
Thu Aug 29 17:43:05
CCD Defects
Camera: Camera 1
Room Temperature: 20.0 Celsius,
68 Fahrenheit
CCD H. Density: 728 Pixels
Threshold: 250 mV
Averaged 32 Frames
Largest Defect: 23 Pixels
Max Dev. Found: 404.9 mV
91 Bad Pixels Found
---------------------------------------------------------------------There is 1 Defect With 23 Bad Pixel(s).
There are 2 Defects With 18 Bad Pixel(s) Each.
There is 1 Defect With 14 Bad Pixel(s).
There is 1 Defect With 5 Bad Pixel(s).
B–22
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
There is 1 Defect With 3 Bad Pixel(s).
There are 2 Defects With 2 Bad Pixel(s) Each.
There are 6 Defects With 1 Bad Pixel(s) Each.
Field 1, Line 22, 21.92 uSec
Field 2, Line 22, 21.92 uSec
Field 1, Line 23, 21.92 uSec
Field 2, Line 23, 21.92 uSec
Field 1, Line 24, 21.92 uSec
Field 2, Line 24, 21.85 uSec
Field 1, Line 25, 21.85 uSec
Field 2, Line 25, 21.85 uSec, 22.06 uSec
Field 2, Line 244, 45.13 uSec
Field 1, Line 245, 45.13 uSec
Field 2, Line 245, 42.59 uSec, 45.13 uSec
Field 1, Line 247, 39.85 uSec, 57.57 uSec
Field 2, Line 247, 34.21 uSec
Field 1, Line 248, 34.21 uSec
Field 2, Line 250, 27.07 uSec, 49.05 uSec
Field 1, Line 251, 27.07 uSec, 49.05 uSec
Field 2, Line 251, 49.05 uSec
Field 1, Line 252, 49.12 uSec
Field 2, Line 252, 49.12 uSec
Field 1, Line 253, 49.12 uSec
Field 2, Line 255, 23.02 uSec, 49.19 uSec
Field 1, Line 256, 23.02 uSec, 49.12 uSec
Field 2, Line 256, 23.02 uSec, 49.12 uSec
Field 1, Line 257, 23.09 uSec, 49.12 uSec
Field 2, Line 257, 23.09 uSec, 49.05 uSec
Field 1, Line 258, 23.09 uSec, 49.05 uSec
Field 2, Line 258, 23.16 uSec, 49.05 uSec
Field 1, Line 259, 49.05 uSec
Field 1, Line 260, 16.91 uSec
Field 2, Line 261, 23.16 uSec
Field 1, Line 262, 23.16 uSec
Field 2, Line 262, 23.09 uSec
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Fixed_Pattern~Noise
Recorded Measurement Results
Channel A
Thu Aug 29 17:04:29
Fixed Pattern Noise
Camera: Camera 1
100kHz ~ 4.2MHz
---------------------------------------------------------------------Fixed Pattern Noise
-33.1 dB
---------------------------------------------------------------------Shading Removed
Frequency~Response
Measurement Results
Channels A, B, and C
Thu Aug 29 16:07:21
Frequency Response, Depth of Modulation
Camera: Camera 1
Field = 2 Line = 120 (Synchronous)
Average 20
---------------------------------------------------------------------G (A) Reference Packet # 1 319.3 mV
Packet # 1,
0.0 dB
Packet # 2,
-3.1 dB
*
-3.0
0.0
Packet # 3,
-11.4 dB
*
-5.0
0.0
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
B–23
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
Packet # 4,
-26.0 dB
Packet # 5,
-29.2 dB
Packet # 6,
-29.4 dB
Packet # 7,
-29.8 dB
Packet # 8,
-28.3 dB
Packet # 9,
-28.0 dB
Packet #10,
-16.3 dB
*
-5.0
0.0
Packet #11,
-6.8 dB
*
-3.0
0.0
Packet #12,
-1.8 dB
*
-1.0
0.0
B (B) Reference Packet # 1 290.1 mV
Packet # 1,
0.0 dB
Packet # 2,
-3.6 dB
*
-3.0
0.0
Packet # 3,
-10.5 dB
*
-5.0
0.0
Packet # 4,
-23.8 dB
Packet # 5,
-25.7 dB
Packet # 6,
-26.9 dB
Packet # 7,
-25.3 dB
Packet # 8,
-24.9 dB
Packet # 9,
-26.2 dB
Packet #10,
-16.5 dB
*
-5.0
0.0
Packet #11,
-5.6 dB
*
-3.0
0.0
Packet #12,
-1.8 dB
*
-1.0
0.0
R (C) Reference Packet # 1 332.2 mV
Packet # 1,
0.0 dB
Packet # 2,
-4.1 dB
*
-3.0
0.0
Packet # 3,
-11.2 dB
*
-5.0
0.0
Packet # 4,
-23.1 dB
Packet # 5,
-28.5 dB
Packet # 6,
-29.2 dB
Packet # 7,
-30.1 dB
Packet # 8,
-29.2 dB
Packet # 9,
-25.5 dB
Packet #10,
-15.1 dB
*
-5.0
0.0
Packet #11,
-6.6 dB
*
-3.0
0.0
Packet #12,
-1.8 dB
*
-1.0
0.0
---------------------------------------------------------------------Measurement Width
2.0 uSec
Measurement Positions:
Packet # 1 Center 13.9 uSec from sync
Packet # 2 Center 17.5 uSec from sync
Packet # 3 Center 21.7 uSec from sync
Packet # 4 Center 25.8 uSec from sync
Packet # 5 Center 29.5 uSec from sync
Packet # 6 Center 33.5 uSec from sync
Packet # 7 Center 37.4 uSec from sync
Packet # 8 Center 41.3 uSec from sync
Packet # 9 Center 45.0 uSec from sync
Packet #10 Center 49.0 uSec from sync
Packet #11 Center 52.9 uSec from sync
Packet #12 Center 57.0 uSec from sync
B–24
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
Option 22 (Video Wander) Results File
Measurement Results
Channel A
Thu Aug 29 17:43:05
NTSC Wander Measurement Offset Zero Time 10 sec LP Corner Frequency 1.00 Hz
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------Peak Drift Rate
-21.0 ppb/sec
Peak Frequency Offset
-445.9 ppb
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Option 30 (Component) Results Files
The Component_Vector application produces no results file.
Bowtie
Measurement Results
Channels A, B, and C
Fri Sept 06 16:26:37
Bowtie
Field = 1 Line = 45
Artificial Reference in use at: 35.50 uSec
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Relative Timing B-Y
-4.7 ns
Relative Timing R-Y
-4.8 ns
Relative Amplitude B-Y
-3.15 mV
Relative Amplitude R-Y
-2.03 mV
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Component~Channel_Delay
Measurement Results
Channels A, B, and C
Fri Sept 06 16:35:19
Component Channel Delay
Field = 1 Line = 50
Average 32
---------------------------------------------------------------------Pb to Y Delay Time
-2.7 n sec
Pr to Y Delay Time
6.0 n sec
Pb to Pr Delay Time
-8.8 n sec
----------------------------------------------------------------------
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
B–25
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
Component~ColorBar
Measurement Results
Channels A, B, and C
Fri Sept 06 17:35:19
Component Colorbar
Field = 1 Line = 50
Average 32
SMPTE/EBU, 75%
---------------------------------------------------------------------Y level ( Gray )
702.0 mV
Y level (Yellow )
466.9 mV
Y level ( Cyan )
370.5 mV
Y level ( Green )
310.4 mV
Y level (Magenta)
217.5 mV
Y level ( Red )
158.5 mV
Y level ( Blue )
60.5 mV
Y level ( Black )
0.2 mV
Pb level ( Gray )
0.1 mV
Pb level (Yellow )
-263.5 mV
Pb level ( Cyan )
88.9 mV
Pb level ( Green )
-174.4 mV
Pb level (Magenta)
174.2 mV
Pb level ( Red )
-89.1 mV
Pb level ( Blue )
263.2 mV
Pb level ( Black )
0.0 mV
Pr level ( Gray )
0.1 mV
Pr level (Yellow )
42.4 mV
Pr level ( Cyan )
-262.3 mV
Pr level ( Green )
-220.0 mV
Pr level (Magenta)
219.5 mV
Pr level ( Red )
262.1 mV
Pr level ( Blue )
-42.5 mV
Pr level ( Black )
0.1 mV
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Component~K_Factor
Measurement Results
Channels A, B, and C
Fri Sept 06 15:35:19
Component K Factor
Field = 1 Line = 50
Graticule EIA
Average 32
---------------------------------------------------------------------K-2T (Y)
0.8 % KF
K-5T (Pb)
0.1 % KF
K-5T (Pr)
0.1 % KF
HAD (Y)
199.9 n sec
HAD (Pb)
499.6 n sec
HAD (Pr)
499.4 n sec
K-PB (Y)
-0.0 % KF
K-PB (Pb)
-0.1 % KF
K-PB (Pr)
-0.1 % KF
---------------------------------------------------------------------Pulse position
22.9 (Y), 34.0 (Pb), 33.9 (Pr) u sec
Bar position
36.9 (Y), 25.1 (Pb), 25.1 (Pr) u sec
Ref. position
---- (Y), ---- (Pb), ---- (Pr) u sec (---- = PulseLobe)
Measurement Area 100 (Y), 100 (Pb), 100 (Pr) %
T = 100 n sec
B–26
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
Component~LevelMeter
Measurement Results
Channels A, B, and C
Fri Sept 06 18:35:19
Component LevelMeter
Field = 1 Line = 50
Average 32
---------------------------------------------------------------------Sync
301.5 mV
*
271.4
300.0
Y
701.9 mV
Pb
702.3 mV
Pr
699.3 mV
---------------------------------------------------------------------Sync Tip
2.4 u sec
Back Porch
6.9 u sec
Measurement Cycles( 4 Subcarrier Cycles)
Y Minus Pos
6.9 u sec
Y Plus Pos
11.5 u sec
Measurement Cycles( 4 Subcarrier Cycles)
Pb Minus Pos 19.8 u sec
Pb Plus Pos 52.5 u sec
Measurement Cycles( 4 Subcarrier Cycles)
Pr Minus Pos 26.1 u sec
Pr Plus Pos 46.0 u sec
Measurement Cycles( 4 Subcarrier Cycles)
Component~Multiburst
Measurement Results
Channels A, B, and C
Fri Sept 06 19:35:19
Component Multiburst
Field = 1 Line = 50
Average 32
---------------------------------------------------------------------Flag (Y)
421.2 mV
Packet #1 0.50 MHz (Y) -0.00 dB
Packet #2 1.00 MHz (Y) -0.02 dB
Packet #3 2.00 MHz (Y) -0.07 dB
Packet #4 3.00 MHz (Y) -0.08 dB
Packet #5 4.00 MHz (Y) -0.13 dB
Packet #6 5.00 MHz (Y) -0.15 dB
Flag (Pb)
421.3 mV
Packet #1 0.50 MHz (Pb) -0.00 dB
Packet #2 1.00 MHz (Pb) -0.01 dB
Packet #3 1.50 MHz (Pb) -0.05 dB
Packet #4 2.00 MHz (Pb) -0.03 dB
Packet #5 2.50 MHz (Pb) 0.01 dB
Flag (Pr)
419.4 mV
Packet #1 0.50 MHz (Pr) -0.01 dB
Packet #2 1.00 MHz (Pr) -0.01 dB
Packet #3 1.50 MHz (Pr) -0.05 dB
Packet #4 2.00 MHz (Pr) -0.04 dB
Packet #5 2.50 MHz (Pr) -0.00 dB
---------------------------------------------------------------------Special Positioning:
Y Flag Position 9.3 u sec
Y Flag Width
5.6 u sec
Y Packet #1 Center 10.1 u sec (from flag)
Y Packet #2 Center 17.5 u sec (from flag)
Y Packet #3 Center 25.1 u sec (from flag)
Y Packet #4 Center 32.8 u sec (from flag)
Y Packet #5 Center 40.2 u sec (from flag)
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
B–27
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Pb
Pb
Pb
Pb
Pb
Pb
Pb
Pb
Pb
Pb
Pb
Pb
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Pr
Packet #6 Center 48.0 u
Packet #1 Width
3.5 u
Packet #2 Width
3.0 u
Packet #3 Width
2.2 u
Packet #4 Width
2.2 u
Packet #5 Width
2.0 u
Packet #6 Width
1.4 u
Flag Position 10.1 u sec
Flag Width
5.6 u sec
Packet #1 Center 11.5 u
Packet #2 Center 20.3 u
Packet #3 Center 29.1 u
Packet #4 Center 37.9 u
Packet #5 Center 46.7 u
Packet #1 Width
3.5 u
Packet #2 Width
2.5 u
Packet #3 Width
2.6 u
Packet #4 Width
2.2 u
Packet #5 Width
2.0 u
Flag Position 10.1 u sec
Flag Width
5.6 u sec
Packet #1 Center 11.5 u
Packet #2 Center 20.3 u
Packet #3 Center 29.1 u
Packet #4 Center 37.9 u
Packet #5 Center 46.7 u
Packet #1 Width
3.5 u
Packet #2 Width
2.5 u
Packet #3 Width
2.6 u
Packet #4 Width
2.2 u
Packet #5 Width
2.0 u
sec (from flag)
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
(from
(from
(from
(from
(from
flag)
flag)
flag)
flag)
flag)
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
(from
(from
(from
(from
(from
flag)
flag)
flag)
flag)
flag)
Component~Noise
Measurement Results
Channels A, B, and C
Fri Sept 06 14:35:19
Component Noise
Line = 255
(Y) Band width 10kHz to 5.0MHz
(Pb) Band width 10kHz to 2.5MHz
(Pr) Band width 10kHz to 2.5MHz
Average 32
---------------------------------------------------------------------Noise Level (Y)
-77.5 dB rms
Noise Level (Pb)
-81.3 dB rms
Noise Level (Pr)
-83.1 dB rms
----------------------------------------------------------------------
B–28
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
Component~NonLinearity
Measurement Results
Channels A, B, and C
Fri Sept 06 20:35:19
Component NonLinearity
Field = 1 Line = 50
Average 32
---------------------------------------------------------------------LumaNonLinearity (Y)
0.0 %
LumaNonLinearity (Pb)
0.1 %
LumaNonLinearity (Pr)
0.1 %
---------------------------------------------------------------------Positioning (Y):
5 Steps
1st Luminance Step 19.6 u sec
End Luminance Step 52.7 u sec
Positioning (Pb):
5 Steps
1st Luminance Step 19.6 u sec
End Luminance Step 52.7 u sec
Positioning (Pr):
5 Steps
1st Luminance Step 19.6 u sec
End Luminance Step 52.7 u sec
Lightning
Measurement Results
Channels A, B, and C
Fri Sept 06 16:20:50
Lightning
Field = 1 Line = 86
Average Off
---------------------------------------------------------------------Reference
Colorbars: 75% SMPTE/EBU (60Hz)
Pk-white (100%) 700.0 mV Setup 0.0% Color Pk-to-Pk 525.0 mV
Measured
Color Pk-to-Pk B-Y 701.79 mV
33.67%
Color Pk-to-Pk R-Y 700.22 mV
33.37%
Pk-white
713.47 mV (100%) 1.92%
Delay B-Y
-6 ns
Delay R-Y
-7 ns
----------------------------------------------------------------------
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
B–29
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
Options 40 and 41 (Audio) Results Files
The following Audio applications produce no results file: Calibrate~AudioBoard, Identify~Audio_Hardware.
Audio~Analyzer
Audio Analyzer Measurement Results: Tue Aug 21 15:15:47
Input Number 1
---------------------------------------------------------------------Left Channel:
Frequency =
0.0 Hz
Level = -140.00 dBu
THD+N = 0.000 %
Right Channel:
Frequency =
0.0 Hz
Level = -140.00 dBu
THD+N = 0.000 %
Level Difference (L - R):
0.000 dB
Phase Difference (L - R):
0.00 deg
Left Level:
---------Frequency (Hz)
Level (dBu)
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
Right Level:
----------Frequency (Hz)
Level (dBu)
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
Level Difference:
---------------Frequency (Hz)
Level Diff (dB)
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
Phase Difference:
---------------Frequency (Hz)
Phase Diff (deg)
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
Left THD+N:
---------Frequency (Hz)
THD+N (%)
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
Right THD+N:
----------Frequency (Hz)
THD+N (%)
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
Channel Separation L -> R:
------------------------Frequency (Hz)
Separation (dB)
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
Channel Separation R -> L:
------------------------Frequency (Hz)
Separation (dB)
Lower Limit
Upper Limit
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Audio~Monitor
Audio Monitor Results: Tue Aug 21 15:15:53
Left Meter Level = >>>> dBu
Right Meter Level = >>>> dBu
Sum Meter Level = >>>> dBu
B–30
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
Audio~Spectrum
Audio Spectrum Measurement Results: Tue Aug 21 15:15:59
Input Number 1
---------------------------------------------------------------------View: SPECTRUM
High Resolution Mode: OFF
Active Channel: LEFT
Range: 10 dBu
Weighting Filter: None
Level (188 Hz - 20 kHz): >>>>>>> dBu
Average Off
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Multitone
Multitone Measurement Results: Tue Aug 21 15:16:08
Input Number 1
---------------------------------------------------------------------Analyzed signal: MTone1
Left Level:
---------Ref:
0.00 dBu at
0 Hz
Frequency (Hz)
Level (dB)
Right Level:
---------Ref:
0.00 dBu at
0 Hz
Frequency (Hz)
Level (dB)
Level Difference:
---------------Frequency (Hz)
Level Diff (dB)
Phase Difference:
---------------Frequency (Hz)
Phase Diff (deg)
----------------------------------------------------------------------
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
B–31
Appendix B: Measurement Result Files
View_Audio~Auto_Test
Measurement Results
Tue Aug 21 15:16:12
View Audio Auto Test
--------------------------------------------------------------------At
Thu Dec 19 13:14:53 1991 Video Source: A Audio Input: 1
Test Type
O.33 Program 01 Expected TEST level: 0 dBu
Source
TEK1
Violated Limits
Left
Right
Lower Upper
Insertion Gain Error (dB)
83.39
86.90
**
-0.50
0.50
Sweep Max. Gain (dB)
<-120.00
<-120.00
** Limits Exceeded
Sweep Min. Gain (dB)
<-120.00
<-120.00
** Limits Exceeded
Stereo Channel Assignment
Normal
Normal
THD+N (at 1020Hz) (%)
0.017
0.020
2nd Harmonic (at 1020Hz) (%)
0.002
0.001
THD+N (at 60Hz) (%)
0.017
0.020
2nd Harmonic (at 60Hz) (%)
0.003
0.003
3rd Harmonic (at 60Hz) (%)
0.001
0.001
Crosstalk (into channel) (dB)
-93.95
-92.99
SNR (unweighted) (dB)
92.04
87.94
SNR (weighted) (dB)
88.15
87.48
Max. Compandor Error (rise) (dB) -0.00
-0.00
Max. Compandor Error (fall) (dB) -0.00
0.00
Gain Difference (dB)
<-120.00
** Limits Exceeded
Phase Difference (deg.)
0.02
----------------------------------------------------------------------
B–32
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Index
Index
Symbols
? construct, 2–28, 4–36
?! construct, 2–28, 4–36
A
A group/Audio Configuration keywords, A–1
a group/Digital Audio Setup keywords, A–118
Application names, naming conventions, 2–31
appset command, 2–3
appstart command, 2–3
Audio~Analyzer Results File, B–30
Audio~Monitor Results File, B–30
Audio~Spectrum Results File, B–31
Auto Results File (NTSC), B–3
Auto Results File (PAL), B–4
Auto-Mode Operation, monitoring, 4–33
B
B group/Audio Limit Files keywords, A–4
Bar~Line Time Results File, B–6
Basic Program Listing, 4–22
Bounce Results File, B–6
Bowtie Results File, B–25
Burst~Frequency Results File, B–6
Button names, 2–12
C
C group/Configuration File keywords (PAL), A–16
cancelcopy command, 2–4
Carrier detect flag, 2–28
Chrominance~AMPM Results File, B–7
Chrominance~FreqResp Results File, B–7
Chrominance~NonLinearity Results File, B–7
ChromLum~GainDelay Results File, B–7
cknob command, 2–4
ColorBar Results File, B–8
Colorimetry Results File, B–20, B–21
ColourBar Results File, B–8
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Commands
appset, 2–3
appstart, 2–3
cancelcopy, 2–4
cknob, 2–4
computer, 2–4
control, 2–5
controlbreak, 2–5
delay, 2–6
disptext, 2–6
execute, 2–7
exit, 2–9
filesin, 2–9
get, 2–9
getclock, 2–10
getresults, 2–10
hardkey, 2–12
hardpress, 2–13
hardrelease, 2–13
knob, 2–14
loop, 2–14
playback, 2–15
print, 2–15
query, 2–16
quit, 2–17
remote, 2–17
rename, 2–17
res, 2–18
resoff, 2–22
reson, 2–22
restoreconfig, 2–23
return, 2–23
rgoff, 2–23
rgon, 2–24
set, 2–24
setclock, 2–24
show, 2–25
softkey, 2–25
softpress, 2–26
softrelease, 2–26
spool, 2–26
stop, 2–27
terminal, 2–27
touchpress, 2–27
touchrelease, 2–28
Index–1
Index
Communications libraries, 4–18
Component~Channel_Delay Results File, B–25
Component~ColorBar Results File, B–26
Component~K_Factor Results File, B–26
Component~LevelMeter Results File, B–27
Component~Multiburst Results File, B–27
Component~Noise Results File, B–28
Component~NonLinearity Results File, B–29
computer command, 2–4
Computer mode, 4–19
Computer-based remote control, 4–17
SHELL.BAS program, 4–21
structure of a VM700A program, 4–20
Configuration files, 4–8
Digital Audio Setup, A–118
Digital Source Files, A–103
Eye Limits, A–105
Format Setup, A–112
Source Selection Digital, A–99
Wander Limits, A–108
Configuration keywords, 4–9
Connecting VM700T to a Modem, 1–5
Connecting VM700T to a PC/Terminal
25–pin cable, 1–4
9–pin cable, 1–3
Consecutive Errors parameter, 4–34
control command, 2–5, 4–35
controlbreak command, 2–5
Controlling modems, 4–35
D
D group/Configuration File keywords (NTSC), A–19
d group/Source Selection Digital keywords, A–99
Defects Results File, B–22
delay command, 2–6
DGDP Results File, B–8
disptext command, 2–6
DTE to DCE cable, 1–3
DTE to DTE cable, 1–3
E
F
F group/Component Configuration keywords (PAL),
A–32
filesin command, 2–9
Fixed_Pattern~Noise Results File, B–23
Flow Control, 1–3
Frequency~Response Results File, B–23
ftp
cd command, 4–15
dir command, 4–16
exit command, 4–16
ls command, 4–16
put command, 4–14
pwd command, 4–15
quit command, 4–16
starting, 4–13
starting, from front panel, 4–14
starting, from remote control, 4–14
using, 4–14
Function Keys directory, 4–39
Function names, naming conventions, 2–31
Function playback, 4–7, 4–44
front panel, 4–44, 4–46
remote operation, 4–45
Functions, 4–39
adding comments, 4–43
annotating, 4–43
creating, 4–40
deleting, 4–47
editing, 4–42
Function Editing menu, 4–42
Function Keys directory, 4–39
Function Keys menu, 4–39
Learn Mode menu, 4–41, 4–42
naming, 4–40
playback from front panel, 4–44, 4–46
playback from remote operation, 4–45
printing, 4–48
renaming, 4–48
slowing down, 4–44
speeding up, 4–44
subdirectories, 4–46
E group/Component Configuration keywords (NTSC),
A–22
Echo Results File, B–13
Error Messages, 3–1
execute command, 2–7
Executing measurements, 4–4
exit command, 2–9
Index–2
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Index
G
L
G group/Remote Configuration keywords, A–42
get command, 2–9
getclock command, 2–10
getresults command, 2–10
Getting configuration parameters, 4–10
Getting measurement results, 4–4
Getting system clock time, 4–12
Global out-of-limits flag, 2–29
GroupDelay~SinX_X Results File, B–9
L group/Measurement Locations keywords (PAL),
A–64
Learn mode, 4–41
Level~Meter Results File, B–10
Lightning Results File, B–29
Line~Frequency Results File, B–11
loop command, 2–14
Luminance~NonLinearity Results File, B–11
H
h group/Digital Source File keywords, A–102
H group/Echo/Rounding Configuration keywords
(NTSC), A–47
H_Blank Results File, B–9
H_Timing Results File, B–9
hardkey command, 2–12
hardpress command, 2–13
hardrelease command, 2–13
I
I group/Echo/Rounding Configuration keywords (PAL),
A–48
ICPM Results File, B–10
J
j group/Eye Limits keywords, A–104
J group/Teletext Configuration keywords (NTSC),
A–49
Jitter Results File, B–10
Jitter~Long_Time Results File, B–10
K
K group/Teletext Configuration keywords (PAL), A–55
k group/Wander Limits keywords, A–107
K_Factor Results File, B–10
keyboard
Set1, 4–41
Set2, 4–41
knob command, 2–14
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
M
m group/Digital Source File keywords, A–102
M group/Measurement Locations keywords (NTSC),
A–66
Major-mode applications, naming conventions, 2–30
Measure-mode applications, naming conventions, 2–30
Modem control, 4–35
Monitoring auto-mode operation, 4–33
with remote control, 4–33
without remote control, 4–33
MultiBurst Results File, B–11
Multitone Results File, B–31
N
n group/Format Setup keywords, A–109
N group/Video Wander Configuration keywords
(NTSC), A–68
Naming conventions, 2–30, 2–34
application names, 2–31
button names, 2–12
Function names, 2–31
major-mode applications, 2–30
measure-mode applications, 2–30
Option 1S soft keys, 2–35
Select Line soft keys, 2–32
soft keys, 2–31
No-protocol mode, 4–1
Noise~Spectrum Results File, B–11
NTSC/PAL Results Files, B–3
Index–3
Index
O
Q
o group/Eye Limits keywords, A–104
O group/Video Wander Configuration keywords (PAL),
A–69
Option 1G (Echo Rounding) Results Files, B–13
Option 1S (Serial Digital)
a group keywords, A–118
configuration files
Digital Audio Setup, A–118
Digital Source Files, A–103
Eye Limits, A–105
Format Setup, A–112
Source Selection Digital, A–99
Wander Limits, A–108
d group keywords, A–99
G group keywords, A–120
h group keywords, A–102
j group keywords, A–104
k group keywords, A–107
m group keywords, A–102
n group keywords, A–109
o group keywords, A–104
p group keywords, A–107
r group keywords, A–102
Results Files, B–13
s group keywords, A–109
soft key names, 2–35
t group keywords, A–104
u group keywords, A–107
w group keywords, A–102
y group keywords, A–104
z group keywords, A–107
Option 20 (Teletext) Results Files, B–19
Option 21 (Camera Testing) Results Files, B–20, B–21
Option 22 (Video Wander) Results File, B–25
Option 30 (Component) Results Files, B–25
Options 40 and 41 (Audio) Results Files, B–30
Outputs, 1–2
query command, 2–16
quit command, 2–17
P
P group/Auto Mode Limits keywords (PAL), A–70
p group/Wander Limits keywords, A–107
playback command, 2–15
print command, 2–15
Printing files, 4–7
Programming Languages, 4–18
Index–4
R
R group/Auto Mode Limits keywords (NTSC), A–73
r group/Digital Source File keywords, A–102
Reading configuration parameters, 4–8
remote command, 2–17
rename command, 2–17
res command, 2–18
resoff command, 2–22
reson command, 2–22
restoreconfig command, 2–23
Restoring configuration parameters, 4–11
return command, 2–23
rgoff command, 2–23
rgon command, 2–24
Rounding~Errors Results File, B–13
S
S group/Communication Setup keywords, A–76
s group/Format Setup keywords, A–109
SCH_Phase Results File, B–11
SDI_AncData Results File, B–13
SDI_AncDist Results File, B–14
SDI_AudioFormat Results File, B–14
SDI_AudioMeas Results File, B–15
SDI_AV_Timing Results File, B–15
SDI_EyeDiagram Results File, B–16
SDI_Format Results File, B–16
SDI_IC_Timing Results File, B–17
SDI_Jitter Results File, B–17
SDI_Lightning Results File, B–18
SDI_Picture Results File, B–18
SDI_Wander Results File, B–18
SDI_Waveform Results File, B–18
Select Line soft keys, naming conventions, 2–32
set command, 2–24
setclock command, 2–24
Setting configuration parameters, 4–10
Setting system clock time, 4–12
ShortTime~Distortion Results File, B–12
show command, 2–25
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
Index
Simple remote control, 4–1
printing files, 4–7
ending a terminal session, 4–12
executing measurements, 4–4
function playback, 4–7
getting configuration parameters, 4–10
getting measurement results, 4–4
getting system clock time, 4–12
reading/setting configuration parameters, 4–8
restoring configuration parameters, 4–11
setting configuration parameters, 4–10
setting system clock time, 4–12
starting a terminal session, 4–3
transferring files (SLIP mode only), 4–12
SLIP mode, 4–12
Soft keys, naming conventions, 2–31
softkey command, 2–25
softpress command, 2–26
softrelease command, 2–26
SoundInSync Result File, B–19
SoundInSync Results File, B–19
spool command, 2–26
Starting a terminal session, 4–3
stop command, 2–27
Subdirectories, 4–46
creating, 4–46
deleting, 4–47
renaming, 4–48
traversing, 4–47
T
t group/Eye Limits keywords, A–104
T group/Measure Mode Limits keywords (PAL), A–82
Teletext Results File, B–19
terminal command, 2–27
Terminal mode, 4–19
terminal session, ending, 4–12
Terminal versus Computer mode, 4–19
touchpress command, 2–27
touchrelease command, 2–28
TwoField Results File, B–12
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual
U
U group/Measure Mode Limits keywords (NTSC),
A–86
u group/Wander Limits keywords, A–107
V
V group/Video Source Selection keywords, A–90
V_Blank Results File, B–12
Video~Standard Results File, B–13
View_Audio~Auto_Test Results File, B–32
VITS~ID Results File, B–12
VM700A responses, 4–19
VMBACKIT program, 4–2, 4–12
VMBKUP program, 4–2, 4–12
VMFTP program, 4–2, 4–12
VMT program, 4–2
W
W group/Audio Source Selection keywords, A–92
w group/Digital Source File keywords, A–102
X
X group/Camera Testing keywords (NTSC), A–93
Y
Y group/Camera Testing keywords (PAL), A–96
y group/Eye Limits keywords, A–104
Z
z group/Wander Limits keywords, A–107
Index–5
Index
Index–6
VM700T RS-232 Interface Programmer Manual

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement